Home

Commissioning Manual, Turning and Milling

1. Feedback reports DB4100 41xx Signals from tool management r xx Load location Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB100 Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment error OK DBB101 Reserved DBB102 Reserved DBB103 Reserved DBW104 Error status WORD DBB106 Reserved DBB107 Reserved DBB108 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 7 step 6 step 5 step 4 step 3 step 2 step 1 step 0 DBB109 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 15 step 14 step 13 step 12 step 11 step 10 step 9 step 8 DBB110 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 22 step 22 step 21 step 20 step 19 step 18 step 17 step 16 DBB111 Reserved Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 30 step 29 step 28 step 27 step 26 step 25 step 24 Signal description e Acknowledgment OK DB41xx DBX100 0 The acknowledgment of the PLC user program area DB40xx DBBO to DBB3 was transferred without error to the tool management This signal is
2. 2 43 4444 45 _J6e J7 48 10 11 12 13 14 m No No ring wiring double wiring Figure A 1 Example DRIVE CLiQ line on the X103 terminal of a CU320 e The TM54F must not be operated on the same DRIVE CLiQ line as Motor Modules e The Terminal Modules TM15 TM17 and TM41 have faster sample cycles than the TM31 and TM54F For this reason the two Terminal Module groups must be connected to separate DRIVE CLIiQ lines e Only one Line Module can be connected to a Control Unit Further Line Modules may be connected in parallel to this Line Module e f using chassis design components no more than one Smart Line Module and one Basic Line Module may be jointly operated on one Control Unit mixed operation on a DRIVE CLiQ line e The default sampling times may be changed e Mixed operation of servo and vector is not permitted e Mixed operation servo with vector V f control is possible e During mixed operation of servo and vector V f control separate DRIVE CLiQ lines must be used for Motor Modules mixed operation is not permissible on Double Motor Modules e With vector V f control more than four nodes can only be connected to one DRIVE CLiQ line on the Control Unit e A maximum of nine encoders can be connected e A maximum of eight Terminal Modules can be connected to the CU320 e A maximum of three Terminal Modules can be connected to the CU310 e The Active Line Module booksize and Mot
3. Acknowledgment Transfer step Acknowledg Comment step Old tool New too Ment status 1 0 0 1 End acknowledgment DB9902 DBWO Step and 2 0 0 3 Cancel order DB9902 DBW4 3 0 0 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW8 for subsequent order Step 4 101 0 204 Variable magazine location to DB9902 DBW12 changing point 5 1 2 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW16 Step 6 0 5 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW20 Step 7 3 4 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW24 Step 8 0 2 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW28 Step 9 0 4 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW32 Step 10 1 0 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW36 Step 11 3 0 105 Intermediate acknowledgment DB9902 DBW40 Step 12 DB9902 DBW44 Note The step numbers refer to the flow chart in Chapter Flow chart Tool change Page 360 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine 9 8 4 Example Tool change cycle for milling machine Sample program PROC L6 SAVE DISPLOF Example of a tool change cycle for machine manufacturers DEF INT WZ IN SP WZ VOR DEF REAL SPP spindle position IF NOT P_SEARCH if no block search _WZ_IN_SP TC_MPP6 9998 1 tool in spindle GETSELT _WZ_VOR 7 previously selected tool IF WZ IN SP lt gt WZ VOR i
4. The SINUMERIK 828D works with a fixed maximum configuration of the I O modules As delivered the data transfer to the input and output image of the PLC is deactivated for all I O modules Field with logical input addresses MD Logical input address Data transfer to the PLC deactivated 12986 0 0 1st PP module inactive 12986 1 9 2nd PP module inactive 12986 2 18 3rd PP module inactive 12986 3 27 4th PP module inactive 12986 4 36 5th PP module inactive 12986 5 96 PN bus coupler inactive 12986 6 112 Machine control panel inactive The field of output addresses is empty default setting MD12987 i 1 If an I O module is to be activated its address must not be entered in either MD12986 i or in MD12987 i Instead the value 1 empty must be entered Example Two PP modules and the machine control panel are activated MD Logical input address Data transfer to the PLC deactivated 12986 0 1 1st PP module active 12986 1 1 2nd PP module active 12986 2 18 3rd PP module inactive 12986 3 27 4th PP module inactive 12986 4 36 5th PP module inactive 12986 5 96 PN bus coupler inactive 12986 6 1 Machine control panel active Turning and Milling 64 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the PLC 3 1 Activating I O modules Note The use of an input output address of a deactivated module
5. Tag Description C_TS Identifier for tool string C_TS_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an identifier is available in C_TS C_TE Address extension of the T word C_D Programmed D number C_D_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in C_D C_DL Programmed additive setup offset C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in C_DL In the following example a job for positioning the magazine with POSM is output at the interface During the magazine positioning the block processing of the NC must be controlled by the PLC user program In most cases it is useful to set the load or feed disable during this time As soon as the position setpoint specified in the job is reached asynchronous message of the magazine position the job is terminated with total acknowledgment PROC L6 SAVE SBLOF DISPLOF IF C_T_PROG IF C_T T 0 ENDIF IF C_T gt 0 F C_T lt TC_MAP7 1 POSM C_T ENDIF T SC_T ENDIF ENDIF IF C_TS_PROG _TNO_NEW GETT C_TS 1 IF TNO NEW gt O TL _NEW A_MYMLN TNO NEW ENDIF IF TL NEW gt 0 POSM _ TL NEW ENDIF T C_TS ENDIF M17 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO r r T is numeric T 0 Does the magazine location exist Position magazine T programming of location number T is an identifier Querying of T number Does the T
6. DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active DP3 SLAVE3 SLM_3 3 2 2 206400 4 Supplies Configuration Summary Supply SLM_3 3 2 eel eae rari Su_ The configuration of infeed SLM_3 3 2 has been completed The data must be stored in a non volatile manner if the configuration of infeed SLM_3 3 2 is to be retained after a restart Would you like to store the data of infeed SLM_3 3 2 in a non volatile manner PRVUlIDU FEV WICI FIC Cle YI GP UCRUCIUTY MR DILU Communication to PLC failed Figure 4 14 Infeed Non volatile saving of the data Result Step 2 for commissioning of the drives is now complete 4 1 4 Example How to configure the external encoder Connecting a direct measuring system In addition a direct measuring system is connected for the spindle see chapter Example of a drive configuration Page 67 The following section describes the configuration Turning and Milling 78 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the drive Procedure Turning and Milling 4 1 Configuring the drive To change the configuration of the drive 1 You pressed the vertical softkey Change Start up CHAN1 Jog A Channel reset DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active 206400 4 Drives O verview Motor Data S
7. MD52231 MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON M code for coolant 1 ON 8 You define the M function for coolant 1 that is output when the tool is changed MD52232 MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON M code for coolant 2 ON 7 You define the M function for coolant 2 that is output when the tool is changed MD52233 MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND_2_ ON M code for both coolants ON 1 You define the M function for coolant 1 and 2 that is output when the tool is changed Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 3 Milling MD52281 MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON i M code for tool specific function ON 1 M function is output default setting If both M commands of a function 1 the corresponding field is not displayed on the interface 0 M code for tool specific function 1 ON 1 M code for tool specific function 2 ON 2 M code for tool specific function 3 ON 3 M code for tool specific function 4 ON MD52282 MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF Ii M code for tool specific function OFF 1 M function is output default setting If both M commands of a function 1 the corresponding field is displayed on the interface 0 M code for tool specific function 1 OFF 1 M code for tool specific function 2 OFF 2 M code for tool specific function 3 OFF 3 M code for tool specific function 4 OFF Channel spe
8. MD51787 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_MEASURE_FEED Calibrate measuring feedrate for probe and tool measurement with stationary spindle 100 Default setting Monitoring when measuring with a rotating spindle Turning and Milling General setting data SD54670 SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_PERI_SPEED 0 Maximum permissible peripheral speed of the tool to be measured 100 Default setting Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 195 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions D54671 SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_REVOLUTIONS 0 Maximum permissible tool speed of the tool to be measured The speed is automatically reduced when exceeded 1000 Default setting D54672 SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_FEEDRATE 0 Maximum permissible feedrate to probe the tool to be measured at the probe 20 Default setting D54673 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE O Minimum feedrate for the first probing of the tool to be measured at the probe The avoids excessively small feedrates for large tool radii 1 Default setting D54674 SNS_MEA_CM_SPIND_ROT_DIR 0 Spindle direction of rotation to measure tools 4 Spindle rotation the same as M4 default setting NOTICE If the spindle is already rotating when the measuring cycle is called this direction of rotation remains independent of the setting of this data D54675 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 0 Feedrate factor 1
9. D54618 SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_MINUS_DIR_AX1 i Calibration slot edge in the negative direction of the first measuring axis 0 D54619 SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_BASE_AX 2 i Calibration slot base referred to the 2nd measuring axis 0 D54620 SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_UPPERE_AX2 i Upper calibration slot edge referred to the 2nd measuring axis 0 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions D54621 SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_PLUS_DIR_AX2 i Calibration slot edge in the positive direction of the 2nd measuring axis 0 SD54422 SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_MINUS_DIR_AX2 i Calibration slot edge in the negative direction of the 2nd measuring axis 0 Note For a standard lathe with axes X and Z G18 axis Z is the 1st measuring axis and axis X is the 2nd measuring axis 6 7 11 AUTO Measure tool during milling Calibration data of the tool probe in relation to the MCS Turning and Milling Before calibration is started the position of the tool probe in the machine coordinate system MCS must be entered into the following general setting data In this case the reference point is the outer diameter or the tool length of the active tool in the spindle If there is no tool in the spindle the reference points are the spindle center point and the tool reference point at the spindle Note If
10. Start up CHAN1 A Channel reset Program aborted DP003 Slave003 CU_1_003 1 component 202 POWER ON for DRIVE CLiQ component required Component number 202 _ Start up Loading the firmware from the CompactFlash card to ihalcomponentts has been completed Switch the control off and on again to activate the firmware Communication to PLC failed Figure 4 6 Firmware loaded Note The following selection depends on the configuration of the target system e Without NX expansion module Drive unit softkey e With NX expansion module Drive system softkey Turning and Milling 72 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 8 This example is a configuration without NX module In this example select the Drive unit softkey vertical bar MPF DIR Start up cnan Jog ROV_TEST MPF ZA Channel reset Program aborted 120402 L DP003 Slave003 CU Initial start up required Drive devices Configuration DP3 SLAVE3 CU_I_003 1 The drive unit has the status first commissioning A device configuration must be executed for the drive unit For which module s is the device configuration to be executed Figure 4 7 Drive unit Commissioning 9 Then you receive the message that the device configuration process may last several minutes Start up Drive unit DP3 SLAVE3 CU_1I_003 1 is
11. Target group User Manual SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Operating Manual HMI sl Turning SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Operating Manual HMI sl Milling SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Programming Manual Fundamentals SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Programming Manual Job Planning SINUMERIK 840D sl Programming Manual Measuring Cycles SINUMERIK 802D sl 828D 840D sl Programming Manual ISO Dialects Turning Programming Manual ISO Dialects Milling SINUMERIK 828D Diagnostics Manual Manufacturer SINUMERIK 828D Manual PPU SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual Turning and Milling SINUMERIK 828D Service Manual Hardware and Software SINUMERIK 828D Parameter Manual SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Function Manual Basic Functions SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Function Manual Extended Functions SINUMERIK 840D sl Function Manual Tool Management SINUMERIK 802D sl 828D 840D sl Function Manual ISO Dialects SIMATIC NET System Manual GPRS GSM Modem SINAUT MD720 3 SIMATIC NET Operating Instructions Quad Band GSM Antenna SINAUT 794 4MR Additional references Subject Manual RCS Commander Online help Programming Tool PLC828 Online help Easy Screen SINUMERIK 840D sl Programming Manual Easy Screen in Commissioning Manual Base Software and HMI sl Easy Message SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Operating Manual HMI sl Turning SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl Operating Manual HMI sl Milling ePS Network Services ePS Network Services Function Manual and online help
12. The 1st data set must always be used for Cylinder surface transformation without groove side offset 512 and the 2nd data set for Cylinder surface transformation with groove side offset 513 6 3 4 ShopMill Setting up cycles for milling Requirement Turning and Milling Software option E You require the following software option in order to use the ShopMill function ShopMill ShopTurn In order that simulation and simultaneous recording are displayed without any errors set the machine data as described in the following section Setting the simulation and simultaneous recording option Page 111 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 121 Configuring cycles 6 3 Milling Milling under ShopMill 122 In order that the direction of rotation is correctly displayed in the ShopMill user interface and when programming ShopMill functions the correct direction of rotation is executed you must make some settings that are coordinated with one another You must align these settings to the actual direction of rotation of the axis at the machine MD52229 MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES Enable quick M commands 0H default setting Bit 0 Coolant OFF Bit 1 Coolant 1 ON Bit 2 Coolant 2 ON Bit 3 Coolant 1 and 2 ON MD52230 MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_OFF M code for all coolants OFF 9 You define the M function to switch off the coolant that is output when the tool is changed
13. The general setting data SD54632 SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL is used to define in which axes and directions it is possible to calibrate the tool probe Decimal place ONES 1st axis 0 axis not possible 1 only minus direction 2 only plus direction 3 both directions TENS 2nd axis 0 axis not possible 1 only minus direction 2 only plus direction 3 both directions Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 OBAO Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Decimal place HUNDREDS 3rd axis 0 axis not possible 1 only minus direction 2 only plus direction 3 both directions Example If the general machine data SD54632 SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL 123 the tool probe is calibrated as follows in the G17 plane e X in both directions e Y only in plus direction e Z only in minus direction SD54633 SNS_MEA_TP_TYPE Ii Probe version 0 Cube default setting 101 Disk in XY working plane G17 201 Disk in ZX working plane G18 301 Disk in YZ working plane G19 SD54634 SNS_MEA_TP_CAL_MEASURE_DEPTH Ii Distance between the upper edge of the tool probe and lower edge of the tool calibration depth measuring depth for milling radius 2 Default setting Calibration data of the tool probe in relation to the WCS Before calibration i
14. Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Preface Subject Manual Networking SINUMERIK 840D sl Manual Operator Components and Networking SAFETY safe standstill SINAMICS S120 SINUMERIK 840D sl Manual Machine Configuration Questions about this documentation If you have any queries suggestions corrections in relation to this documentation please send a fax or e mail to the following address Fax 49 9131 98 2176 E mail mailto docu motioncontrol siemens com A fax form is available at the end of this document SINUMERIK Internet address http www siemens com sinumerik Technical Support If you have any technical questions please contact our hotline Europe Africa Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 0 14 min from the German fixed line network cell phone charges may vary Internet http www siemens com automation support request Americas Phone 1 423 262 2522 Fax 1 423 262 2200 E mail mailto techsupport sea siemens com Asia Pacific Phone 86 1064 757575 Fax 86 1064 747474 E mail mailto support asia automation siemens com Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0OBA0 5 Preface Note National telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following Internet address http www siemens com automation partner EC De
15. 6 7 Settings for activating cycles MD52201 MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION Technology extension for combined machines with several technologies 1 Additional settings for the turning technology 2 Additional settings for the milling technology e g lathe with milling technology MD52200 MCS_TECHNOLOGY 1 MD52201 MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION 2 MD52212 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Cross technology function mask Bit 0 Enable swiveling 0 Swivel plane swivel tool not enabled 1 Swivel plane swivel tool enabled Bit 1 No optimized travel along the software limit switches 0 No optimized travel along the software limit switches 1 Optimized travel along the software limit switches Bit 2 Approach logic for stepped drill ShopTurn Bit 3 Call block search cycle 0 The E_S_ASUP and F_S_ASUP cycles are not called in the block search cycle PROG_EVENT SPF 1 The E_S_ASUP and F_S_ASUP cycles are called in the block search cycle PROG_EVENT SPF default setting Bit 4 Approach logic using the cycle ShopTurn MD52240 MCS_NAME_TOOL_CHANGE_PROG Tool change program for G code steps Program name The associated program is called for tool change Turning and Milling 106 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles Meaning of the axes 6 7 Settings for activating cycles MD52206 MCS_AXIS_USAGE i Meaning of the a
16. MD14516 x Meaning Bit 0 NC start disabled Bit 1 Read in disable Bit 2 Feed hold for all axes Bit 3 EMERGENCY STOP Bit 4 PLC in stop Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Definition for alarm or message Bit 6 1 gt alarm Bit 6 0 gt message Bit 7 POWER ON Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 41 Settings on the HMI 2 6 Contiguring user alarms Configuring alarm texts with variables 2 6 2 The following data types are permitted for variables in the alarm text Variable Meaning b Binary representation of a 32 bit value d Integer decimal number f 4 byte floating point number i Integer decimal number with sign 0 Integer octal number u Unsigned decimal number X Integer hexadecimal number How to create user PLC alarms Notes for processing Procedure 42 The following points should be observed when processing the files The files should be edited externally on a PG PC with a text editor e g notepad or with an XML editor The structure must not be altered The created alarm text files are copied to the the following directory on the CompactFlash card oem sinumerik hmi ing To enable the system to recognize the alarm text file the file name must be written in lower case letters The alarm text file is converted during system startup A restart of the HMI is necessary to activate the alarms To edit a larger number of alarms first create 2 or 3 alar
17. SD55584 SCS_TURN_CONT_BLANK_OFFSET Distance from the blank at which GO is switched over to G1 during contour turning to compensate for any blank allowances This applies for stock removal plunge cutting and plunge turning 1 1 mm or 1 inch blank allowance Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 125 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning SD55585 SCS_TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TIME Time for the feedrate interruption for contour turning This applies for stock removal plunge cutting and plunge turning gt 0 Interruption time in seconds lt 0 Interruption time in revolutions 0 No interruption Note The channel specific setting data SD55585 is only evaluated if SD55586 SCS_TURN_CONT_INTER_RETRACTION 0 SD55586 SCS_TURN_CONT_INTER_RETRACTION Retraction distance for contour turning for feedrate interruption This applies for stock removal plunge cutting and plunge turning gt 0 Retraction distance at feed interruption SD55585 SCS_TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TIME has no effect 0 No retraction distance D55587 SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MAT_AX1 Limit for removal of residual material in the direction of axis 1 for G18 Z min This applies for stock removal plunge cutting and plunge turning 50 50 min differential dimension for the residual material machining axis 1 Turning and Milling 126 Commissioning Manual 09 2009
18. lt BOOK gt lt HMI_SL_HELP gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 57 Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help Saving help files in the target system 58 In the following example the structure of a help book with the name Easy Help with table of contents and subject index is described Procedure 1 Copy the configuration file slhlp xml to the following directory oem sinumerik hmi cfg Create a directory for T language of the online help under the following path oem sinumerik him hlp Use the specified language code from Chapter List of language codes used for file names Page 383 Note Notation The directory names must be written in lower case For example if you are integrating a help in English create an eng directory Place the help book e g hmi_myhelp xml in the eng directory oem sinumerik him hlp eng hmi_myhelp xml Copy the help files to the following directory oem sinumerik him hlp eng hmi_myhelp The settings become effective only after restarting the HMI NOTICE Updates or changes For the display of the table of contents and index of a help book and for quicker processing inthe siemens sinumerik sys_cache hmi h1p directory the help files are stored in binary format slhlp_ lt Hilfebuch gt _ _ lt Ing gt hmi In the example slhip_hmi_myhelp_ _eng hmi These files must fir
19. 132 MD24300 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3 Definition of the 3rd transformation in the channel 513 TRACYL main spindle MD24310 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 i Axis assignment for transformation 3 0 1 Perpendicular to the rotary axis XC 1 3 Rotary axis main spindle C1 2 2 Parallel to rotary axis ZC 3 6 Parallel to the cylinder surface and perpendicular to the rotary axis ZC Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 OBAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD24320 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3 i Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 3 0 1 1st channel axis X 1 3 2nd channel axis Y 2 2 3rd channel axis Z MD24800 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Offset of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation 0 MD24805 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 Axial offset of the rotary axis is taken into account during TRACYL 2 MD24810 MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Sign of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation 1 MD24820 MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 i Vector of the base tool for the 1st TRACYL transformation 0 0 1 0 2 0 6 4 5 End face machining TRANSMIT Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation For general settings
20. 4 Start commissioning with the Drive system softkey horizontal bar the following dialog appears Start up CHAN1 Jog iZ Channel reset Drive setup Drive Object Bus Address Name Load firm Identify via LED A Communication to PLC failed Drive devices Figure 4 4 Drive commissioning Supplies 5 To ensure the drive s firmware matches the software level on the control press the Load firmware softkey vertical bar The current firmware on the control s CompactFlash card is loaded to the drive Start up NOTICE Depending on the configuration of the drive system it may take up to several tens of minutes to load the firmware into all the drive unit components and this cannot be interrupted Do you want to load the firmware from the CF card into all components Figure 4 5 Message on time needed 6 Confirm this message with Yes During loading you will be informed of progress with a status display While the firmware is loading the RDY LED flashes alternately red green on the appropriate module When the module is finished this LED will show a steady green light The DC LINK LED will show a steady orange light Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 71 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 7 When the firmware has finished loading successfully confirm this message with OK
21. Magazine status Number of lines in magazine Number of magazine locations Location type Location type every tool location type 0 compatible with Consider adjacent location On would be 0 Off Location status Location type index always number 9998 Magazine type 7 Buffer Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management Turning and Milling 9 7 Application example for turning machine N540 TC_MAP2 9998 BUFFER lt lt NUM_MAG N550 TC_MAP3 9998 17 N560 TC_MAP6 9998 1 N570 TC_MAP7 9998 NUM BUFFER Locations in the buffer Spindle 580 TC_MPP1 9998 1 2 590 S TC_MPP2 9998 1 0 610 TC_MPP4 9998 1 2 N N N600 S TC_MPP3 9998 1 0 N N620 TC_MPP5 9998 1 1 630 640 FOR PLACE 2 to NUM BUFFER Gripper 650 STOPRE 660 TC_MPP1 9998 PLACE 3 670 TC_MPP2 9998 PLACE 0 680 TC_MPP3 9998 PLACE 0 690 TC_MPP4 9998 PLACE 2 700 TC_MPP5 9998 PLACE PLACE N710 endfor N720 STOPRE N730 Definition of loading magazine r N740 TC_MAP1 9999 9 N750 TC_MAP2 9999 LOADING MAGAZINE lt lt NUM_MAG N760 TC_MAP3 9999 17 N770 TC_MAP4 9999 1 N780 TC_MAP5 9999 1 N790 TC_MAP6 9999 1 N800 TC_MAP7 9999 NUM LOAD N810 STOPRE N820 Loading magazine locations 830 for PLACE 1 to NUM _LOAD 840 STOPRE 860 TC_MPP2 9999 PLACE 0 N N N850 TC_MPP1 9999 PLACE 7
22. TC_CARR41 n to TC_CARR60 n Assignment of base vectors to the fine offset vectors 11 TC_CARR1 3 n to TC_CARR41 43 n 12 TC_CARR4 6 n to TC_CARR44 46 n 13 TC_CARR15 17 n to TC_CARR55 57 n 14 TC_CARR18 20 n to TC_CARRS58 60 n The fine offsets are activated by the following setting data D42974 SC_TOCARR_FINE_CORRECTION 1 The fine offsets act in addition to the corresponding base vectors when the Swivel function CYCLE800 or the NC function TCARR n is called Turning and Milling 166 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Contiguring cycles 6 5 6 Example of the commissioning of swivel head 1 Swivel head 1 HEAD_1 6 5 Swivel The vectors relate to the kinematics initial setting not true to scale in the drawing Rotary axis 1 C Manual around Z Rotary axis 2 A Manual around X Changeable swivel head Manually adjustable Changeable swivel head with steep taper to hold the spindle Figure 6 7 Swivel head 1 HEAD_1 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 L1 corresponds to tool length 167 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Commissioning softkey Swivel kinematics example 1 Kinematics Swivel head HEAD_1 Retract Z X Y Z 200 000 Offset vector 11 0 000 0 030 63 000 Rotary axis vector V1 0 000 0
23. A Double Motor Module a DMC20 a TM54F and a CUA32 each correspond to two DRIVE CLiQ participants This also applies to Double Motor Modules of which just one drive is configured In STARTER you can change and check the DRIVE CLiQ topology for each drive unit in the Topology screen To enable the function Automatic configuration to assign the encoders to the drives the recommended rules below must be observed Recommended rules e The DRIVE CLiQ cable from the Control Unit must be connected as follows To X200 of the first booksize power unit To X400 of the first chassis power unit e The DRIVE CLiQ connections between the power units must each be connected from interface X201 to X200 or from X401 to X400 on the follow on component e A Power Module with the CUA31 should be connected to the end of the DRIVE CLiQ line CU Single Double Single Power Module 320 Motor Motor Motor Blocksize Module Module Module X103 X102 X202 X402 X203 X202 X402 co a a X101 X201 X401 X202 X201 X401 X202 X00 X200 X400 X200 X400 X201 ee X200 Figure A 2 Example DRIVE CLiQ line Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 395 References A 6 Rules for wiring with DRIVE CLIQ e The motor encoder must be connected to the associated power unit Component Connecting the motor encoder via DRIVE CLiQ Single Motor Module booksize X202 Dou
24. Example string insert lt function name string insert gt string index insert string lt function gt string String variable index Number of characters to be inserted insert string String to be inserted 8 6 11 string find Description lt let name str1l type string gt A brown bear hunts lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt a brown dog lt let gt lt function name string insert gt strl 19 str2 lt function gt 7Result strl A brown bear hunts a brown dog The function searches the transferred string for the first match with the substring If the substring is found the function provides the index to the first character starting with zero otherwise 1 Programming Designation Syntax Parameters Example string find lt function name string find return lt int val gt gt str1 find string lt function gt string String variable find string String to be found lt let name index gt 0 lt let gt 278 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O Easy Extend 8 6 String functions 8 6 12 string reversefind Description lt let name strl type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name string find return index gt strl _T brown lt function gt Result index 2 The function searches the transferred string for the last match with the substring If the substring is
25. Feedrate factor 1 10 Default setting 0 Only single probing with the feedrate calculated by the cycle However as a minimum the value from SD54673 0 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE 21 First probing with feedrate But at least with the value of D54673 0 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE D54675 0 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54676 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_2 0 Feedrate factor 2 0 Second probing with the feedrate calculated by the cycle This is only effective for SD54673 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 0 gt 0 default setting 21 Second probing with the calculated feedrate from SD54673 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE 0 feedrate factor 2 Third probing with the calculated feedrate NOTICE Feedrate factor 2 should be less than feedrate factor 1 SD54677 SNS_MEA_CM_MEASURING_ACCURACY 0 Specified measuring accuracy The value of this parameter always refers to the last probing of the tool at the probe 0 005 Default setting Measured value correction using correction tables SD54691 SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_OFFSET Activates the measuring result correction 0 No data default setting 1 Correction in the cycle This is only effective if SD54690 SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER3 gt 0 2 Correction using user define
26. SIEMENS Preface Scope of delivery and 4 requirements Settings on the HMI SINUMERIK Commissioning the PLC SINUMERIK 828D Turning and Milling Commissioning the drive Setting NCK machine data Commissioning Manual Configuring cycles Service Planner Easy Extend OO 0O N O O O IN Tool management O Series start up References Ww gt List of abbreviations Valid for NCU system software Version 2 6 HMI sl Version 2 6 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken NCAUTION with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicat
27. Supported languages Standard languages Language Abbreviation in file name Chinese simplified chs Chinese traditional cht German deu English eng Korean kor Portuguese Brazil ptb Other languages Language Abbreviation in file name Czech csy Danish dan Spanish esp Finnish fin French fra Hungarian hun Italian ita Japanese jpn Dutch nid Polish plk Romanian rom Russian rus Slovakian sky Swedish sve Turkish trk Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 383 References A 2 List of the alarm number ranges A 2 List of the alarm number ranges Number ranges of alarms Number range Description Source ID Source URL 000 000 009 999 General alarms 0 INCK 010 000 019 999 Channel alarms 020 000 029 999 Axis spindle alarms 030 000 039 999 General functional alarms 040 000 059 999 reserved 060 000 064 999 Siemens cycle alarms 065 000 069 999 User cycle alarms 070 000 079 999 Compile cycle alarms manufacturer and OEM 080 000 084 999 Message texts for Siemens cycles 085 000 089 999 Message texts for user cycles 090 000 099 999 reserved 100 000 129 000 System 10000 HMI 130 000 139 000 OEM 140 000 199 999 reserved 200 000 299 999 Drive SINAMICS 0 INCK
28. The settings for the tool management dialogs on the HMI are made in general setting data 54215 D54215 SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET Tool management function mask Bit 0 Bit 1 Diameter display for rotating tools For rotating tools the diameter is displayed and not the radius M4 is the default direction of rotation for all turning tools When creating turning tools the direction of rotation is pre assigned with M4 Bit 2 Create tool without name suggestion Bit 3 Input lock tool name and tool type for loaded tools For loaded tools the tool name and the tool type can no longer be changed Bit 4 Input lock for loaded tools if the channel is not in the reset state Bit 5 Calculate by adding tool wear entries Wear data is entered in addition to the already existing wear value Bit 6 Numerical input of the tool identification Only numbers are permitted for the input of the tool identification Bit 7 Hide tool monitoring parameters The tool monitoring parameters are hidden in the user interface Bit 8 Diameter display for face axis gt Geometry The geometry value of the face axis is displayed as diameter value Bit 9 Diameter display for face axis gt Wear The wear value of the face axis is displayed as diameter value Bit 10 Enable tool load relocate to buffer storage locations The magazine number can be entered into the Load dial
29. Turning and Milling 246 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend Example Turning and Milling e Function body with return value Attributes optional 8 5 Description of the script language lt FUNCTION_BODY name function_name parameter p1 p2 p3 return true gt lt let name tmp gt lt let gt lt op gt tmp p1 lt op gt lt op gt return tmp lt op gt lt FUNCTION_BODY gt name return parameter Name of the subfunction s function body If the attribute is set to true the system creates the local variable return The function s return value which is forwarded to the calling function when exiting the function body should be copied to this variable The attribute lists the expected transfer parameters The parameters must be separated by a comma When the function body is called the values of the parameters specified in the function call are copied to the transfer parameters listed lt function_body name test parameter cl c2 c3 return true gt lt let name tmp gt 0 lt let gt lt op gt tmp clt c2 c3 lt op gt lt op gt Sreturn tmp lt op gt lt function_body gt lt let name my_var gt 4 lt let gt lt function name test return my var gt 2 3 4 lt function gt lt print text result d gt my var lt print gt lt op gt tmp clt c2 c3 lt op gt lt op gt Sreturn tmp lt op gt lt function_
30. eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenaes 298 922 HOON ANGE pease sssciesa tenia ctnoicanseatinadsa nica aiaindadeae E E Eaa E AEA A alana EEEa EESE 304 9 2 3 Transfer step and acknowledgment step tables cccccccccssecececseeeeeesneeeeessneeeecsaeeeessseeeeneas 3TT 9 3 Machine data for the tool MANAGEMENT cece ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseneaeeeseeaeeeteenaees 313 9 4 PLG Programm BlOCKS encrancar viii a r aa 320 9 4 1 Acknowledgment ProCESSscuiicensiiain iiaia iaaa aiai iaei aiia 320 9 4 2 Types of acknowledgment ce ceeeceeececeeeeeceseeeceeeceeecaaeaeceaeeeeeeeeeesaeesaaesaecaeeeeeeeseseeeeneeaeeeaes 3271 9 4 3 Acknowledgment states 0 eccceeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeceeaaeeeeeeaeeeseecaeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaas 322 9 4 4 Configuring step tables sc css shes edi ce nce eee iosaesieasentspanh eaneeadiactnetaichadeatstee nnmnnn nnn 327 9 4 5 Configuring acknowledgment Steps cc ccecceecceeeeceeeceeeeeeeecaeecaeecaaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseesieeenaeeireeees 330 9 4 6 Adjust the PLC user proglasena a Hives een ended acess 33T 9 4 7 Information on magazine location sides secuwrstthivtacxecasiuyrncssd suatadion neihiddeetsuaukesuhidnasthiassetdudecptnads 332 9 4 8 Pilservice TMMVT L ereiniiieenrienanninn ensaian cus seaursatd enseasdagtavuuicedlpescesuneesbuematanese 335 9 5 Example Loading Unloading cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeenaee
31. gt Setting data Sx_ lt name index AX lt axis_number gt gt SxS_ lt namel index AX lt axis_number gt gt Structure Meaning x N General machine or setting data C Channel specific machine or setting data A Axis specific machine or setting data index AX lt axis_number gt For a field the parameter indicates the index of the data The required axis lt axis_number gt has to be specified for axis specific data Alternatively the axis index can be read from a local variable using a substitution character lt variable name gt e g AX localvariable Example lt data name SMN AXCONF_MACHAX NAMI e Direct addressing of the axis Turning and Milling lt data name MA _CTRLOUT MODULE NR O Indirect addressing of the axis lt let name axisIndex gt 1 lt le es E TAB O gt X1 lt data gt AX1 gt 1 lt data gt lt data name SMA CTRLOUT MODULE NR 0 AXS axisIndex gt 1 lt data gt Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 265 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Addressing the global user data Addressing starts with the path section gud followed by the specification of the area CHANNEL This address section is followed by the specification of the GUD areas GUD areas Assignment sgud Siemens GUD mgud Machine manufacturer GUD ugud User GUD Then enter the GUD name If an array is t
32. lt CONFIGURATION gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 51 Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help 2 7 2 Structure and syntax of the help book Syntax for the help book 52 The help book is an XML file in which the structure of the online help is defined The name of the file can be freely selected e g Ami_myhelp In this file you define e HTML documents e Contents and subject index Tag Number Meaning HMI_SL_HELP 1 Root element of the XML document BOOK Identifies a help book The name can be freely selected Attributes ref Identifies the HTML document that is displayed as the entry page for the help book titel Title of the help book that is displayed in the table of contents helpdir Directory that contains the online help of the help book ENTRY Chapter of the online help Attributes ref Identifies the HTML document that is displayed as entry page for the chapter titel Title of the chapter that is displayed in the table of contents INDEX_ENTRY Subject keyword to be displayed Attributes ref Identifies the HTML document that is jumped to for this subject index entry titel Title of the subject that is displayed in the subject index The following applies to the Number column means 0 or several means 1 or several Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20
33. white space normal pre nowrap pre Defines how whitespace characters are handled wrap in HTML documents margin top lt length gt px Width of the upper edge of the paragraph in pixels margin bottom lt length gt px Width of the lower edge of the paragraph in pixels margin left lt length gt px Length of the left hand edge of the paragraph in pixels margin right lt length gt px Width of the righthand edge of the paragraph in pixels vertical align baseline sub super Vertical alignment for text in tables only the values middle top and bottom are supported border color lt color gt Border color for text tables border style none dotted dashed dot dash dot dot dash solid double groove ridge inset outset Border style for text tables background lt background color gt lt background image gt Short notation for background property page break before auto always Page break before a paragraph table page break after auto always Page break after a paragraph table background image lt uri gt Background image for elements Supported CSS selectors All CSS 2 1 selector classes are supported with the exception of so called pseudo selector classes such as first child visited and hover 56 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM sp
34. 268 XML identifier up 256 AGM 239 BOX 258_ CAPTION 256 CLOSE 256 CONTROL 258 CONTROL_RESET 241 DATA 241 DATA_ACCESS 242 DATA_LIST 242 DEVICE 239 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO Index DRIVE_VERSION 243 FILE 244 FORM 257 FUNCTION 245 FUNCTION_BODY 246 IMG 260 INCLUDE 248 INIT 257 LET 249 MSGBOX 250 NAME 239 OP 251 OPTION_MD 252 PAINT 257 PASSWORD 253 PLC_INTERFACE 253 POWER _OFF 254 PRINT 255 PROPERTY 261 REQUEST 262 SET_ACTIVE 240 SET_INACTIVE 240 SOFTKEY_CANCEL 262 SOFTKEY_OK 262_ START_UP 239 TEST 240 TEXT 263 UID 240 UPDATE_CONTROLS 263 VERSION 240 WAITING 255 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 413 Index Turning and Milling 414 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0
35. 6 3 1 Technology cycles for Milling sssini aaa ARAA A Aa AAAA T16 6 3 2 Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteaeeesieeenneeeeeeeees 17 6 3 3 Example Axis configuration for milling MACHINES cece cence eeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeaeeeseeeeeeteenaees 118 6 3 4 ShopMill Setting up cycles for MANN isasaisisidevaustianencaianeacencacnssdnawsbtsnasmiaedaatssnesiansadssssadas snaed 121 6 4 TUNN enno E inane tesedaaevbediaetiaesiticneentenn sok 124 6 4 1 Technology cycles for turning cceccccceceseeseecceeseeeeceaeeaecaeseeceseeaecaeeeeeeaeceeseaeeaesaesaesnaeeeeaeeaes 124 6 4 2 Example Residual material machining isisisccciacsentacsasisrneddvanddinranstvddeabdsuanadietancdananantadd wacgine 127 6 4 3 Example Axis configuration for lathes ccccceceeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeeeineeeeees 129 6 4 4 Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL c ccccccceseesceeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaesaeseseeseaeeaeens 130 6 4 5 End face machining TRANSMIT scicisiasscsscarnstsasaswusitinssnencdiaudantzentasaciiuaddiciadeusieadineaudiaddieamasies 133 6 4 6 Inclined axis TRAANG isssiiriviseisisaisinnna a i aaia aidaa iiiad aias 136 6 4 7 ShopTurn Setting up cycles for turning cce ceecceeeceeeceeeeeeee see seeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeseaetneeenenees 139 6 4 8 ShopTurn Counterspindle c cccccccccsscccsceessecsecseceseccseecseccseecaecsaecesecesescses
36. 6FC5397 3DP20 OBA0O Settings on the HMI 2 5 Checking and entering licenses 2 5 1 How to enter a license key Requirement The appropriate licenses are required for the activated options After licensing the options in the Web License Manager you receive a license key containing all options requiring a license and which is only valid for your system CompactFlash card To set or reset options Manufacturer access rights are required Entering the license key Turning and Milling Procedure 1 Select the Start up operating area 2 Press the menu forward key 3 Press the Licenses softkey The Licensing window opens and gives you the following options Determine the license requirement All options and Missing licenses softkeys Softkey Exp license requirement Entry line Enter license key Licensing Overview options licenses po Exp license requirement license key Serial number of CF card Hardware type SINUMERIK 8280 License Key is sufficient Here you can enter a new license key Series g start u Li I censes Figure 2 3 Entering the license key Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 37 Settings on the HMI 2 5 Checking and entering licenses 2 5 2 How to determine the license requirement Determining the license requirement Procedure 38 1 2 Press the All options softkey to list all the
37. A brown bear hunts a big salmon The function deletes all the substrings found Programming Designation Syntax Parameters Example string remove lt function name string remove gt string remove string lt function gt string String remove string Substring to be deleted lt let name index gt 0 lt let gt lt let name strl1 type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt 276 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 6 String functions lt function name string remove gt strl _T a brown dog lt function gt Result strl A brown bear hunts 8 6 9 string delete Description The function deletes the defined number of characters starting from the start position specified Programming Designation string delete Syntax function name string delete gt string start index nCount lt function gt Parameters string String start index Start index nCount Number of characters Example lt let name strl type String gt A brown bear hunts lt let gt lt function name string delete gt strl 2 5 lt function gt 7Result strl A bear hunts 8 6 10 string insert Description The function inserts a string at the index specified Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 277 Easy Extend 8 6 String functions Programming Designation Syntax Parameters
38. DB1201 DBW1002 Location number 3 DB1201 DBW1004 Magazine number 9998 Order DB1200 DBX0 1 Write variable 0 DB1200 DBX0 2 PI service 0 DB1200 DBB1 Number of variables 2 DB1200 DBX0 0 Start gt 1 Result DB1200 DBB2000 0 Order completed 1 DB1200 DBX2000 1 Error in order 0 DB1200 DBX3000 0 Variable is valid 1 DB1200 DBB3001 Access result 0 DB1200 DBW3004 Data from NCK variable n DB1201 DBX3000 0 Variable is valid 1 DB1201 DBB3001 Access result n DB1201 DBW3004 Data from NCK variable 0 351 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine 9 7 7 Example Transporting a tool from a buffer into the magazine Procedure A tool is to be moved from a buffer for example of a gripper into the magazine The empty location search for the tool from gripper 1 magazine 9998 location 2 is executed with PI Service TMMVTL and an order to relocate the tool is generated In the PLC user program enter the parameters in DB1200 and in DB1200 DBX0 0 set the start to read the PI service Start PI Services in the Address Signal Values NCK area Parameters DB1200 DBW4 Tool number 0 DB1200 DBW6 Source location number 2 DB1200 DBW8 Source magazine number 9998 DB1201 DBW10 Target location number 1 DB1201 DBW12 Target magazine number 1 Order DB1200 DBX0 1 Write variable 0 DB1200 DBX0 2 PI service 1 DB1200 DBB1 PI index 5 DB1200 DBX0 0 Start gt 1 Result DB1200 DBB2000 0 Order completed DB1200 DBX2000
39. DB43xx DBW 6 DBW34 Job description DB43xx DBX100 0 DB43xx DBX100 1 Positive feedback Acknowledgment status acknowledgment OK one PLC cycle pending Negative feedback Acknowledgment status acknowledgment error static pending DB43xx DBX100 0 DB43xx DBX100 1 DB43xx DBX100 0 Positive feedback Acknowledgment status one PLC cycle pending Negative feedback Acknowledgment status static pending Tool management feedback Acknowledgment status DB43xx DBB104 Tool management feedback Error status DB43xx DBX108 0 DB43xx DBX111 6 Map of acknowledgments for tool change This map belongs to the positive or negative feedback and remains valid for the same time DB43xx DBW124 DBW138 Job status Jobs DB4300 43xx Signals from tool management r xx Tool holder Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBBO Job DBB1 Tool Unload Load No old TO Prepare Change fixed remains manual manual tool change tool location in the tool tool initiated coded spindle by M06 DBB2 Reserved DBB3 Reserved DBB4 Reserved DBB5 Reserved DBW6 Source magazine number for new tool INT DBW8 Source location number for new tool INT DBW10 Reserved DBW12 Reserved DBW14 Reserved DBW16 Reserved Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 305 Tool management 9 2
40. DBW2 Number of warnings output 1 DBW4 Reserved_1 1 DBW6 reserved_2 1 DBW8 Remaining time 2 h DBW10 Number of warnings output 2 DBW12 Reserved_1 2 DBW14 reserved_2 2 DBW248 Remaining time 32 h DBW250 Number of warnings output 32 DBW252 Reserved_1 32 DBW254 reserved_2 32 Designation Remaining time Meaning Number of hours remaining after the start of the task until it expires Remaining time 0 and associated alarm bit set Warning Remaining time 0 and associated alarm bit set Alarm output Number of warnings Number n of warnings that have already been output If the interval has expired completely the output value is n 1 n number of warnings to be output 1 alarm at the end of the interval Reserved_1 i2 Reserved for expansions Example Interval 100 time of the first warning 80 number of warnings to be output 2 After the task is started the remaining time is decremented every hour e After 80 hours the remaining time is 20 hours and the number of warnings that have been output is increased from 0 to 1 e After a further 10 hours i e a total of 90 hours the remaining time is 10 hours and the number of warnings that have been output is increased from 1 to 2 e After 100 hours the remaining time is 0 and the number of warnings that have been output is 3 2 warnings plus
41. N N 870 TC_MPP3 9999 PLACE 0 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO fi r r r r Magazine status Number of lines Number of locations Location type here spindle Location type here always 0 Consider adjacent location Off Location status Location type index here gripper here always 0 Consider adjacent location Off Location status Location type index always number 9999 r r r r r r r Magazine type 9 Loading magazine Magazine status Number of lines Number of locations Location type Loading point Location type here always 0 Consider adjacent location Off 345 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine N880 TC_MPP4 9999 PLACE 2 Location status N890 TC_MPP5 9999 PLACE PLACE Location type index N900 endfor N910 STOPRE N920 Offsets clearances Clearances to magazine Buffer N930 for PLACE 1 to NUM BUFFER N940 TC_MDP2 1 PLACE 0 N950 endfor N960 STOPRE Loading points N970 for PLACE 1 to NUM_LOAD N980 stopre N990 TC_MDP1 1 PLACE 0 N1000 endfor N1010 M30 End Turning and Milling 346 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine Display on HMI Tool list am Lil Magazine 1 ONDAN A aN Magazine
42. TI h Interval T1 h Time of the first warning N Number of warnings to be output Tc Working cycle of the service planner 60 calls per hour constant The following then applies Tw min TI T1 min N Time between warnings e Start of the message generation and first warning after T1 e Each further warning i after Ti T1 i 1 Tw 1 sis N e Alarm after TI Example 1 TI 100 T1 99 gt Tw 100 99 h 60 1 60 h N 60 The time still remaining after T1 TI T1 in hours 1 h 60 min without the remaining time can be divided by the number of warnings 60 Therefore after 99 h a warning is issued every minute Example 2 TI 100 T1 99 gt Tw 100 99 h 61 1 61 h lt 1 min N 61 The time still remaining after T1 TI T1 in hours 1 h 60 min can no longer be divided per minute by 61 warnings An error is displayed Warnings must be output every 59 s but this is not possible as the Service Planner only runs every minute Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 227 Service Planner 7 3 Functions on the HMI Example 3 TI 100 T1 99 gt Tw 100 99 h 8 1 8 h 7 5 min N 8 The time still remaining after T1 TI T1 in hours 1 h 60 min cannot be divided by the number of warnings without the remaining time The remaining 4 min extend the interval between the last warning and the alarm The interval between the last warning and the alarm is therefore maximum Tw
43. Turning and Milling 280 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend 8 6 String functions lt function name string trimright gt strl lt function gt 7 Result strl test trim right Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 281 Easy Extend 8 7 Trigonometric functions 8 7 Trigonometric functions Overview of the functions The script language offers various trigonometric functions The function names are reserved and cannot be overloaded Trigonometric functions and inverse functions Name Function sin Sine cos Cosine tan Tangent arcsin Arc sine arccos Arc cosine arctan Arc tangent Sine cosine tangent description The function calculates the sine cosine tangent of the value transferred Programming Designation Syntax Designation Syntax Designation Syntax Parameters Example sin lt function name sin return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt cos lt function name cos return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt tan lt function name tan return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt double Angle 0 to 360 lt let name sin_val type double gt lt let gt lt function name sin return sin_val gt 20 0 lt function gt 282 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8
44. gt The identifier outputs a text in the message line or copies the text to the specified variable If the text contains formatting identifiers the variable values are inserted at the appropriate place e The specified n results in a line break in the displayed text e The character results in the formatting of the variable specified as the value Flags Width decimal places type Parameter Application Flags Optional character to define the formatting for the task e Right or left justified left justified e Add leading zeros 0 e Fill with blanks Width The argument defines the minimum output width for a non negative number If the value to be output has fewer places than the argument defined the missing spaces are filled with blanks Decimal places With floating point numbers the optional parameter defines the number of decimal places Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Parameter Type Application The type character defines which data formats are transferred for the PRINT instruction This character must be specified The following data formats are supported e d Integer value e f Floating point number e s String Values Number of variables whose values are to be inserted into the text The variable types must match the corresponding type identifier for the formattin
45. lt control name buttonl xpos 10 ypos 10 fieldtype combo box gt lt item value 10 gt textl lt item gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 259 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language lt item value 20 gt text2 lt item gt lt item value 12 gt text3 lt item gt lt item value 1 gt text4 lt item gt lt control gt 8 5 25 IMG Description Identifier for displaying a pixel graphic in the directory oem sinumerik hmi dvm e The bitmaps must be stored in BMP or PNG format e Lower case letters should be used for all file names e If the image display is to differ from the original in terms of size the attributes width and height can be used to define the dimensions Programming Identifier IMG Syntax lt img name lt Name gt xpos X position ypos Y position height Scaling in Y width Scaling in X gt Attributes name Extension in Y direction in pixels xpos Position in the X direction zero point in the left upper corner ypos Position in the Y direction zero point in the left upper corner width Scaling in X optional height Scaling in Y optional Turning and Milling 260 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend 8 5 26 Description Programming Example Turning and Milling 8 5 Description of the script language PROPERTY The identifier specifies additiona
46. lt control name edit2 xpos 322 ypos 54 7 refvar MN AXCONF MACHAX NAME TAB 1 gt lt control name edit3 xpos 322 ypos 74 refvar SMN AXCONF MACHAX NAME TAB 2 gt lt control name edit4 xpos 322 ypos 94 refvar SMN AXCONF MACHAX NAME TAB 3 gt lt control name edit5 xpos 322 ypos 114 refvar MA_IS ROT _AX AX1 hotlink true gt lt control name edit6 xpos 322 ypos 134 refvar MA_IS_ ROT _AX AX2 hotlink true gt lt control name edit7 xpos 322 ypos 154 refvar MA IS ROT _AX AX3 hotlink true gt lt using the control type combo box to display the rotation axis value gt lt control name edit5 xpos 322 ypos 194 refvar MA_IS_ ROT _AX AX1 fieldtype combobox hotlink true gt lt item value 0 gt no lt item gt lt item value 1 gt yes lt item gt lt control gt lt control name edit6 xpos 322 ypos 214 refvar MA_IS_ ROT _AX AX2 fieldtype combobox hotlink true gt lt item value 0 gt No lt item gt lt item value 1 gt yes lt item gt lt control gt lt control name edit7 xpos 322 ypos 234 refvar MA IS ROT AX AX3 fieldtype combobox hotlink true gt lt item value 0 gt No lt item gt lt item value 1 gt yes lt item gt lt control gt lt init gt lt paint gt T
47. lt let name sStrl type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt lt let gt lt function name string middle return str2 gt strl 2 5 lt function gt Result str2 brown 8 6 6 string length Description The function gives the number of characters in a string Programming Designation string length Syntax lt function name string length return lt int var gt gt str1 lt function gt Parameters str1 String length Result Example lt let name length gt 0 lt let gt lt let name strl type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name string length return length gt strl lt function gt Result length 31 8 6 7 string replace Description The function replaces all the substrings found with the new string Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 275 Easy Extend 8 6 String functions Programming Designation Syntax Parameters Example string replace lt function name string replace gt string find string new string lt function gt string String find string String to be replaced new string New string 8 6 8 string remove Description lt let name strl1 type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name string replace gt strl T a brown dog _T a big salmon lt function gt Result strl
48. or 0 2 Otherwise the transfer step table would be huge for large magazines These symbolic values have the following meaning Magazine Location Meaning 0 1 The source position of the only or new tool from the job should be used 0 2 The target position of the old tool from the job should be used 0 3 The target position of the only tool or new tool from the job should be used Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 327 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks This symbolic notation form can only be used for synchronous intermediate and end acknowledgments since asynchronous messages do not have a job as a reference Example Constant transfer step table Transfer step Address Name Start value Comment DB9900 1 0 0 SrcMag_1 0 Source magazine number of the transfer step 2 0 SrcPos_1 1 Source position number of the transfer step 4 0 DstMag_1 0 Target magazine number of the transfer step 6 0 DstPos_1 1 Target position number of the transfer step 2 8 0 SrcMag_2 0 Source magazine number of the transfer step 10 0 SrcPos_2 1 Source position number of the transfer step 12 0 DstMag_2 9998 Target magazine number of the transfer step 14 0 DstPos_2 2 Target position number of the transfer step Example as a complete step Transfer from to Comment step Magazine Location Magazine Location 1 0 1 0 1 Prepare Tool The magazine is positi
49. technology functions positioning ramp function generator however are called gt Application parameters Drive system A drive system includes all components of a family of products e g SINAMICS belonging to a drive A drive system includes components such as gt Line Modules gt Motor Modules gt Encoders gt Motors gt Terminal Modules and gt Sensor Modules as well as complementary components such as reactors filters lines etc Turning and Milling 404 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Glossary Drive unit The drive unit includes all components which are connected via gt DRIVE CLiQ and required for carrying out a drive task gt Motor Module gt Control Unit gt Line Module and the required gt Firmware and gt Motors but not complementary components such as filters and reactors Several gt Drives can be implemented in one drive unit See gt Drive system DRIVE CLiQ Abbreviation for Drive Component Link with IQ Communication system for connecting the various components of a SINAMICS drive system such as the gt Control Unit gt Line Modules gt Motor Modules gt Motors and speed position encoders DRIVE CLiQ is based on Industrial Ethernet using twisted pair lines The DRIVE CLiQ line provides the send and receive signals as well as the 24 V power supply Encoder Records and makes positions available for electronic processing Depending on their mechanical design encode
50. threads default setting Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 145 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 6 4 8 ShopTurn Counterspindle Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use the Counterspindle function Travel to fixed stop with force control Function If your turning machine has a counterspindle you can machine workpieces using turning drilling and milling functions on the front and rear faces without reclamping the workpiece manually Before machining the rear face the counterspindle must grip the workpiece pull it out of the main spindle and position it at the new machining position The direction of rotation of an NC rotary axis is set via MD32100 MA_AX_MOTION_DIR The PLC signal DB380x DBX2001 6 nn 31 machine axis index is used to specify whether M3 has the same direction as rotary axis bit 0 The directions of rotation are set in the following machine data MD52207 MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB i Counterspindle setting options As a result the following setting options are obtained for the counterspindle However the settings for the machine data depend on the direction from which the coordinate axis is viewed The settings for the direction of rotation as well as the interface signal DB380x DBX2001 6 must be observed under all circumstances Counter spindle direction of rotation 52207 C Ax 52207 Spnd DB380
51. 0 2 0 Data set for the 2nd transformation in the channel 120 MD24100 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 Definition of transformation 1 in channel 513 TRACYL transformation with groove side offset MD24210 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 0 3 Channel axis Infeed axis perpendicular radial to rotary axis Z 1 4 Channel axis Rotary axis A 2 1 Channel axis 1st axis of the machining plane parallel to the rotary axis X 3 2 Channel axis 2nd axis of the machining plane Y MD24220 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 0 1 Channel axis 1st geometry axis X 1 4 Channel axis 2nd geometry axis A 2 3 Channel axis 3rd geometry axis Z Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 3 Milling MD24850 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 0 Offset of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transformation MD24855 MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_FRAME_2 1 Axial offset for the 1st TRACYL transformation MD24860 MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 1 Sign of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transformation MD24870 MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL i Vector of base tool for the 2nd TRACYL transformation in XYZ 1 0 2 0 3 0 Note For both data sets you can use any transformations from all available transformations MD24100 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 MD24200 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2 etc The two data sets need not be directly next to each other
52. 000 1 000 Offset vector 12 0 000 0 000 40 000 Rotary axis vector V2 1 000 0 000 0 000 Offset vector I3 0 000 0 030 23 000 Display version Swivel mode Axis by axis Direction reference Rotary axis 2 Correct tool No Rotary axes Rotary axis 1 C Mode Manual Angular range 0 000 360 000 Rotary axis 2 A Mode Manual Angular range 15 000 100 000 6 5 7 Example of the commissioning of swivel head 2 Swivel head 2 HEAD_2 The vectors relate to the initial setting of the kinematics Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis B rotates around Y Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis C rotates around Y and around Z Offset vector 11 Closure of vector chain with fixed mounted swivel head 11 12 13 Offset vector 12 Distance between pivot point of rotary axis 1 and pivot point of rotary axis 2 Offset vector 13 Distance between reference point of tool and pivot point of rotary axis 2 If the swivel head is fixed mounted the vector chain is closed see 11 Turning and Milling 168 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles Turning and Milling 6 5 Swivel Cardanic swivel head manually adjustable with Hirth tooth system 172 Rotary axis 2 p V2 V1 cat aad ass 172 12 11 Rotary axis 1 93 8 13 Pivot point of Z rotary axis 1 Pivot point of rotary axis 2 Reference point of xX tool Figu
53. 1 alarm Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 219 Service Planner 7 2 Interfaces in the PLC user program DB1800 Acknowledgments DB1800 Acknowledgments r w Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB4000 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment 8 edgment 7 edgment6 edgment5 edgment4 edgment3 edgment2 edgment 1 DBB4001 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment 16 edgment 15 edgment 14 edgment 13 edgment 12 edgment 11 edgment 10 edgment 9 DBB4002 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment 24 edgment 23 edgment 22 edgment 21 edgment 20 edgment 19 edgment 18 edgment 17 DBB4003 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment 32 edgment 31 edgment 30 edgment 29 edgment 28 edgment 27 edgment 26 edgment 25 Designation Meaning Acknowledgment n_ The acknowledgment bit assigned to task n Under the precondition that the corresponding acknowledgment blocking bit is not set the setting of the acknowledgment bit restarts the task and in particular the actual data of the task is set e Remaining time interval e Number of warnings output 0 The bit is automatically reset at the end of the PLC cycle Example Interval 100 time of the first
54. 10 Default setting 0 Only single probing with the feedrate calculated by the cycle However as a minimum the value from SD54673 0 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE gt 1 First probing with feedrate But at least with the value of D54673 0 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE D54675 0 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 SD54676 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_2 0 Feedrate factor 2 0 Second probing with the feedrate calculated by the measuring cycle This is only effective for SD54673 0 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 gt 0 default setting gt 1 Second probing with the calculated feedrate from D54673 0 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE feedrate factor 2 Third probing with the calculated feedrate Turning and Milling 196 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions NOTICE Feedrate factor 2 should be less than feedrate factor 1 SD54677 SNS_MEA_CM_MEASURING_ACCURACY 0 Specified measuring accuracy The value of this parameter always refers to the last probing of the tool at the probe 0 005 Default setting 6 7 6 JOG Measure tool during turning Measuring path measuring feedrate General machine data MD51786 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_MEASURE_DIST Measuring path to calibrate the probe or for measurements with stationary spindle 10 Default setting MD51787 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_MEASURE_FEED Calibrate measuri
55. 2 h DBW12 Number of warnings to be output 2 DBW14 Reserved 2 DBW248 Interval 32 h DBW250 Time of first warning 32 h DBW252 DBW254 Number of warnings to be output 32 Reserved 32 Designation Interval Meaning Number of hours after which the maintenance must be performed When this time expires the warning or alarm bit belonging to the task is set for the last time Time of the first warning Number of hours after which the first warning is output This time must be greater than or equal to the interval be output Number of warnings to Number of n warnings to be output before the alarm The alarm bit is therefore set maximum n 1 times i e n times as warning and 1 time as alarm Reserved Example Interval 100 Reserved for expansions Time of the first warning 80 Number of war nings to be output 2 After the task is started the warning alarm bit is output for the first time after 80 hours a second time after a further 10 hours i e after a total of 90 hours and the warning alarm bit is set for the la 218 st time after 100 hours Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Service Planner DB9904 Actual data 7 2 Interfaces in the PLC user program DB9904 Byte DBWO Actual data table r16 Bt7 Bite pits pita pits eit2 Bits Bito Remaining time 1 h
56. 22 step 21 step 20 step 19 step 18 step 17 step 16 DBB3 Reserved Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 30 step 29 step 28 step 27 step 26 step 25 step 24 DBB4 Reserved DBB5 Reserved DBB6 Reserved DBB7 Reserved DBB8 Reserved DBB9 Resetting the acknowledg ment error Turning and Milling Signal description e Total acknowledgment At a 0 1 edge the end acknowledgment with status 99 is sent to the current job job complete all target positions have been reached As long as the signal is present no changes may be made to the data of this interface This signal is reset by the PLC firmware after the acknowledgment has been transferred to the tool management Acknowledgment step 1 30 At a 0 1 edge the appropriate acknowledgment step from the acknowledgment step table is sent to the tool management As long as the signal is present no changes may be made to the data of this interface and the variable transfer step table This signal is reset by the PLC firmware after the acknowledgment has been transferred to the tool management Resetting the acknowledgment error Resetting the message Acknowledgment error DB41xx DBX100 1 and the diagnostic information in the feedback interface Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 301 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface
57. 300 000 399 999 reserved 400 000 499 999 General alarms 51 PLC PMC 500 000 599 999 Channel alarms 600 000 699 000 Axis spindle alarms 700 000 799 999 User alarms 800 000 899 999 reserved 810 000 810 009 System error messages 50 PLC DiagBuffer 900 000 999 999 reserved 0 INCK 384 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO References A 3 List of the color codes A 3 List of the color codes RGB colors The colors configured are defined by the RGB value e The RGB value starts with the character hexadecimal e The RGB value is entered in the format RRGGBB Each R G or B represents a single digit hexadecimal number Color code Color Code hexadecimal Code decimal Black 000000 0 0 0 Red FF0000 255 0 0 Green OOFFOO 0 255 0 Blue 0000FF 0 0 255 White FFFFFF 255 255 255 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 385 References A 4 Directory structure on the CompactFlash card A 4 Directory structure on the CompactFlash card Data classes The arrangement in data classes is essentially already given by the directory structure of the CompactFlash card Directory Data class system SYSTEM siemens addon MANUFACTURER oem MANUFACTURER INDIVIDUAL oem_i MANUFACTURER INDIVIDUAL user USER The directories System and Siemens have
58. 4 CYCLE800 checklist for the identification of the machine kinematics Identification of the machine kinematics kinematic chain according to DIN 66217 or ISO 841 2001 Note This checklist does not claim to be complete e Do the three linear axes of the machine that are active for the transformation form an orthogonal coordinate system Geometry axes XYZ e How many swivel kinematics does the machine have Combinations of two or one rotary axis and the three linear axes are always formed Which kinematics type is it Swivel head swivel table or mixed kinematics of swivel head and swivel table e What are the names of the rotary axes of the kinematics Manual rotary axes are permitted and do not have to be declared in the NC e What is the 1st or 2nd rotary axis of a swivel data set Rule Rotary axis 2 is based on rotary axis 1 With mixed kinematics rotary axis 1 is always the axis for the tool orientation e is the traversing direction of the linear axes and the rotary axes correct Right hand rule If the linear axis or the rotary axis moves the workpiece the direction of motion of the axis and also the sign of the rotary axis vector change e What is the initial setting of the kinematics This defines the tool orientation and the plane G17 G18 G19 e Which rotary axis rotates around which axis of the coordinate system or the machine axis axes This defines the rotary axis vectors of the kinematics Example 1
59. 5 axis transformation TRAORI option HUNDRED THOUSANDS Reserved ONE MILLION TEN MILLION Selection field retraction 00 No retraction 01 Retraction Z 02 Retraction Z XY 03 Retraction Z or Z XY 04 Maximum retraction in tool direction 08 Incremental retraction in tool direction 164 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Decimal place Meaning 15 Retraction Z or Z XY or in maximum tool direction or in incremental tool direction TC_CARR38 n Retraction position X TC_CARR39 n Retraction position Y TC_CARR4O n Retraction position Z HUNDRED MILLION Selection field swivel data set change deselection tool change Via SD55221 SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_SWIVEL_SET bit 2 Permit deselection of the active swivel set If only 1 swivel data set is active and deselection is not possible then no selection field is provided in the Swivel window If the active swivel set is not to be displayed in the status field the name of the swivel data set must be deleted A tool change in conjunction with a swivel data set change is only supported under ShopMill or ShopTurn 0 Swivel data set not enabled 1 No swivel data set active Automatic swivel data set change Manual tool change 2 No swivel data set active Manual swivel data set change Automa
60. 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 6 4 2 Example Residual material machining Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function Residual material identification and machining Residual material machining axis 1 If the limit is set to 50 and the final machining allowance is 0 5 mm any residual material thinner than 0 25 mm is not machined in a separate machining step but is removed during finishing SD55588 SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MAT_AX2 Limit value for removing residual material in the direction of axis 2 for G18 X This applies for stock removal plunge cutting and plunge turning 50 50 min differential dimension for the residual material machining axis 2 Residual material machining axis 2 If the limit is set to 50 and the final machining allowance is 0 5 mm any residual material thinner than 0 25 mm is not machined in a separate machining step but is removed during finishing As the tool bends during plunge turning the tool cannot travel right up to the contour during stock removal The lateral distance to the last cut by which the next cut is shortened is specified in the following channel specific setting data SD55595 SCS_TURN_CONT_TOOL_BEND_RETR Retraction distance because of tool bending 0 1 0 1 mm or 0 1 inch retraction distance Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP
61. 7 2 Manufacturer cycle CUST_MEACYC SPF Manufacturer and user cycle CUST_MEACYC SPF The CUST_MEACYC SPF is part of the measuring cycle functionality It is called in every measuring cycle before and after executing the measurement task The CUST_MEACYC SPF acts in the same way when measuring in the JOG mode and measuring in the AUTOMATIC mode You can use the CUST_MEACYC SPF to program and execute sequences that are necessary before and or after a measurement e g activating deactivating a probe 6 7 3 Measuring in the JOG mode Requirement You have already made the settings from the previous section General settings for measuring Page 186 Measure workpiece Milling technology e The probe has been inserted in the tool spindle e The probe has been selected in the tool list as type 710 3D probe milling e Probe is activated as tool in the current NC channel Setting the general setting data SD54798 SNS_J_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_PIECE 4 Settings for the input mask measuring in JOG workpiece measurement Bit 2 1 Activation of the function Measuring with electronic workpiece probe Measure tool To measure tools an appropriate probe must be located in the machine space so that this can be reliably and safely reached with a tool in the spindle The following tool types are supported with measure tool e Milling technology Tool types 1xx and 2xx e Turning technology Tool type 5xx 1xx 2xx For the s
62. Configurable step tables There are configurable tables available in the data blocks TM_CTS DB9900 TM_VTS DB9901 and TM_ACK DB9902 which are used to describe the tool movement sequences Interface signal Name Meaning DB9900 TM_CTS Constant transfer step table configurable DB9901 TM_VTS Variable transfer step table can be configured and written to from PLC user program DB9902 TM_ACK Acknowledgment step table configurable The data blocks DB40xx 41xx 42xx and 43xx are system blocks and are created automatically by the control The data blocks DB9900 DB9901 and DB9902 are made available by the Programming Tool under Libraries Special data blocks The blocks are not yet filled with the necessary data The user must copy them into the PLC project and edit them Transfer step tables The individual tool movements are defined as transfer steps tool from magazine location x y to magazine location m n Acknowledgment steps can be defined with these transfer steps DB9900 contains permanently configured transfer steps constant transfer step table DB 9901 can be changed by the PLC user program for example for acknowledging intermediate steps like magazine locations for tool change preparation variable transfer step table DB9900 Constant transfer step table r Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBWO Transfer step 1 Source magazine number
63. DATA_ACCESS Description Turning and Milling The identifier controls the behavior of the dialog when user inputs are being saved The behavior should be defined within the INIT identifier If this identifier is not used inputs are always buffered Exception The following attribute is set hotlink true Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 241 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Programming Identifier DATA_ACCESS Syntax Attributes type true type false 8 5 6 DATA_LIST Description There is no buffering of the input values The dialog copies the entered values directly to the reference variables The values are only copied to the reference variables with the UPDATA_DATA type FALSE identifier This identifier enables the drive and machine data to be buffered or restored Up to 20 temporary data lists can be created per device Note The system deletes the data lists when the Easy Extend function is exited Programming Identifier DATA_LIST Syntax lt DATA_LIST action lt read write gt id lt list name gt gt lt DATA_LIST gt Attributes action Identifier for variable values e action read e action append e action write id 242 e The values of the listed variables are stored in a temporary memory e The values of the listed variables are added to an existing list e The backed up values of the variables are copied into th
64. F 8 9 10 OFF Figure 3 2 DIP switch I O module IP address Input addresses Output addresses 192 168 214 active with MD12986 i 1 1st PP module digital 9 0 8 0 5 2nd PP module digital 8 9 17 6 11 3rd PP module digital 7 18 26 12 17 4th PP module digital 6 27 35 18 23 5th PP module digital 5 36 44 24 29 Unassigned 45 30 55 Reserved 46 47 Reserved 48 49 Reserved 50 51 Reserved 52 53 Reserved 54 55 Reserved 64 71 64 71 Reserved 72 79 72 79 Reserved 80 87 80 87 Reserved 88 95 88 95 PN bus coupler 20 96 111 96 111 External machine control panel 64 112 125 112 121 Reserved 126 131 122 123 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Commissioning the drive 4 4 1 4 1 1 Overview Configuring the drive Example of a drive configuration The SINAMICS 120 commissioning software is available on the Toolbox CD free of charge Until the SINAMICS S120 commissioning functionality is completely available via the user interface drive commissioning is performed using the commissioning software for SINAMICS S120 The PG PC is connected via the Ethernet interface on the front of the SINUMERIK 828D Configuring the drive Turning and Milling For the configuration of the drive the illustration from
65. For a point to point connection time consuming parameterization of the Ethernet interface is not necessary All settings are made automatically by the RCS Commander The RCS Commander can also access several NCUs sequentially via a company network STARTER drive commissioning software Drive commissioning for the SINUMERIK 828D can be performed using the STARTER drive commissioning software Simple commissioning procedures which are usually performed by field service staff such as activating direct measuring systems can be executed directly via the SINUMERIK 828D user interface Advanced commissioning procedures which are usually performed when the machine is being manufactured such as drive optimization can be executed offline via the commissioning software used for SINAMICS 120 Turning and Milling 14 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Scope of delivery and requirements 1 3 This is the general sequence for commissioning 1 3 This is the general sequence for commissioning Requirements The mechanical and electrical installation of the system must be completed e Check the system visually for Correct mechanical installation with secure electrical connections Connection of the power supply Connection of shielding and grounding e Switching on the control and startup in Normal startup Sequence overview Startup of the control is finished when the main screen is shown on the HMI Commissio
66. Global GUD and local LUD user data e Tool and magazine data e Protection zone data e R parameters e Work offsets e Compensation data e Display machine data e Workpieces global part programs and subroutines e Standard and user cycles e Definitions and macros PLC data e User program e MAIN main program e DB data blocks Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Series start up 10 1 Series start up and archiving Components Data HMI data e Cycle storage e Texts e Templates e Applications e Configurations e Configuration e Online help e Version data e Logs e User views e Dictionaries Note The series start up archive is saved as an archive taking into account the data classes file type ARD The drive data is saved as binary data which cannot be edited Memory areas for archives Archives can be stored in the following memory areas e On the user CompactFlash card any directory e On the CompactFlash card at user sinumerik data archive or oem sinumerik data archive e Ona USB FlashDrive NOTICE USB flash drives USB flash drives are not suitable as persistent memory media Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 375 Series start up 10 2 How to create and read in a series start up archive 10 2 Overview Requirement How to create and read in a series start up a
67. Head kinematics Rotary axis 2 rotates around axis Y gt rotary axis vector V2xyz 0 1 0 Example 2 Table kinematics Rotary axis 1 rotates around axis X gt rotary axis vector V1xyz 1 0 0 Turning and Milling 160 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel 6 5 5 Commissioning of the kinematic chain swivel data record Swivel data set SDS You must create a swivel data set for every swivel head swivel table and combination of both A swivel data set consists of the parameters TC_CARR1 n to TC_CARR65 n where n number of the swivel data set The parameters of the swivel data set STC_CARR1 n to TC_CARR65 n can be read in and read out in the startup operating area Programming with appropriate value assignment is also possible in an NC program manufacturer cycle The parameters of the swivel data set are immediately effective after the program has started References Function Manual Basic Functions Tool offset W1 tool holders with orientation capability Offset vectors 11 to 14 The vectors always contain three components which represent the reference to the X Y and Z machine axes The position in the kinematic chain is measured by the machine manufacturer and is always relevant for a swivel head swivel table swivel data set Offset vectors 11 to 14 refer to the non swiveled state of the rotary axes machine kinematics initial setting The machine kinematics used
68. INT DBW2 Transfer step 1 Source location number INT DBW4 Transfer step 1 Target magazine number INT DBW6 Transfer step 1 Target location number INT DBW8 Transfer step 2 Source magazine number INT DBW10 Transfer step 2 Source location number INT DBW12 Transfer step 2 Target magazine number INT DBW14 Transfer step 2 Target location number INT DBW504 Transfer step 64 Source magazine number INT DBW506 Transfer step 64 Source location number INT DBW508 Transfer step 64 Target magazine number INT DBW510 Transfer step 64 Target location number INT Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 311 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface DB9901 Variable transfer step table rw DBWO Transfer step 101 Source magazine number INT DBW2 Transfer step 101 Source location number INT DBW4 Transfer step 101 Target magazine number INT DBW6 Transfer step 101 Target location number INT DBB 8 Transfer step 102 Source magazine number INT DBW10 Transfer step 102 Source location number INT DBW12 Transfer step 102 Target magazine number INT DBW14 Transfer step 102 Target location number INT DBW504 Transfer step 164 Source magazine number INT DBW506 Transfer step 164 Source location number INT DBW508 Transfer step 164 Target magazine number INT DBW510 Transfer step 164 Target location number INT Acknowledgment step table Each en
69. ISO Dialect M MD10880 MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM 2_ ISO Dialect T Note Availability of the ISO Dialect function The switchover to an external programming language is contained in the scope of delivery for SINUMERIK 828D MD10712 MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB is only valid for NC language commands in the Siemens mode See also Function Manual ISO Dialects Turning and Milling 104 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 1 Settings for activating cycles Configuring the cycles The cycles are configured via the following machine and setting data General machine data Channel specific machine data Axis specific machine data General setting data Channel specific setting data Axis specific setting data Software option E For the ShopMill and ShopTurn functions you require the software option ShopMill ShopTurn Settings for the technology MD52005 MCS_DISP_PLANE_MILL Plane selection G17 G18 G19 0 Plane for the milling technology can be selected on the user interface 17 G17 plane default setting 18 G18 plane 19 G19 plane MD52006 MCS_DISP_PLANE_TURN Plane selection G17 G18 G19 0 Plane for the turning technology can be selected on the user interface 17 G17 plane 18 G18 plane default setting 19 G19 plane Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 105 Configuring cycles
70. Length measurement 2nd peripheral speed Correction value for 1st radius length measurement Correction value for 3rd radius length measurement Correction value for 2nd radius length measurement Correction value for 4th radius length measurement SD54698 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD4 i SD54708 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN4 i Radius measurement Length measurement 3rd peripheral speed Correction value for 1st radius length measurement Correction value for 2nd radius length measurement Correction value for 3rd radius length measurement Correction value for 4th radius length measurement SD54699 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD 5 i SD54709 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN 5 Ii Radius measurement Length measurement 0 Ath peripheral speed 1 Correction value for 1st radius length measurement 2 Correction value for 2nd radius length measurement 3 Correction value for 3rd radius length measurement 4 Correction value for 4th radius length measurement Turning and Milling 212 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54700 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD6 i Radius measurement SD54710 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN6 i Length measurement 5th peripheral speed Correction value for 1st radius length mea
71. Position of coordinate system 0 47 Z 4 N ry xyz kx x 4Y Z x k as OR x os A Z Y Z X Y Z Y Or O27 Ox X 5 Z X Y Y Y OW B X Z 3z yx 9 Y 4 Ws lt x TS N x x N x i kk 4 N Ow F x x it Y Z X Y X X yy Z x nw R z amp D Y Y z tX Z z Y X X 8 Z Y az DZ Way X Y Y X Y Z Z Z 62 O wx 4y 65 X Z N N gt tit lt x SAGNE 3 N z NI 2 175 Z Y x x lt y oy Figure 6 1 Position of coordinate system Y Z Turning and Milling 108 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Contiguring cycles 6 1 1 How to adapt the manufacturer cycles Overview of cycles 6 1 Settings for activating cycles The following cycles are also available in the cycle package for individual adaptation Designation CUST_800 SPF Used for Manufacturer cycle for the adaptation of the Swivel plane and the Swivel tool functions Description Manufacturer cycle CUST_800 SPF Page 176 CUST_832 SPF Manufacturer cycle for the adaptation of the High Speed Settings function High Speed Settings Advanced Surface Page 182 CUST_MEACYC SPF Manufacturer cycle for the adaptation of measuring functions Manufacturer cycl
72. Real magazine chain plate box position xx 9998 1 Spindle 9998 2 Gripper 1 9998 3 Gripper 2 9999 1 Magazine loading point Turning and Milling 354 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Description of the program See also Example MAG_C Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual To start with all the old magazine definitions and tools are deleted As the program sequence continues all magazines and buffers are newly created and assigned by writing the magazine parameters Search strategies for tools and magazine locations can be selected in N70 Here it is determined whether the tool can be placed directly in the new tool location when changing out of the spindle This makes the tool change possible in a single mechanical sequence so shorter changeover times can be achieved This sequence is not possible for pickup magazines The chain magazine locations are set up from N430 to N500 Magazine location type 0 means that the magazine location can be loaded with tools of different location types The buffers are set up from N520 onwards If additional buffers are available toolboy shifter the number should be changed in N50 Additionally available loading points should be dealt with in the same way in N60 From N920 the buffers are assigned to the spindle tool holder and the magazine After the magazine configuration pr
73. Select the Save As dialog box 2 Set the character set to UTF 8 Entering comments in an XML file If you are entering comments to explain a program you must keep the following in mind e Acomment always begins with the sequence lt e A comment ends with the sequence gt Example lt Work offset gt Note In the comment itself you can never use two minus signs one right after the other Entering comments in an ini file If you enter a comment in an ini file start the comment line with a semicolon See also Online help for the RCS Commander Turning and Milling 390 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 References A 5 Definitions for license management A 5 Definitions for license management Important terms The terms below are important for understanding the license management of SINUMERIK software products Term Software product Description The term software product is generally used to describe a product that is installed on a piece of hardware to process data Within the license management of SINUMERIK software products a corresponding license is required to use each software product Certificate of License Hardware In the context of license management of SINUMERIK software products hardware refers to the component of a SINUMERIK control system to which licenses are assigned on the basis of its unique identifier License information is also saved to
74. TC_MAP3 9999 17 770 TC_MAP4 9999 1 780 TC_MAP5 9999 1 790 TC_MAP6 9999 1 800 TC_MAP7 9999 NUM_LOAD ca e e a 810 STOPRE N820 Loading magazine locations 830 for PLACE 1 to NUM LOAD 840 STOPRE 850 TC_MPP1 9999 PLACE 7 860 TC_MPP2 9999 PLACE 0 870 TC_MPP3 9999 PLACE 0 880 TC_MPP4 9999 PLACE 2 890 TC_MPP5 9999 PLACE PLACE 900 endfor ey ey ea ee a 910 STOPRE r Buffer N930 for PLACE 1 to NUM BUFFER N940 TC_MDP2 1 PLACE 0 N950 endfor N960 STOPRE Loading points N970 for PLACE 1 to NUM_LOAD N980 stopre N990 TC_MDP1 1 PLACE 0 N1000 endfor 358 N730 Definition of loading magazine Location status Location type index always number 9999 Magazine type 9 Loading magazine Magazine status Number of lines Number of locations Location type Loading point Location type here always 0 Consider adjacent location Off Location status Location type index N920 Offsets clearances Clearances to magazine Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine N1010 M30 End Display on HMI Wi Tool G list Figure 9 7 Tool list Milling machine Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 359 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine 9 8 2 Flow
75. Turning technology Tool type 5xx 1xx 2xx For the specified tool types the tool lengths and the tool radii can be measured Using the following channel specific setting data you can adapt the workpiece and tool measuring in the Program operating area However a basic change is not required D55613 SCS_MEA_RESULT_DISPLAY Selects the screen display of the measuring result 0 No screen display of the measuring result default setting 1 Screen display of the measuring result is displayed for 8 seconds 3 The measuring cycle stops an internal machine data the measuring result is statically displayed on the screen Continue with NC start the measuring result screen is deselected 4 The measuring result is only displayed on the screen for cycle alarms 61303 61304 61305 61306 Continue with NC start the measuring result display on the screen is deselected Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions D55623 SCS_MEA_EMPIRIC_VALUE i Empirical values 0 Default setting SD55618 SCS_MEA_SIM_ENABLE Simulation of measuring cycles 0 The measuring cycles are skipped when simulation is called default setting 1 The measuring cycles are run through when simulation is called e No corrections are performed and there is no logging e The measurement result is not displayed on t
76. V1 B 45 degrees V1Y sin 45 0 7071 V1z cos 45 0 7071 V1Y and V1z can be normalized to 1 and 1 171 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel 6 5 9 Example of the commissioning of a swivel head rotary table Swivel head rotary table MIXED_45 The vectors relate to the initial setting of the kinematics Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis B rotates around Y and around Z Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis C rotates around Z Offset vector 12 Distance from the reference point of the tool adapter to the pivot point intersection of rotary axis 1 Offset vector 11 Closure of vector chain 11 12 Offset vector l3 Distance from the reference point of the machine to the pivot point intersection of rotary axis 2 Offset vector 14 Closure of vector chain 14 13 Side view of the machine Spindle tool adapter is positioned on a block dimension above the top edge of the table rotary axis C or the center of the table A measuring rod in the spindle is used to determine the turning center of rotary axis C Turning and Milling 172 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 6 5 Swivel V1 1 i ic Mey We Sete gle A vA Rotary axis B I Pie i KA ie Y va X pa ie 2 I3y 30 6 i Reference point of machine 14 13 i Rotary axis C MCS XO YO Z0 iV2 Figure 6 1
77. Z Rotary axis C rotates around Z Distance from the reference point of the machine to the pivot point intersection of rotary axis 1 Distance between pivot point intersection of rotary axis 1 and pivot point intersection of rotary axis 2 Closure of vector chain 14 12 13 Spindle tool adapter is positioned on a block dimension above the top edge of the table rotary axis C or the center of the table A measuring rod in the spindle is used to determine the turning center of rotary axis C 170 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 6 5 Swivel Reference point of machine MCS X0 YO Z0 t 1 I i salt Rotary axis C Me Rotary axis B Z i V2 i E a X ie Figure 6 9 Cardanic table TABLE_45 Commissioning softkey Swivel kinematics example 3 Kinematics Swivel table TABLE_45 X Y Z Offset vector 12 0 000 100 000 50 000 Rotary axis vector V1 0 000 1 0001 1 000 Offset vector 13 0 000 0 000 30 000 Rotary axis vector V2 0 000 0 000 1 000 Offset vector 14 0 000 100 000 20 000 Display version Swivel mode Axis by axis Direction reference Rotary axis 2 Correct tool No Rotary axes Rotary axis 1 B Mode Auto Angular range 0 000 180 000 Rotary axis 2 C Mode Auto Angular range 0 000 360 000 Calculation of rotary axis vector
78. and 7 the lowest level Access levels 0 to 3 are locked using a password and 4 to 7 using the appropriate key operated switch settings Access level Locked by Area Data class 0 System reserved System S 1 Password SUNRISE Manufacturer Manufacturer M 2 Password EVENING Servicing Individual I 3 Password CUSTOMER User User U 4 Key operated switch setting 3 Programmer machine setter User U 5 Key operated switch setting 2 Qualified operator User U 6 Key operated switch setting 1 Trained operator User U 7 Key operated switch setting 0 Semi skilled operator User U The password remains valid until it is reset with the Delete Password softkey The passwords can be changed after activation If for example the passwords are no longer known reinitialization power up with NCK default data must be carried out This resets all passwords to the default see table POWER ON does not reset the password Note P LOGOUT The password can also be deleted via the PLC Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 31 Settings on the HMI 2 1 Access levels Key operated switch 32 Access levels 4 to 7 require a corresponding key operated switch setting on the machine control panel Three keys of different colors are provided for this purpose Each of these keys provides access only to certain areas Meaning of the key operated swi
79. approached as prior to the tool change If linear axes geometry axes are also involved in the tool change the rotations in the NC swivel frame must not be deleted Rather the linear axes can be positioned as machine axes using the G153 or SUPA commands Swivel without active tool offset Turning and Milling If swiveling the rotary axes without active tool cutting edge DO is not possible then you can adapt this in cycle CUST_800 SPF _M40 IF NOT P_TOOL AND _TC1 LOOP MSG no tool cutting edge active MO STOPRE ENDLOOP ENDIF GOTOF_ MEND Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 181 Configuring cycles 6 6 High Speed Settings Advanced Surface 6 6 High Speed Settings Advanced Surface 6 6 1 Configuring the High Speed Settings function CYCLE832 Function The High Speed Settings function is used to preset data for the machining of sculptured surfaces so that optimum machining is possible The Advanced Surface function is implemented in the High Speed Settings cycle CYCLE832 The call of CYCLE832 contains the following parameters e Tolerance e Machining type e Version 1 permanently preset Tolerance value The tolerance value for the linear axes geometry axes is transferred to the NC with the NC command CTOL CTOL root 3 tolerance value If rotary axes are involved in the machining multi axis transformation the tolerance value is transferred to the NC with
80. are issued one after the other Txx and M206 have been programmed in separate NC blocks Only the job prepare tool change is present on the interface in DB43xx The job execute tool change is output only after the end acknowledgment for the job for tool preparation Bit DB43xx DBX0 0 job is reset with acknowledgment of the prepare tool change job If the change command M206 has already run through the NC main run the new job is immediately output at the interface The execute tool change job is acknowledged as a normal job The end acknowledgment OK is returned and the bit for the job is simultaneously reset The description of the job execute tool change and prepare tool change is not reset Byte 1 of DB43xx is not overwritten until the next job Note MD20270 MD20310 The response of the interface in DB43xx DBB1 and of NC block processing is affected by the setting in MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT and MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 5 6 7 and 8 This sequence described here corresponds to the presetting of the machine data Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 325 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Sequence of the tool management without block splitting machine data setting milling Txx Myy Myy is the setting from MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE This type of programming is not recommended Order Execute tool change Prepare a too
81. at the top right Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBA0 19 Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control 5 Inthe dialog PG PC interface select the TCP IP protocol of the PG PC Normally this is the network card of the PC Communications Links x Communications Setup HEE TCP IP gt Marvell Yukon 88E 8055 E Double click the icon representing the PLC to my Double Click communicate with to Refresh Double click the interface icon to change communication parameters Set PG PC Interface E Double click the modem icon to setup the modem Access Path parameters or dial to start modem communications Access Point of the Application Programming Tool 828 gt TCP IP gt Marvell Yukon 88E 8055 z Standard for Programming Tool 828 Communication Parameters l Bic i Interface Parameter Assignment Used Remote ddress 192 168 215 1 3 i TEPAP gt Marvell Yukon 88E8055 Properties TCP IP gt Atheros AR5007EG Wire amp Diagnostics Module TCP IP gt Marvell Yukon 88E 8055 TCP IP gt Bluetooth Personal Are Protocol PPI TCP IP gt Marvell Yukon 8868055 Copy e Delete 4 gt Mode 11 bit Assigning Parameters to Your NDIS CPs with TCP IP Protocol RFC 1006 Interfaces Add Remove Select Figure 1 2 TCP IP communications settings 6 Confirm with OK Turning and Milling 20 Commissioning
82. available PLC Execute tool change Move tools in the magazine Gripper control Magazine control if applicable Safety interlocks Providing the structure of tool movements in transfer step tables Acknowledgment of the tool movements with acknowledgment step tables The PLC user program executes the tool management jobs and acknowledges all position changes of the tools and magazines The monitoring and prevention of collisions is the task of the PLC user program alone for example e Multiple spindles are using the same magazine e The paths of simultaneous jobs cross e As long as a large tool is located in the shifter the chain must not be moved 292 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 1 Fundamentals PLC Firmware Functions of the PLC firmware e Assignment of tool management jobs to the PLC user program e Communication of PLC user program acknowledgments to the tool management e Transfer feedback signals for each acknowledgment acknowledgment incorrect with error number of acknowledgment OK to PLC user program e In addition Register order status 9 1 2 Components of the tool management Tool list magazines magazine list Circular and chain magazines can be managed Other types of magazines are mapped on these Loading points or loading stations shall be used as the magazine type for loading and unloading A magazine b
83. be created either with the start up tool or with a configuration program The configuration program is selected and started as a normal part program An NC POWER ON is needed after changing the magazine configuration The changed configuration is shown on the HMI only after restarting the NC Turning and Milling 318 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management See also Detailed description of the interface signals in SINUMERIK 828D Parameter Manual Examples e Configuration of a chain magazine with a dual gripper Page 354 e Configuration of a revolver magazine Page 342 The program is also to be found on the Toolbox CD Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 319 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks 9 4 PLC Program Blocks 9 4 1 Acknowledgment process Information to tool management 320 The tool management expects acknowledgment of its orders in order to track and carry the actual tool positions At least one acknowledgment is required for each order This is sufficient for many applications Acknowledgment takes place either via the table defined in DB9902 or in one step with the total acknowledgment DB40xx 42xx DBX0 0 after a completely finished tool management order using a 0 1 edge set of the corresponding bits in the user interface As long as the acknowledgment signal is present no changes may be ma
84. be found on the Toolbox CD Turning and Milling 350 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 7 5 9 7 Application example for turning machine Example Turning machine with counterspindle Magazine configuration 9 7 6 Procedure Turning and Milling In the magazine configuration the magazine is assigned twice as many locations as actually exist e g in the case of revolver with 12 locations 24 locations are set up Location 1 12 for the main spindle location 13 24 for the counterspindle The user program positions the magazine in such a way that for example the same position is approached for location 1 and location 13 So each real magazine location corresponds to a virtual magazine location for the main spindle and a virtual magazine location for the counterspindle Read the T number of a tool in gripper 1 and 2 Example Test for empty buffer 1 In the PLC user program enter the parameters in DB1200 2 In DB1200 DBX0 0 set the start for reading the location states Once the order has been successfully executed the results are entered starting from DB1200 DBB3000 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O Read variable from the Address Signal Values NCK Parameters DB1200 DBW1000 Variables index 9 DB1200 DBW1002 Location number 2 DB1200 DBW1004 Magazine number 9998 DB1201 DBW1000 Variables index 9
85. bit is active there must be no traversing motion of the magazine only a mechanical unlocking locking of the location The load unload command must be acknowledged after the action For a position and relocate request this signal is not valid for a traversing motion e Source location Magazine and location number of a tool that traverses or should be positioned at a change or loading station e Target location Magazine and location number to where a tool is moving or to where a magazine location should be positioned Turning and Milling 300 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Acknowledgments DB4000 40xx Signals to tool management r w xx Load location Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBBO Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Total edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment acknowl step 7 step 6 step 5 step 4 step 3 step 2 step 1 edgment DBB1 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 15 step 14 step 13 step 12 step 11 step 10 step 9 step 8 DBB2 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 23 step
86. chart Tool change Tool change program sequence PLC 360 The sequence described here describes the change between magazine and spindle The changing of manual tools as well as loading and unloading are not taken into account Both procedures are described in Chapter The machine data default setting is selected such that the job for Prepare tool change is triggered with the T command on the interface N10 T Tool name M6 The block preprocessing is not interrupted M6 is used to start the tool change subprogram L6 at the same time As soon as the job for Prepare tool change has been acknowledged and in the tool change subprogram the M code for tool change output has been reached the Execute tool change job is output to the interface block splitting A tool change command M206 must always precede a prepare tool change command A change command without a previous Prepare tool change job will not initiate a job from the tool management You will find the expression 1 1 change in the program sequence This means that the tool change will be carried out in a single cycle The tool from the spindle old tool will be set down at the magazine location of the new tool No additional magazine positioning is required In this case the target location of the old tool in the tool management job is the same as the source location of the new tool DB43xx DBW6 and DBW68 are equal to DBW18 and DBW20 A 1 1 change is not possible
87. configuration on a milling machine xL X 1st axis of the machining plane parallel to the rotary axis Y 2nd axis of the machining plane Z Infeed axis tool axis perpendicular radial to the rotary axis A Rotary axis C Working spindle Figure 6 3 Machining slots on a cylinder surface with X A Z kinematics Turning and Milling 118 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 3 Milling Two data sets with the following machine data are configured for the machine illustrated above MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 4 Machine axis number valid in channel 5 Number of axes in the channel MD20080 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TABIi Channel axis name in the channel 0 XC Channel axis XC corresponds to channel axis 1 1 YC Channel axis YC corresponds to channel axis 2 2 ZC Channel axis ZC corresponds to channel axis 3 S A Channel axis A corresponds to channel axis 4 c Channel axis C corresponds to channel axis 5 General settings for the transformation MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE Frames when switching over geometry masks 1 The current total frame work offsets is recalculated when switching over geometry axes selecting deselecting TRACYL Data set for the 1st transformation in the channel MD24100 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 Definition of transfo
88. data you can activate the Clamp release spindle parameter in the drilling and milling masks 0 The Clamp release spindle parameter is not displayed in the drilling and milling masks ShopTurn automatically clamps the spindle if it makes sense for the particular machining operation 1 The Clamp release spindle parameter is displayed in the drilling and milling masks The operator decides for which machining operation the spindle should be clamped References Programming Manual Job Preparation Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Turning and Milling 150 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Contiguring cycles 6 4 Turning 6 4 10 ShopTurn End face machining TRANSMIT Requirement Function References Turning and Milling Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation If you wish to use the end face machining function under ShopTurn please proceed as described in the following Chapter End face machining TRANSMIT Page 133 In addition set the following channel specific machine data MD52214 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL Function masks ShopTurn Bit 3 Enable internal rear machining in ShopTurn masks that define the machining plane themselves Bit 4 If you have implemented the Clamp release spindle function using the machine manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF then using this m
89. display e Image display Description Identifier lt tag gt Meaning CAPTION Identifier for the title of the dialog Syntax lt caption gt title lt caption gt CLOSE Dialog message This identifier is executed before the dialog is closed Turning and Milling 256 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Identifier lt tag gt FORM Meaning Identifier for a user dialog Attribute color Color coding of the background color INIT Dialog message Identifier for initializing the dialog The identifier is executed immediately after the dialog is created All the input elements and hotlinks for the dialog should be created here PAINT TIMER Dialog message Identifier for displaying all texts and images of a dialog This identifier is executed when the dialog is shown Dialog message This identifier is called cyclically Example lt DOCTYPE AGM gt lt AGM gt lt DEVICE gt lt NAME gt Device lt START_UP gt lt START_UP gt lt SET_ACTIVE gt lt SET_ACTIVE gt lt FORM gt lt INIT gt lt CONTROL name lt INIT gt lt PAINT gt lt PAINT gt lt FORM gt lt DEVICE gt lt AGM gt Turning and Milling lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt 1 lt NAME gt Identifier for a user dialog editl CONTROL gt Identifier for an input field Identifier for text or ima
90. do not need to be fully implemented However be aware that the traversing range in the swivel planes may be restricted If machine kinematics are to be implemented with just one rotary axis this must always be declared as the 1st rotary axis TC_CARRI nl TC_CARR2in TC_CARR3 n Offset vector I1xyz TC_CARR4 nl TC_CARR5In TC_CARR6 n Offset vector I2xyz TC_CARR15 n TC_CARR16 n TC_CARRI17 n Offset vector I3xyz TC_CARR18 n TC_CARR19 n TC_CARR20 n Offset vector l4xyz Rotary axis vectors V1 and V2 TC_CARR7 nl TC_CARR8I n TC_CARRQJ n Rotary axis vector Vixyz TC_CARR10 n TC_CARR11 n TC_CARR12 n Rotary axis vector V2xyz Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 161 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Kinematic types TC_CARR23 n Selection e Swivel head type T e Swivel table type P e Swivel head swivel table type M Swivel head type T Swivel table type P Swivel head swivel table type M a ia g Offset vector 11 Offset vector 12 Offset vector 11 Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1 Offset vector 12 Offset vector 13 Offset vector 12 Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis vector V2 Offset vector 13 Offset vector 13 Offset vector 14 Rotary axis vector V2 Offset vector 14 Offset parameters An
91. e E E EE E E E E EN 43 2 6 4 Howto Configure the log vis cacssiceressecteversiadecevssvatiebs sand cets did eaa ae anea aE A EE 44 2 6 5 Configuring user alarms With COIOLS cccceeseeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeaeeseenateeaeees 46 2 6 6 How to configure colors for User alarms 0 0 00 eee eeeeeee ee eeee cette ee eee ae eee ANAE eee aT 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help ceccececcececeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeaaeceeeeeesecacaeceeeesecsecaeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 2 7 1 Structure and syntax of the Configuration file ceceeeeeeeeeee sence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeteaeeraaees 50 2 7 2 Structure and syntax of the help DOOK e ccccceeceeceeeceeeceseeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeceaeeeaeeeeeeseesaeesieeeieeeeeeaees 52 2 7 3 Description of the syntax for the online Help eccccccccsccssecssecsseceseecsescseecssesaecsaeesseecseecseeeeens 53 2 7 4 Example How to create an OEM specific help ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceacaeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeennaees 57 2 7 5 Example How to create an online help for user PLC alarms ccceesecceeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeteees 60 3 Commissioning the PLC cccccccsssssscceecesssenesesaaeeeeecesssenueeeeeeeeesseeaeeeseeeesseeeaaeeseeeesssenaaesasenaaeeeeesesses 63 3 1 Activating VO mod le Sesca a 64 4 Commissioning the drive v2 5 ccccsseccteectesesues cece cesee Scented eecvcsaveeba lezedscuwicette auevesbvacbaaephasdassiebieusteteiaedh nenna 67 4 1 C
92. elements 100000 default setting 6 3 2 Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation Requirements on the machine e There must be at least one rotary axis at the machine e The milling tool must be radially oriented to the cylinder to be machined Cylinder surface transformation The following groove machining operations can be performed with the Cylinder surface transformation function e Longitudinal grooves on cylindrical bodies e Transverse grooves on cylindrical objects e Grooves with any path on cylindrical bodies The path of the grooves is programmed with reference to the unwrapped level surface of the cylinder The programming can be performed using straight line circle drilling or milling cycles or contour milling free contour programming Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 117 Configuring cycles 6 3 Milling There are two variants of cylinder surface transformation i e 1 with groove side offset ON 2 without groove side offset OFF Longitudinal groove Transverse groove Parallel limited longitudinal groove without groove side offset with groove side offset Figure 6 2 Grooves with and without groove side offset 6 3 3 Example Axis configuration for milling machines XYZ AC axis
93. following table Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 163 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel In order that a value can be displayed in the input and output fields of the input dialogs for swivel the following display versions can be set Meaning of the decimal places Decimal place Meaning ONES Selects the swivel mode 0 Axis by axis 1 Axis by axis projection angle Axis by axis projection angle solid angle Axis by axis direct Axis by axis projection angle direct Axis by axis projection angle solid angle direct TENS Rotary axis 1 0 Automatic 1 Manual 2 Semi automatic HUNDREDS Rotary axis 2 0 Automatic 1 Manual 2 Semi automatic THOUSANDS Selection field direction Direction reference of the rotary axes 0 No no display of the direction reference for kinematics that only have one solution 3 Direction reference of rotary axis 1 optimized 4 Direction reference of rotary axis 2 optimized TEN THOUSANDS Selection field correction of the tool tip or B axis kinematics 0 No no display of the Correction of tool tip input field 1 Yes correction of tool tip by means of TRAORI 2 No correction of tool tip B axis kinematics turning technology 3 Correction of tool tip B axis kinematics turning technology The correction function requires the
94. for user PLC alarm 700005 lt b gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td valign top width 15 gt lt b gt Reaction lt b gt lt td gt lt td width 85 gt Reaction for user PLC alarm 700005 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td valign top width 15 gt lt b gt Remedy lt b gt lt td gt lt td width 85 gt Clear alarm with Reset key lt td gt lt tr gt lt br gt lt table gt lt p gt lt p gt lt body gt lt html gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 61 Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specitic online help Procedure 1 Copy the file to one of the following directories oem sinumerik hmi hlp lt lng gt sinumerik alarm _plc_pmc user sinumerik hmi hlp lt lng gt sinumerik alarm _plc_pmc lt Ing gt stands for the language code E oem 5 sinumerik H O data O hp O hmi appl cfg data hp O deu eng B sinumerik_alarm_ple_pmc m 4 O ico ime Ing O proj O template E O siemens O sinumerik O hmi sys_cache E hmi O sltrace H O user 2 Delete all files in the directory siemens sinumerik sys_cache hmi hlp The settings become effective only after restarting the HMI See also List of language codes used for file names Page 383 Turning an
95. is displayed on the user interface 0 M code for tool specific function 1 OFF 1 M code for tool specific function 2 OFF 2 M code for tool specific function 3 OFF 3 M code for tool specific function 4 OFF Setting data for rounding on the contour SD55582 SCS_TURN_CONT_TRACE_ANGLE Contour turning Minimum angle for rounding the contour 5 Specifies the angle between the cutting edge and contour above which for contour turning the contour is rounded in order to remove residual material default setting SD55505 SCS_TURN_ROUGH_O_RELEASE_DIST Retraction distance for stock removal during external machining 1 Specifies the distance by which the tool is retracted from the contour when removing stock from an outer corner This does not apply to stock removal at a contour default setting The distance is internally defined SD55506 SCS_TURN_ROUGH_I_LRELEASE_DIST Retraction distance for stock removal during internal machining 0 5 Specifies the distance by which the tool is retracted from the contour when removing stock from an internal corner This does not apply to stock removal at a contour default setting The distance is internally defined SD55515 SCS_TURN_THREAD_RELEASE_DIST Retraction distance when cutting threads 2 Specifies the distance to the workpiece that is retracted between the infeeds when cutting
96. is performed between the reference plane safety clearance and the depth Depth calculation is performed without including the safety clearance Bit 2 is effective in the following milling cycles CYCLE61 CYCLE71 CYCLE76 CYCLE77 CYCLE79 CYCLE899 LONGHOLE SLOT1 SLOT2 POCKET3 POCKET4 D55460 SCS_MILL_CONT_INITIAL_RAD_FIN Finishing approach circle radius The radius of the approach circle during the finishing of contour pockets is affected 1 The radius is selected so that at the starting point the safety clearance to the finishing allowance is maintained default setting gt 0 The radius is selected so that at the starting point the value of this channel specific setting data to the finishing allowance is maintained D55461 SCS_MILL_CONT_DIFF_TOOLRAD_MIN Contour pocket milling 5 Smallest possible cutter radius deviation default setting D55462 SCS_MILL_CONT_DIFF_TOOLRAD_MAX Contour pocket milling 0 01 Largest possible cutter radius deviation in mm default setting Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Contiguring cycles 6 3 Milling Channel specific setting data for e Multi edge CYCLE79 e Circle position pattern HOLES2 e Circumferential groove SLOT2 SD55230 SCS_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED Rapid feed in mm min for positioning on a circular path between the circumferential grooves or the contour
97. job independent message Position change of a tool or magazine asynchronous message e g when the PLC changes a tool position via machine control panel operation without tool change job An asynchronous message can be used to inform the tool management of a tool or magazine movement independently of a job An asynchronous message must always contain a source position from and target position to Tool movements within a magazine relocate tool can only be carried out with magazine locations which are actually occupied Empty transfers are not permissible Two asynchronous transfers can be implemented in a single message In this case the interface must be used for tool change DB42xx Effect of acknowledgments Effect of acknowledgments on the job and the part program e Intermediate and end acknowledgment take place synchronously with the job The part program must wait No new job can come yet e Message of an asynchronous transfer The part program continues to run The message is completely independent of any job Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 321 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks 9 4 3 Acknowledgment states Acknowledgment states and their meaning The status indicated by the respective type of acknowledgment is shown in the following table Acknowledgment Synchronous end acknowledgment Meaning Job finished at the specified position The too
98. let gt lt let name str2 type string gt lt let gt lt function name string left return str2 gt strl 12 lt function gt Result str2 A brown bear 8 6 4 string right Description The function extracts the last nCount characters from string 1 and copies them to the return variable Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 273 Easy Extend 8 6 String functions Programming Designation Syntax Parameters Example string right lt function name string right return lt result string gt gt str1 nCount lt function gt str1 String nCount Number of characters 8 6 5 string middle Description lt let name str1l type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt lt let gt lt function name string right return str2 gt strl 10 lt function gt Result str2 brown dog The function extracts the specified number of characters from string 1 starting from the iFirst index and copies them to the return variable Programming Designation Syntax Parameters 274 string middle lt function name string middle return lt result string gt gt str1 iFirst nCount lt function gt str1 String iFirst Start index nCount Number of characters Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 6 String functions Example
99. machine followed by backup of the data in a series startup archive 3 Installation of the devices commissioning followed by read out of the data as a differential series startup archive Note Changing the machine configuration Should there be any need to edit the drive machine data this should be adapted in the control first This procedure should be repeated for all devices and constellations Adding axes If the machine is extended with machine axes it is important to install the drive objects DO in a fixed sequence because the series startup archive contains the constellation of the machine manufacturer s reference machine and cannot be applied if the sequence is changed It is recommended that the following settings be selected for the control components e NC data e PLC data e Drive data ACX format binary NOTICE In order to be able to use series startup archives in the Easy Extend script these archives must be created without HMI data See also How to create and read in a series start up archive Page 376 Turning and Milling 234 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend 8 3 Display on the user interface 8 3 Display on the user interface Dialogs on the user interface Turning and Milling The following dialogs are available for Easy Extend e The control offers a configurable dialog in which the available devices are shown e If first commissioning has not t
100. min N 1 Example 4 Tl 3 T1 1 gt Tw 3 1 h 61 2 61 h 1 967 min N 61 The time still remaining after T1 TI T1 in hours 2 h 120 min also cannot be divided by the number of warnings without the remaining time A warning is output every minute after T1 There are 59 min between the last warning and the alarm Structure of the oem_maintenance_ lt lIng gt ts file This file has the extension ts and contains all the language dependent warning texts that were entered in the dialog This file is required in binary format qm so that it can be read out during runtime A corresponding file is available the next time the HMI powers up Name cem_maintenance lt lng gt ts lt Ing gt Language code Directory oem sinumerik hmi ing lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE TS gt lt TS gt lt context gt lt name gt maintenance lt name gt lt message gt lt source gt mp1 lt source gt lt translation gt Maintenance task 1 lt translation gt lt chars gt 30 lt chars gt lt message gt lt message gt lt source gt mp2 lt source gt lt translation gt Maintenance task 2 lt translation gt Turning and Milling 228 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Service Planner 7 3 Functions on the HMI lt chars gt 30 lt chars gt lt message gt lt message gt lt source gt mp32 lt source gt lt translation gt Maintenance task 32 lt translat
101. no significance for archiving since they are set up with the installation of the SINUMERIK software and are not changed by installation configuration or in later use An update or upgrade of the system will typically be carried out in these directories The archiving of these directories is for this reason only necessary as a rollback backup in the background Further subdividing of these directories into SINUMERIK NCK PLC HMI and SINAMICS covers the data areas described above and is echoed in all named directories data classes CompactFlash card Data area SINUMERIK NCK PLC HMI SINAMICS Drives Structure of the CompactFlash card The file system consists at the top level of the directories add_on oem oem_i siemens and user These directories have essentially an identical structure The section of the directory structure relevant for the configuration is shown below siemens directory siemens sinumerik hmi appl Applications operating areas base Basic system components Icfg All configuration files Turning and Milling 386 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 References A 4 Directory structure on the CompactFlash card siemens directory data Version data hlp Online help files hlps Online help files zipped and version files lico Icon files lico640 Icons in resolution 640
102. non volatile memory on this component Examples e SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl CompactFlash card e SINUMERIK 840Di sl MCI board License A license gives the user a legal right to use the software product Evidence of this right is provided by the following e CoL Certificate of License e License key CoL The CoL is the proof of the license The product may only be used by the holder of the license or authorized persons The CoL includes the following data relevant for the license management e Product name e License number e Delivery note number e Hardware serial number Note The hardware serial number is located only on a CoL of the system software or if the license was ordered bundled in other words the system software came together with options License number The license number is the feature of a license that is used for its unique identification CompactFlash card Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO As the carrier of all non volatile data in a SINUMERIK solution line control system the CompactFlash card represents the identity of this control system The CompactFlash Card includes the following data relevant for the license management e Hardware serial number e License information including the license key 391 References A 5 Definitions for license management 392 Term Hardware serial number Description The hardware serial number is a
103. offset value is entered for rotary axis 1 or 2 when the position of the rotary axes is not equal to 0 in the initial setting of the kinematics In the initial setting of the kinematics the tool orientation to a geometry axis X Y Z must be parallel TC_CARR24 n Kinematics offset of rotary axis 1 TC_CARR25 n Kinematics offset of rotary axis 2 TC_CARR26 n Angular offset of the Hirth tooth system at the start of gearing of rotary axis 1 TC_CARR27 n Angular offset of the Hirth tooth system at the start of gearing of rotary axis 2 TC_CARR28 n Angle grid of the Hirth tooth system of rotary axis 1 TC_CARR29 n Angle grid of the Hirth tooth system of rotary axis 2 A valid angle range e g 90 to 90 degrees must be assigned to each rotary axis This does not have to be the software end position range of the relevant rotary axis An angle range of 0 degrees and 360 degrees can be entered for modulo axes 162 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel TC_CARR30 n Angle range of rotary axis 1 minimum value TC_CARR31 n Angle range of rotary axis 2 minimum value TC_CARR32 n Angle range of rotary axis 1 maximum value TC_CARR33 n Angle range of rotary axis 2 maximum value Name of swivel data set name of rotary axis If several swivel data sets are declared in ea
104. options that can be selected for this control Activate or deactivate the required options in the Set column Mark the checkbox Enter the number of options Options displayed in red are activated however are not licensed or insufficiently licensed OR Press the Missing licenses softkey to display all options that are activated but not licensed In the Set column you can deselect the options that you do not require 09 03 09 14 57 PM Additionally 1 axis spindle al 6FC5888 8AABB BYBB ction 1 positioning axis auxiliary spindle in addition 6FC5888 6ABG8 BYBB Missing Traversing to fixed stop with force control s 6FC5888 8AM81 8YB8 O licenses Pair of synchronized axes gantry axes 6FC5866 6AM82 BYBB Contour handwheel 6FC5888 68AM88 BYBB 0 TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation esi 6FC5888 60M27 BYB8 po Sag compensation multi dimensional 6FC5886 6AM55 BYBB 0 Exp license Replacement tools for tool management requirement 6FC5866 6AM78 BYBB Network drive management 6FC5886 6AP81 BYBB Residual material detection and machining 6FC5888 8AP13 BYB8 Series i far Prog start u r censes 1 list Figure 2 4 Licensing example Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 5 Checking and entering licenses 4 To activate new selected options press the Reset po softkey A s
105. or lt Key Left Right gt Maintenance performed Change task New task 224 The maintenance task is acknowledged and restarts Change to edit mode All columns except Remaining time can be edited The maintenance task data can be entered The edit mode can be exited via Cancel or OK Only with OK are the changes accepted and saved If not all the 32 tasks have been assigned a new maintenance task is created and edit mode started Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Service Planner Standard mode Turning and Milling 7 3 Functions on the HMI Note Number assignment A number is automatically assigned when a task is created If this is not desired the relevant tasks must be created via DB change in the Programming Tool with subsequent download This is recommended for example if task m is deleted by mistake and this has to be created again under number m because of the evaluation in the PLC user program Pos Maintenance task MAINTENANCE TASK 1 32 MAINTENANCE TASK 32 Bus Axis si ICPE Ig diag Figure 7 3 Standard mode Maintenance The maintenance task is acknowledged and restarts performed Only the columns Maintenance text Interval and Remaining time are visible in standard mode but cannot be edited This mode is used so that the operator can see the status of the maintenance tasks and for their acknowledgment Commissioning Manual 09 2
106. part programs AC_OPERATING_TIME Bit 1 1 Measurement of the current program runtime Bit 2 1 Measurement of machining time Bit 3 n a Bit 4 1 Measurement during active dry run feedrate Bit 5 1 Measurement during program test Bit 6 1 Delete condition AC_CYCLE_TIME Bit 7 1 Count condition AC_CUTTING_TIME Bit 8 1 Delete AC_CYCLE_TIME with GOTOS Bit 9 1 Measurement during override 0 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 2 Drilling 6 2 Drilling 6 2 1 Technology cycles for drilling Drilling technology You can set the drilling technology via the following channel specific machine data and channel specific setting data MD52216 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL Drilling function mask Tapping cycle CYCLE84 technology input fields 0 Hide input fields 1 Display input fields Bit 1 Tapping cycle CYCLE840 technology input fields 0 Hide input fields 1 Display input fields D55216 SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL_SET Drilling function mask Bit 0 Tapping CYCLE84 determine spindle direction of rotation in the cycle 0 Do not reverse spindle direction of rotation 1 Reverse spindle direction of rotation Bit 4 Tapping CYCLE840 monitoring of the machine data MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA 0 No monitoring 1 Monitoring Turning and Mill
107. permanent part of the CompactFlash card It is used to identify a control system uniquely The hardware serial number can be determined by e Col see Certificate of License Note e HMI user interface e Printing on the CompactFlash Card system License key The License Key is the technical representative of the sum of all the licenses that are assigned to one particular piece of hardware which is uniquely marked by its hardware serial number Option An option is a SINUMERIK software product that is not included in the basic version and that requires the purchase of a license for its use Product A product is marked by the data below within the license management of SINUMERIK software products e Product designation e Order number e License number Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO References A 6 Rules for wiring with DRIVE CLIQ A 6 Rules for wiring with DRIVE CLiQ Introduction The following rules apply for wiring components with DRIVE CLiQ The rules are subdivided into DRIVE CLiQ rules which must be observed and recommended rules which when observed do not require any subsequent changes to the topology created offline in STARTER The maximum number of DRIVE CLiQ components and the possible wiring form depend on the following points e The binding DRIVE CLiQ wiring rules e The number and type of activated drives and functions on the respective control u
108. position must be entered by the PLC user program Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 329 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks 9 4 5 Configuring acknowledgment steps Configuring the acknowledgment steps The PLC 31 provides acknowledgment steps to acknowledge tool and magazine movements These are activated via the corresponding bits on the user interface The data of these acknowledgment steps with the exception of special case acknowledgment step 9 total acknowledgment are stored in acknowledgment step table TM_ACK DB9902 The transfer steps number of the transfer step from the transfer step table for the old and new tool and an acknowledgment status are combined in one acknowledgment status It is important to include an acknowledgment step with the status 3 in this table so that potential errors can be reset The numbers for the transfer in this acknowledgment step are 0 Special meaning of transfer step 0 Only the transfer steps assigned to the acknowledgment step are executed If only one or no transfer step is assigned no tool transfer will be carried out for the tool with transfer step 0 The tool is not available or remains at its original location Example Acknowledgment step table Example as a complete step 330 Acknowledg Address Name Start value Comment ment step DB9902 1 0 0 TsNewT_1 0 Transfer step nu
109. release spindle parameter in the drilling and milling masks 0 The Clamp release spindle parameter is not displayed in the drilling and milling masks ShopTurn automatically clamps the spindle if it makes sense for the particular machining operation 1 The Clamp release spindle parameter is displayed in the drilling and milling masks Specification for which machining operation the spindle should be clamped Enable various functions under the Turning function mask in the following channel specific machine data MD52218 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TURN Turning function mask Bit 0 Enable zoom under manual for tool measurement Bit 1 Enable part catcher for cut off Bit 2 Enable tailstock Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Enable spindle control of main spindle via user interface Bit 5 Enable spindle control of tool spindle via user interface Bit 6 Enable taper angle mask MD52229 MCS_ENABLE_QUICK_M_CODES 0H _ default setting Enable quick M commands Bit 0 Coolant OFF Bit 1 Coolant 1 ON Bit 2 Coolant 2 ON Bit 3 Coolant 1 and 2 ON Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 143 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 144 MD52230 MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_OFF M code for all coolants OFF This machine data is used to define the M function for switching off the coolant which is output when t
110. reset after one PLC cycle e Acknowledgment error DB41xx DBX100 1 Negative feedback of acknowledgment status There is an error in the acknowledgment of the PLC user program area DB40xx DBBO to DBB3 The cause of the error is displayed in Error status The acknowledgment error bit is only set if the acknowledgment from the PLC firmware is accepted as error free and the tool management detects and signals an error in the acknowledged tool transfer for example when the target location for tool transfer is occupied Errors that are detected directly by the tool management in the NC before an acknowledgment is sent by the PLC user program do not result in the setting of bit 100 1 If an error is present that prevents transfer of the acknowledgment to the tool management error status 1 to 7 the error is only output on the interface of the tool management and not by the NC no NC alarm If necessary signal such errors with a user PLC alarm in the PLC user program Turning and Milling 302 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface This signal remains pending statically until the error has been acknowledged set the bit Reset acknowledgment error DB40xx DBX9 0 by the user The interface in DB40xx DBBO to DBB3 is disabled if bit acknowledgment error is pending Incoming acknowledgment bits are not evaluated by the PLC firmware and are cleared when bit Reset acknowledgment erro
111. rotary axis A distinction is also made between automatic rotary axes known to the NCU and manual semi automatic rotary axes There is only ever one valid marker for swiveling with the active swivel data set Run through _M35 for block search and a swivel data set with manual rotary axes Retraction before swiveling after a block search can be set at marker _M46 Variable E VER is 1 if it is a milling technology program Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Markers _M57 to _M59 Correct tool Markers _M57 to _M59 are used for swiveling in JOG mode and active 5 axis transformation TRAORI Correct tool requires that a 5 axis transformation is set up which is equivalent to the corresponding swivel data set The programming section for Correct tool is integrated in the markers _M20 M21 M22 and _M30 The first 5 axis transformation is called with TRAORI 1 Tool change swivel In general the swivel CYCLE800 and tool change functions for a machine are independent of each other Thus the swiveled work plane can be retained in a technological sequence with multiple tools e g centering drilling tapping If the rotary axes of the active swivel data set are involved in the mechanical sequence of the tool change or have to be retracted this must be taken into account in the tool change program After the tool change the rotary axis positions are
112. the last retraction mode modal If this behavior is not desired in milling turning the corresponding calls must be commented out with a semicolon The E_SWIV_H or F_SWIV_H cycle is called in milling turning see markers _M2 to _M9 in the CUST_800 SPF manufacturer cycle Parameters E_SWIV_H Par1 Par2 Par3 e Pari Number of swivel data set _TC1 e Par2 Angle of 1st rotary axis e Par3 Angle of 2nd rotary axis Modification examples Markers _M14 to Markers _M20 to Marker _M35 Marker M46 180 If the rotary axes swivel head are not to be positioned during swivel data change tool change the call of the E_SWIV_H cycle can be commented out at the relevant markers If the rotary axes are to move to a certain position an angle value can be transferred to parameters Par 2 Par 3 _M15 Depending on the values of the retraction plane and the programmed swivel plane it is possible that the linear axes now travel the swiveled retraction plane while running up from the current position to the software limit switches after a block search To avoid this problem marker _M14 in the CUST_800 SPF is called after swiveling The E_SP_RP 30 cycle preset there runs up to the milling retraction plane whereby travel may be along the software limit switches An appropriate retraction after block search can be set at marker _M15 _M31 Markers _M20 to _M31 are distinguished by machine kinematics with two rotary axes or one
113. the tool movements are acknowledged to the tool management Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledg ment step Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Status tool Transfer step old tool DB4200 DBX1 1 105 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Transfer step 4 DB9900 DBW24 from to Comment gt continue with Step 11 Step 11 T0 Previous step Step 10 Magazine Loca tion tion Request Is TO set in the tool change job DB43xx DBX1 3 Magazine Loca Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine Step 7 or Step 10 If only the tool holder should be emptied the tool change can be completed gt continue wit h Step 8 Do you want to place a new tool in the tool holder gt continue wit h Step 12 Step 12 Magazine position location from new tool to changing point lt Previous step Step 11 Sequence as i n Step 2 Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status ment step tool tool 4 DB4200 DBX0 4 101 0 204 Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 101 1 n 9998 1 The variable location in magazine 1 DB9901 DBWO is positioned at the changing point to the spindle n is the act
114. tool identifier Tx with x as location number of the magazine containing the tool used for machining When the function is active T1 selects the tool in location number 1 instead of the tool with identifier 1 Then the identifier of the tool in this location is ascertained e g FINISHING TOOL The subsequent procedure is as if T FINISHING_TOOL had been programmed If T location number no tool need actually be stored in the location e MD10717 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME TCHANGE Name of tool change cycle for T function replacement For a description refer to the Chapter Example Tool change cycle for turning machine Page 348 Replace tool call Replace tool call irrespective of status and with selection of duplo and toolholder number TCA It is necessary for certain applications e g measuring cycle to load a specific tool into the spindle or the toolholder regardless of its status e g a disabled tool The cycle defined in MD10717 and run through with the T call is not started with the TCA command To ensure that a T function replacement cycle starts when TCA is programmed the language command TCA must be redefined in _TCA In this way it is also possible to start a TCA SPF manufacturer cycle analogous to the TCHANGE SPF cycle in which the actual tool call is implemented An example can be found in Chapter Example Tool change cycle for TCA command Page 350 Configuring the magazine The magazine configuration can
115. variable name gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Example lt data name drive cu p0092 gt 1 lt data gt lt data name drive dc p0092 dol gt 1 lt data gt Indirect addressing lt le t name driveIndex gt 0 lt let gt lt op gt driveIndex ctrlout_module nr 0 AX1 lt op gt lt da Addressing an NX ta name drive dc doSdriveIndex p0092 gt 1 lt data gt An NX module is treated as another CU module addressing uses the CU specification whereby the desired NX number incremented by one is specified in square brackets after the para meter Parameter number CU lt CU index gt Example Sis lt els alo Turning and Milling A A lt let name r0002_ content gt lt let gt lt let name p107_content gt lt let gt Reading of value r0002 from the CU gt lt op gt 0002 content drive cu r0002 lt op gt lt op gt r0002 content drive cu r0002 CU1 lt op gt Reading of value r0002 from the NX1 gt lt op gt r0002 content drive cu r0002 CU2 lt op gt Reading of value p107 0 from the CU gt lt op gt pl07_ content drive cu p107 0 lt op gt print text d gt p1l07_ content lt print gt Reading of value p107 0 from the NX1 gt lt op gt pl07_ content drive cu p107 0 CU2 lt op gt prin
116. via the gt DC link of the gt Drive unit A Motor Module must be connected to a gt Control Unit via gt DRIVE CLiQ The open loop and closed loop control functions of the Motor Module are stored in the Control Unit There are Single Motor Modules and gt Double Motor Modules Variable quantity within the drive system that the user can read and in some cases write For gt SINAMICS a parameter meets all specifications defined for drive parameters in the gt PROF ldrive profile See gt Display parameter gt Adjustable parameter Hardware module for evaluating speed position encoder signals and providing detected actual values as numerical values at a gt DRIVE CLiQ socket There are three mechanical variants of Sensor Modules e SMCxx Sensor Module Cabinet Mounted Sensor Module for the snap on mounting in the control cabinet e SME Sensor Module Externally Mounted Sensor Module with high degree of protection for mounting outside the control cabinet This type of closed loop control enables operation with a high dynamic response and precision for gt Motors with gt Motor encoders In addition to speed control position control can be included Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Glossary Servo drive An electric servo drive consists of a motor a gt Motor Module and a gt Servo control and in most cases a speed and position encoder Electric servo drives generally work
117. warning 80 number of warnings to be output 2 After the setting of the associated acknowledgment bit the remaining time is set to the interval time and the number of output warnings is zero assuming the associated acknowledgment blocking bit is not set DB1800 Alarms DB1800 Warnings Alarms r Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB3000 Alarm 8 Alarm 7 Alarm 6 Alarm 5 Alarm 4 Alarm 3 Alarm 2 Alarm 1 DBB3001 Alarm 16 Alarm 15 Alarm 14 Alarm 13 Alarm 12 Alarm 11 Alarm 10 Alarm 9 DBB3002 Alarm 24 Alarm 23 Alarm 22 Alarm 21 Alarm 20 Alarm 19 Alarm 18 Alarm 17 DBB3003 Alarm 32 Alarm 31 Alarm 30 Alarm 29 Alarm 28 Alarm 27 Alarm 26 Alarm 25 Designation Meaning Alarm n The alarm bit assigned to task n The bit is set each time for one PLC cycle As warning remaining time 0 and as alarm remaining time 0 Turning and Milling 220 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Service Planner DB1800 Deactivate tasks 7 2 Interfaces in the PLC user program DB1800 Task deactivation r w Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB2000 Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti vation 8 vation 7 vation 6 vation 5 vation 4 vation 3 vation 2 vation 1 DBB2001 Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti vation 16 vation 15 vation 14 vation 13 vation 12 vation 11 v
118. x 480 ico800 Icons in resolution 800 x 600 ico1024 Icons in resolution 1024 x 768 ico1280 Icons in resolution 1280 x 1024 ico1600 Icons in resolution 1600x1240 Ing Text files Ings Text files zipped and versions files osal lace ACE TAO qt Qt proj Easy Screen configurations template Various templates Icfg Templates for configuration files ling Templates for text files tmpp Storage temporary data addon directory addon sinumerik hmi appl Applications operating areas Icfg Configuration files data Version data hlp Online help files zipped and version files lico Icon files lico640 Icons in resolution 640 x 480 lico800 Icons in resolution 800 x 600 lico1024 Icons in resolution 1024 x 768 lico1280 Icons in resolution 1280 x 1024 lico1600 Icons in resolution 1600x1240 Ing Text files Ings Text files zipped and versions files proj Easy Screen configurations template Various templates Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 387 References A 4 Directory structure on the CompactFlash card 388 oem oem_i directory oem sinumerik data Version data archive Manufacturer archives hmi appl Applications operating areas Icfg Configuration files data Version data hlp Onli
119. you have already calibrated the tool probe in the JOG mode then the calibration data has already been correctly entered The setting of the following machine and setting data must match e MD51776 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_ALLOW_AX_DIRI ii e SD54632 SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL i Index i stands for the number of the actual data field _ PRNUM 1 SD54625 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX i Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in the negative direction a SD54626 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1 i Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in the positive direction 0 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 205 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 206 D54627 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in the negative direction 0 SD54628 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in the positive direction 0 D54629 i SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3 i Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in the negative direction 0 SD54630 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3 i Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in the positive direction 0 D54631 SNS_MEA_TP_EDGE_DISK_SIZE i Tool probe edge length disk diameter 0 D54632 SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL i Axes and directions for automatic calibration 133
120. 0 Swivel head rotary table MIXED_45 Commissioning softkey Swivel kinematics example 4 Kinematics Mixed kinematics MIXED_45 X Y Z Offset vector 11 0 000 0 000 30 600 Rotary axis vector V1 0 000 1 000 1 000 Offset vector 12 0 000 0 000 30 600 Offset vector I3 300 000 150 000 0 000 Rotary axis vector V2 0 000 0 000 1 000 Offset vector 14 300 000 150 000 0 000 Display version Swivel mode Axis by axis Direction Rotary axis 1 Correct tool yes Rotary axes Rotary axis 1 B Mode Auto Angular range 0 000 180 000 Rotary axis 2 C Mode Auto Angular range 0 000 360 000 Calculation of rotary axis vector V1 B 45 degrees V1Y sin 45 0 7071 V1z cos 45 0 7071 V1Y and V1z can be normalized to 1 173 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel 6 5 10 Example of the commissioning of a swivel table Swivel table TABLE_5 The vectors relate to the initial setting of the kinematics Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis A rotates around X Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis C rotates around Z Offset vector 12 Distance from the reference point of the machine to the pivot point intersection of rotary axis 1 Offset vector 13 Distance from the pivot point of rotary axis 1 to the pivot point intersection of rotary axis 2 Offset vector 14 Closure of vector chain 14 12 13 Side view of the machine from the X direction Spindle tool adapter is positioned on a block dimension above the top edge of the table rotary axis C or the c
121. 009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 225 Service Planner 7 3 Functions on the HMI Acknowledge maintenance task Pos Maintenance task Rem time Stat MAINTENANCE TASK 1 32 MAINTENANCE TASK 32 Figure 7 4 Acknowledge maintenance task After completion of the maintenance activities the maintenance tasks are acknowledged by the PLC user program or from the HMI When acknowledging on the HMI the maintenance task is first selected with KEY_UP KEY_DOWN The operator then presses Maintenance performed The Service Planner dialog sets the acknowledgment bit for the maintenance task the PLC deletes Number of output warnings alarms in the actual data and loads the interval value to the remaining time The user can see this in the Service Planner dialog and is an indication of successful acknowledgment Acknowledgment before the interval has expired The maintenance interval can be acknowledged at any time Premature acknowledgment means premature start of a new maintenance interval Acknowledgment after the interval has expired Acknowledgment of the maintenance interval restarts the task Turning and Milling 226 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Service Planner 7 3 Functions on the HMI Chronological sequence y 0 Interval start T1 T1 Ilw T1 2Ilw T1 3 Iw Tl Warning 1 2 3 4 Alarm Figure 7 5 Chronological sequence for the generation of messages Turning and Milling
122. 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specitic online help Formatting the index You have the following options to format the subject index e Single entry lt INDEX_ ENTRY title index gt e Two two stage entry whereby each title has a main and a subentry Separate the entries with a comma lt INDEX ENTRY title mainIndex 1 subIndex_1 with mainIndex 1 gt e Two stage entry whereby the first title is the main entry and the second title is the subentry Separate the entries with a semicolon lt INDEX ENTRY title mainIndex 2 subIndex 2 without mainIndex_ 1 gt index mainindex_1 gt sublndex_1 with mainindex_1 amp mainlndex_2 gt sublndex_2 without mainindex_2 amp sublndex_1 with mainindex_1 Figure 2 6 Example Two stage index 2 7 3 Description of the syntax for the online help Rules for creating the HTML files Generating help files in the HTML format It is possible to save all information in a single HTML file or to distribute the information over several HTML files The file names are assigned taking into account the following rules e References within HTML files should always be specified with relative paths Only then can it be ensured that the references function in precisely the same way on both the development computer as well as on the target system e If jumps are to be made to certain points within an HTML file per link t
123. 1 Activate fault 61187 0 Hide fault 61187 Active base and base reference G500 contain rotations default setting 1 Display fault 61187 6 5 3 ShopMill Swivel plane and swivel tool Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use the ShopMill function ShopMill ShopTurn Refer to the following chapter for a description and setting the function Technology cycles for swiveling Page 153 Swivel under ShopMill To enable the swivel function under ShopMill set the following additional channel specific machine data MD52212 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Cross technology function mask Bit O 1 Enable swivel You must create a swivel data set for every swivel head swivel table or combination of both A swivel data set consists of the following parameters STC_CARR1 n to TC_CARR65 n where n number of the swivel data set The parameters of the swivel data set STC_CARR1 n to TC_CARR65 n can be read in and read out in the Startup operating area Programming with appropriate value assignment is also possible in an NC program manufacturer cycle The parameters of the swivel data set are immediately effective after the program has started You can adapt the swivel function to specific user requirements in the CUST_800 SPF manufacturer cycle Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 159 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel 6 5
124. 1 Error in order 0 DB410x DBX0 0 delivers an order to relocate the tool from the buffer The target location in magazine 1 is in DB4100 DBW12 With it the PLC user program can execute the necessary sequence 9 7 8 Example Repeat Prepare tool change order Sequence Repeat the command For a milling machine with toolboy and shifter the asynchronous transfer message and order can cross e The toolboy was acknowledged to the tool management as the target position for the old tool with the end acknowledgment e The part program is continued with the new tool and after a very short time needs the previous old tool once more e The tool management generates the next preparation order for the tool change with the toolboy as the source position for what will then be the new tool e At the same time the PLC user program transfered the tool from the toolboy into the shifter Turning and Milling 352 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine e The PLC user progamm communicates the tool movement from the toolboy to the shifter asynchronously and starts onward transport to the magazine e Inthe next cycle the AWP recognizes the new order to relocate the tool from the toolboy to the spindle But the tool is no longer in the toolboy The PLC user program must detect such a condition monitoring does toolboy or shifter contain a tool It can now c
125. 11 Encoder 3 0 gt not used The second probe at terminal X122 10 must be parameterized for all axes that are parameterized on the NX module p0489 0 Probe 2 input terminal p0489 1 Probe 2 input terminal p0489 2 Probe 2 input terminal Encoder 1 6 gt connector X 122 10 Encoder 2 6 gt connector X 122 10 Encoder 3 0 gt not used Note All drives must be parameterized Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments Terminals X100 X101 X102 X103 elle iat ts l SINUMERIK 828D M 24 V E 3 3 3 i a glistisiis ji sjefs y 4 PN A H _ _ z J J 8 A m m A Dave meo ESE S EER al x100 19 e T l 1 z 9 i Numerical extension NX DIO 1 x101 a de Tt f x130 e male w A LAN Ol i oe Fre jomos i i DIDO 9 5 M i usi prrrnr nee ee ee ee HK i oe 1 gt Ap oo i exveze885855 i L A DEA FIT TEHFHE l wow ERE eae E ee 2 2222228898855 77777 i oe EEU UE E al eal ou lt Sefnesine The probes must be connected to the X143 TTT TTT control and to the NX module M T2 T1 TO Probe 2 Probe 1 Figure 4 30 Connecting
126. 19 SD54649 SNS_MEA_TPW_CAL_MEASURE_DEPTH Ii measuring depth for milling radius Distance between the upper edge of the tool probe and lower edge of the tool calibration depth 2 Default setting Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 209 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Monitoring when measuring with a rotating spindle 210 Setting data settings D54670 SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_PERI_SPEED 0 Maximum permissible peripheral speed of the tool to be measured 100 Default setting D54671 SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_REVOLUTIONS 0 Maximum permissible tool speed of the tool to be measured The speed is automatically reduced when exceeded 1000 Default setting SD54672 SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_FEEDRATE 0 Maximum permissible feedrate to probe the tool to be measured at the probe 20 Default setting D54673 SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE 0 Minimum feedrate for the first probing of the tool to be measured at the probe This avoids excessively small feedrates for large tool radii 1 Default setting D54674 SNS_MEA_CM_SPIND_ROT_DIRJ O Spindle direction of rotation to measure tools 4 M4 Default setting NOTICE If the spindle is already rotating when the measuring cycle is called this direction of rotation remains independent of the setting of this data D54675 SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 0
127. 1st TRANSMIT transformation MD24911 MC_TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 1 Limitation of working range in front of behind the pole 1st TRANSMIT Turning and Milling 134 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD24920 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 i Vector of the base tool for the 1st TRANSMIT transformation 0 0 Index i assumes values 0 1 2 for the 1st 2nd and 3rd geometry axis 1 0 Programmed tool length offsets are added to the base tool 2 0 TRANSMIT with real Y axis Turning and Milling MD24100 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 257 Definition of transformation 1 in the channel TRANSMIT main spindle MD24110 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_ i Axis assignment for the 1st transformation in the channel 0 1 Perpendicular to the rotary axis XC 1 3 Rotary axis C1 2 2 Parallel to rotary axis ZC MD24120 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 i Assignment of the geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 1 0 1 1st channel axis X 1 3 2nd channel axis Y 2 2 3rd channel axis Z MD24900 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 Offset of the rotary axis for the 1st TRANSMIT transformation MD24905 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 2 Axial offset of the rotary axis is taken into account during TRANSMIT 1 MD24910 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 0 Sign of the rotary axis for the 1st TRANS
128. 20 0BAO 127 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning i vA N LILLIA ALLL A a D55595 Distance to the last cut b SD55596 Retraction between plunge cutting and stock removal Figure 6 6 Set SD55595 and SD55596 As the tool bends during plunge turning the tool would make an excessively deep cut during stock removal The retraction distance of the tool between plunge cutting and stock removal is specified in the following channel specific setting data SD55596 SCS_TURN_CONT_TURN_RETRACTION Retraction depth before turning 0 1 0 1 mm or 0 1 inch retraction depth Turning and Milling 128 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 6 4 3 Example Axis configuration for lathes Lathe with milling tools If driven milling tools are available on a lathe then the following functions can also be set up on this machine e Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Page 130 e End face machining TRANSMIT Page 133 Lathe with X and Z axes main and tool spindle For example for a lathe with X and Z axes main spindle C1 and tool spindle WZ you can configure the following channel specific machine data MD20080 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB i Channel axis name in the channel 0 XC Channel axis XC 1 ZC Channel axis ZC 2 C1 Main spindle C1 3 WZ Tool spindle WZ Lathe with X and Z a
129. 34 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5 i Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 5 0 1 1st axis channel axis XC 1 5 2nd axis channel axis YC 2 2 3rd axis channel axis ZC MD24436 MC_TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_5 0 Tool handling with active transformation 5 MD24700 MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_1 55 Angle between 1st and 2nd transformation axis Data set for linking TRACON of end face machining on main spindle TRANSMIT and inclined axis TRAANG Data set for linking TRACON of end face machining on main spindle TRANSMIT and inclined axis TRAANG MD24440 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_6 8192 Type of transformation that is available as sixth in the channel MD24444 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_6 i Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 6 0 1 1st axis channel axis XC 1 3 2nd axis channel axis YC 2 2 3rd axis channel axis ZC MD24995 MC_TRACON_CHAIN_1 i Transformation linking 0 1 Number of the transformation TRANSMIT main spindle for linking 1 5 Number of the transformation TRAANG for linking Data set with linking TRACON of cylinder surface transformation on main spindle TRACYL and inclined axis TRAANG 138 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning Data set for linking TRACON of cylinder surf
130. 5 to _M8 M25 to _M29 e Engage disengage driven tool make break connection to drive Markers _M41 M42 e Configure special functions for switchover between machining planes Markers _M61 to M68 You do not have to make any settings for cylinder surface transformation or end face machining with the C axis e Position receptacle for cut off move out or in Markers _M100 M101 M102 e Configure special functions for tool changing Markers _M110 M111 M112 These special functions are called after the T command is output e Change default settings for the coupling of the main spindle and counterspindle Marker _M120 e Set special features for the program start or program end Markers _M131 _M135 M13 Direction of rotation of spindle The direction of rotation is set in the following machine data MD52207 MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB 5 The direction of spindle rotation M3 M4 is assigned to the positive rotational direction of the C axis via interface signal DB380x DBX2001 6 where n index of the relevant C axis Bit 4 defines whether M3 and C rotate in the same direction 0 or in opposite directions 1 The direction of rotation of an NC rotary axis is set via the following machine data MD32100 MA_AX_MOTION_DIR Travel direction 1 Direction reversal 0 1 no direction reversal As a result the following setting options are obtained for the main spindle However the settings for the
131. 51 _T formatted value R1 _F 9 3 nck Channel Parameter R 1 lt op gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 251 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 15 OPTION_MD Description Programming 252 The identifier allows option machine data to be redefined As delivered the system uses MD14510 MN_USER_DATA_INT 0 to MN_USER_DATA_INT 3 If the PLC user program manages the options the appropriate data words must be provided in a data block or GUD The data is structured in bits Starting with bit 0 there is a fixed assignment of the bits to the listed devices i e bit O is assigned to device 1 bit 1 to device 2 etc If more than 16 devices are managed the address identifiers of the device groups 1 3 are assigned via the area index Note Converting the value range The value range of MD14510 MN_USER_DATA_INT Ii is from 32768 to 32767 To activate the devices bit by bit via the machine data dialog the bit combination must be converted to decimal representation Identifier OPTION_MD Syntax Area 0 lt option_md name Address identifier of the data gt OR lt option_md name Address identifier of the data index 0 gt Area 1 to 3 lt option_md name Address identifier of the data index Area index gt Attributes name Identifier for the address e g MN_USER_DATA_INT 0 index Identifier for the area index 0 default sett
132. 6A 10701 Figure 4 16 Configuring the motor 5 This dialog tells you the exact data of the motor recognized Press Next gt 6 The next dialog tells you about the configuration of the motor brake Press Next gt Turning and Milling 80 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 7 The next dialog tells you which encoder has already been assigned to this drive object spindle MPF DIR ROV_TEST_MPF Program aborted Start up cnan Jog iZ Channel reset DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active DP3 SLAVE3 SERVO_3 3 3 3 MDSO 206400 J Drives Configuration Encoder assign F il Mask out encoders already assigned eon enco TedNoud VO Ekaan M to other DOs from the select list E Encoder SMI20_16 Encoder_17 Sensor Module SMI20 SMI20_16 16 X500 O Switch the Sensor Module LED to make it flash for recognition W Encoder SMI20_16 Encoder_17 Sensor Module C Switch the Sensor Module LED to make it flash for recognition O Encoder Sensor Module C Switch the Sensor Module LED to make it flash for recognition Communication to PLC failed Figure 4 17 Assigning the encoder 8 Activate the Encoder 2 option 9 Select the encoder SM_19 Encoder_20 from the selection list 10 Confirm with the lt I
133. 7 7 Measuring in the AUTOMATIC Mode cccccecsceeeeeeeseeeeeecaeeeaeceaeceaeceaeeeeeesaeesaeeeaeeeeeeieeeeneeas 198 6 7 8 AUTO General settings for the workpiece measurement esessssrissesrrserrrssrrrrssrtrrssrrssrennne 200 6 7 9 AUTO Measure workpiece during Milling ccccccccceseseeseeseceeecseeaeeeeeecaeeseceeeseseesessesaeeeeeateees 202 6 7 10 AUTO Measure workpiece during turning cceccceeceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaesaaeceaeeereeeneseseeeseeaaes 204 6 7 11 AUTO Measure tool during milling eee cee eee ener e erent ee ee eaeeee tates eetaeeeetaeeeeetaeeettia rere ZOO 6 7 12 AUTO Measure tool during turning CYCLEQ82 c cccccccsccscesseecsseeeeseeeeeeeeecseesecsesetsaeeesseeees 213 7 S rvice PlanNOT resar aara aene e aai AEEA aE a Eepe EEEa aani eaa a EAE Eana E SORE Ees P aaRS 215 7 1 PLO User Prog dieer A N 217 7 2 Interfaces in the PLC USEF PrOQraIMs iccsshdeviss ciccv eacag cles caaphcevesnnecveahccadvedacdevessaneatasaseevesancaeueasea a 218 7 3 Functions on the HM1 c ceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeenaaees 223 8 Easy EXTON Gh civs ctcece cress E EE EEEE wucteitveusasetestons 231 8 1 Overview Of FUNCTIONS 0 e eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee caer eeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeseaaeeesecaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeaaaeeeeeeaas 231 8 2 Configuration in the PLC user program ccccceeee center eene eee teneee ee te
134. 7 Trigonometric functions Arc sine arc cosine arc tangent description The function calculates the arc sine arc cosine arc tangent of the value transferred Programming of arcsin arccos Designation Syntax Designation Syntax Parameters Value range Programming of arctan Designation Syntax Parameters Value range Example arcsin lt function name arcsin return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt arccos lt function name arccos return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt double x in the range from 1 to 1 arcsin y in the range from t1 2 to 11 2 arccos y in the range from 0 to Tr arctan lt function name arctan return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt double x arbitrary value y in the range from t1 2 to 11 2 lt let name arccos val type double gt lt let gt lt function name arccos return arctan_val gt 0 47 lt function gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 283 Easy Extend 8 8 Examples 8 8 Examples 8 8 1 Example with control elements Example of a combo box If combo box is selected as the field type the expressions to be displayed must also be defined The lt item gt identifier should be used for this purpose The combo box saves the index of the currently selected text in the variable belonging to the CONTROL variable name The index starts with 1 lt control n
135. 9 2 PLC NCK user interface 9 2 1 Relocating unloading loading tool positioning magazine Tool and magazine movements Per loading point there is one interface for Rule Jobs for loading unloading relocating a tool MVTOOL and for magazine positioning POSM Message to the PLC user program Job active Job specification Job description The jobs appear on the interface of the loading point from which the tool is to be exchanged Acknowledgments of the PLC user program All acknowledgments for a job must take place in the interface of the same loading point Acknowledgment errors should also be reset in this interface Feedback from the tool management to the PLC user program Message to the PLC user program Status of acknowedgment Error status Map of the acknowledgment bits Job status Selected data from the last intermediate or end acknowledgment is saved This data is needed by the PLC firmware for the next acknowledgment to the tool management and is readable for diagnostic purposes This data can be used by the user program to restart after an abort e g reset during a tool change The distribution of jobs to the interfaces takes place according to the following rule If the job contains a loading point 9999 x that interface will be used Otherwise the interface of the first loading point 9999 1 will be used All acknowledgments for a job must take place in the interface of th
136. A0 Start up CHAN1 MPF DIR ROV_TEST_MPF A Channel reset 206400 4 Drives Overview Motor Data Set MDS Drive data set DDS PROFIBUS PZD telegram Cl loop contr type Component number Power section type Order no Power section rated current Power section rated output Serial no DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active Drive object type Program aborted SERVO SIEMENS telegram 116 PZD 11 13 Speed control with encoder r SERVO_3 3 3 Motor_Module_3 Power section MM_1AXIS_DCAC 6SL3120 1TE23 QAA3 T V82015928 3 30 00 A 15 10 kW A Communication to PLC failed Configur ation Figure 4 20 Drive data overview 4 1 Configuring the drive After the final save of the Encoder 2 configuration data the following overview is shown File functions 83 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 1 To assign every logical drive a real axis select the horizontal softkey Assign axis The Axis assignment dialog is opened MPF _DIR panan cnan Jog ROV_TEST MPF A Channel reset Program aborted DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active DP3 SLAVE3 SERYO_3 3 3 3 206400 4 Axis assignment Axis lt none gt gt drive SERVO_3 3 3 Motor_Modul
137. AS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE 0 or 1 MD13200 1 MN_MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE 0 or 1 Value 0 deflected state 24 V default Value 1 deflected state 0 V MD13210 MN_MEAS_TYPE 1 distributed measurement e Axis specific machine data MD30244 0 MA_ENC_MEAS_TYPE 1 forall axes MD30244 1 MA_ENC_MEAS_TYPE 1 forall axes Note The machine data MD13210 and MD30244 are preset to the value 1 and cannot be changed Data class SYSTEM Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 97 Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments 98 e Control Unit parameters PO680 0 Central probe input terminal 0 P0680 1 Central probe input terminal 0 p0680 2 Central probe input terminal 0 The first probe is connected to terminal X122 pin 11 the second probe to terminal X132 pin 11 of the SINUMERIK 828D and if present on the NX10 module to terminal X122 pin 10 A precondition is the switichover of pin X132 11 from output to input Set CU input or output set p0728 bit 15 to 0 DI DO X132 11 e Drive parameters p0488 0 Probe 1 input terminal p0488 1 Probe 1 input terminal p0489 0 Probe 2 input terminal p0489 1 Probe 2 input terminal p0489 2 Probe 2 input terminal Encoder 1 3 gt connector X 122 11 Encoder 2 3 gt connector X 122 11 p0488 2 Probe 1 input terminal Encoder 3 0 gt not used Encoder 1 6 gt connector X 132 11 Encoder 2 6 gt connector X 132
138. B1 Number of variables 1 8 Parameter DB120x DBW1000 Variables index 7 DB120x DBW1002 Location number 1 31999 DB120x DBW1004 Magazine number 1 9999 Result DB1200 DBX2000 0 Job completed 0 1 DB1200 DBX2000 1 Error in job 0 1 DB120x DBX3000 0 Variable is valid 0 1 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Read variable from Address Signal Valid values the NCK DB120x DBB3001 Access result 0 3 5 10 DB120x DBW3004 Data from NCK variable n Legend n gt 0 n 0 n 9999 Location type for virtual location match all buffer undefined no virtual location Location type TC_MPP4 with variables index 8 Parameter assignment Read variable from Address Signal Valid values the NCK Job DB1200 DBX0 0 Start 0 1 DB1200 DBX0 1 Write variable 0 DB1200 DBB1 Number of variables 1 2228 Parameter DB120x DBW1000 Variables index 8 DB120x DBW1002 Location number 1 31999 DB120x DBW1004 Magazine number 1 9999 Result DB1200 DBX2000 0 Job completed 0 1 DB1200 DBX2000 1 Error in job 0 1 DB120x DBX3000 0 Variable is valid 0 1 DB120x DBB3001 Access result 0 3 5 10 DB120x DBW3004 Data from NCK variable n Legend n 2 free lt gt occupied n 4 reserved for tool in buffer n 8 reserved
139. BERO 2 zero mark substitute NX r0722 11 Drive p0488 3 Input Probe 1 Distributed measurement NX p0680 0 0 Every drive on NX p0488 p0728 bit 11 0 Index encoders 1 2 3 3 Input 2nd OFF 2 NX r0722 11 Drive p0845 12 Ground for pins 7 8 10 11 Note The ON OFF 1 and OFF3 enables are only required on terminal X122 of the CU Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 93 Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments 4 2 4 Example Circuitry for a CU with line contactor Example The circuitry shown refers to the assignment of the terminals in the previous chapters CU Signal supplied Ready for switching on r0899 0 x132 8 l Without PLC logic lt lt Jumper gt gt I Input O X122 1 OFF 1 2 OFF 3 X122 2 Line contactor control R r0863 1 x132 10 g D fe 2 a D n gt O a v pa amp gt K D Fa w Note Line contactor BICO interconnection of line contactor control according to terminal diagram required Line contactor feedback signal P X132 4 Signal supplied Operation Output r0863 0 x132 7 Figure 4 28 Circuitry for a Control Unit with line contactor Turning and Milling 94 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments Smart Line Module connection The connections for the digital in outputs X122 a
140. COLOR AttrDefault 5006 AttrDataType 10 lt AttrDesc gt Background color of the alarm number used when displayed at the header panel lt AttrDesc gt lt Attribute gt lt Attributes gt lt Category gt lt Type gt lt Types gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI Define alarm colors 2 6 Configuring user alarms Procedure 1 2 Enter the alarm number in the lt Alarm AlarmID Open the created alarm attribute file alarm_slaedatabase xml in the editor Enter the attribute name of the alarm color type to be changed in the lt Attribute AttrName gt identifier Define the alarm source in the identifier lt Sources gt SourcelD 51 SourceURL PLC PMC Delete the areas that are not being changed Inthe lt Alarms gt identifier create a separate area for each individual alarm or for an alarm number range gt identifier or enter the alarm number range in the lt Range FromAlarmID ToAlarmID gt identifier Enter the desired color values in the identifiers lt TEXTCOLOR gt lt TEXTBACKGROUNDCOLOR gt lt NUMBERCOCLOR gt lt NUMBERBACKCOLOR gt Note To insert further alarm sources lt Sources gt make sure that the alarm number is always assigned to the correct alarm source You can find the SourcelD and the SourceURL in the following table List of the alarm number ranges Page 384 C
141. Connection Wizard Requirements The commissioning software for SINAMICS S120 is installed on the PG PC The NCU Connection Wizard is part of this software The connection to the control has already been set up via the Programming Tool Create connection to control Procedure for the PG PC 1 Start the NCU Connection Wizard via this link or via the Start menu a 2 In the Select Control Model dialog select 840D solution line for the NCU type Piece connection to the SINUMERIK 828D onnecti x SIEMENS Select Control Model Control Models 8400 solutiontine Select Port Cc 8400 powerline 840Di any C 810D powerline C VNCK 8400 Virtual NC Keme Cabling Help Favorite Connection Fir sh Cancel Figure 1 5 Select the NCU type Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 23 Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control 3 In the Select Port dialog select the connection to the control that you have connected via Ethernet x Select Port SIEMENS Select Control Model Cabling Help Settings Figure 1 6 Select connection 4 Confirm the cable connection for both devices in the Cabling Help dialog NCU Connection Wizard xj Cabling Help SIEMENS Note A crossover cable is required Select Control Model Select Port Settings Figure 1 7 Cabling Turning and Milling 24 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3D
142. DBX1 2 DBX1 5 and DBX1 6 Prepare tool change DB43xx DBW6 Source magazine number 9999 DB43xx DBW8 Source location number 1 DB43xx DBW10 Target magazine number 9999 DB43xx DBW12 Target location number 1 Acknowledgment Prepare tool change Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit Transfer step for Transfer step for Status step the new tool the old tool XXX 0 0 1 DB4200 DBXx x Displayed on the interface DB4300 DBX0 0 1 1 DBX1 5 and DBX1 6 Execute The job remains otherwise unchanged the tools are still at the starting positions Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 6 Example Change manual tools An intermediate step can be inserted for acknowledging the removal of the old tool Synchronous acknowledgment The tool is no longer in the spindle Transfer step 6 DB9900 DBW40 from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 9998 1 9999 1 Tool removed from the spindle step XXX Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit DB4200 DBXx x Transfer step for the new tool 0 Transfer step for the old tool 6 Status 105 After intermediate acknowledgment of the empty spindle and insertion of the new tool in the spindle the tool change is terminated with a total acknowledgment Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit step DB4200 DBX0 0 Transf
143. DEVICE gt lt list_id gt 1 lt list_ia gt lt name gt Activate the drive lt name gt lt SET_ACTIVE gt lt data name drive dc p105 DO5 gt 1 lt data gt lt data name SMC _AXCONF MACHAX USED 4 gt 5 lt data gt lt data name drive dc p971 D05 gt 1 lt data gt lt while gt lt condition gt drive dc p971 DO5 0 lt condition gt lt while gt lt control_reset resetnc true resetdrive true gt lt SET_ACTIVE gt lt SET_INACTIVE gt lt data name drive dc p105 D05 gt 0 lt data gt lt data name SMC _AXCONF MACHAX USED 4 gt 0 lt data gt lt data name drive dc p971 DO5 gt 1 lt data gt lt while gt lt condition gt drive dc p971 DO5 0 lt condition gt lt while gt lt control_reset resetnc true resetdrive true gt lt SET_INACTIVE gt lt DEVICE gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 8 Examples Activating the PLC controlled device Turning and Milling The device is addressed via output byte 10 and signals data set ready to the PLC via input byte 9 The output byte is set to the specified coding for activation The WHILE loop then waits for the data set ready of the device Programming lt SET_ACTIVE gt lt DATA name plc qb10 gt 8 lt DATA gt lt while gt lt condition gt plc ib9 1 lt condition gt lt while gt lt SET_ACTIVE gt Commis
144. Data exchange Data exchange via the V 24 interface is possible from the following operating areas e Program manager operating area e Start up operating area gt System data softkey Press the following softkeys to set the interface parameters D Bet etting Description of parameters Figure 10 3 Setting parameters Turning and Milling 380 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Series start up Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 10 4 Parameterizing the V 24 interface Parameter Permissible values Protocol RTS CTS default setting Xon Xoff Transmission Normal default setting Safe Baud rate 9600 default 300 19200 max Archive format Punched tape Binary format PC format gt only with RTS CTS protocol Interface COM1 Parity None default setting Even Odd Stop bits 1 default setting 2 Data bits 5 bits 6 bits 7 bits 8 bits default setting Xon 11 Xon 13 End of transmission hex 1a Time monitoring sec 4 Note If the interface is already assigned e g because a modem is connected data exchange via the V 24 interface is not possible and a message is output 381 Series start up 10 4 Parameterizing the V 24 interface Turning and Milling 382 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 References A 1 List of language codes used for file names
145. Device one lt translation gt lt message gt lt message gt lt source gt DEVICE_TWO lt source gt lt translation gt Device two lt translation gt lt message gt lt context gt lt TS gt Example oem_aggregate_deu ts lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTE 8 gt lt DOCTYPE TS gt lt TS gt lt context gt lt name gt EASY_EXTEND lt name gt lt message gt lt source gt DEVICE_ONE lt source gt lt translation gt Device one lt translation gt lt message gt lt source gt DEVICE_TWO lt source gt lt translation gt Device two lt translation gt lt message gt lt context gt lt TS gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 Description of the script language Script language Extended XML XML Extended Markup Language is used as the script language extended to include data processing and high level language elements In contrast to standard XML the language offers the following additional properties e Data storage for NC PLC data start up data e Reading and writing NC PLC and drive data e Execution of conditional jumps within an XML block e Execution of program loops e Execution of arithmetic operations e Creation of local variables e Loading creation of a series startup archive e Displaying messages Additionally SinuCom Update Agent script elements can be processed with the up
146. FTKEY_OK gt lt SOFTKEY_OK gt Identifier SOFTKEY_CANCEL Syntax lt SOFTKEY_CANCEL gt lt SOFTKEY_CANCEL gt Turning and Milling 262 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 29 TEXT Description Identifier for displaying text Programming Identifier TEXT Syntax lt text xpos X position ypos Y position color Color code gt Text lt text gt Attributes xpos Position in the X direction zero point in the left upper corner ypos Position in the Y direction zero point in the left upper corner color Color 8 5 30 UPDATE_CONTROLS Description This identifier performs a comparison between the operator controls and the reference variables Programming Identifier UPDATE_CONTROLS Syntax lt update_controls type lt Direction gt gt Attributes type The attribute defines the direction of the data comparison e TRUE The data is read from the reference variables and copied to the operator controls e FALSE The data is copied from the operator controls to the reference variables Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 263 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 31 Addressing the parameters Addressing parameters Address identifiers for the desired data must be created to address NC variables PLC blocks or drive data An address consists of the subpaths component name and variab
147. Initializing Data Initializing data IPO Interpolator ISO International Standardization Organisation International Standards Organization JOG Jogging operating mode Jogging via the direction keys LEC Leadscrew Error Compensation Leadscrew error compensation LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode LUD Local User Data Local user data MAIN Main program Main program OB1 PLC Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 397 List of abbreviations B 1 Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning Explanation MB Megabyte MCP Machine Control Panel Machine control panel MCS Machine Coordinate System MD Machine data MDA Manual Data Automatic operating mode Manual input MLFB Machine readable product designation MPF Main Program File Main program NC part program MPI Multi Point Interface Multi Point Interface NCK Numerical Control Kernel Numerical control kernel NCU Numerical Control Unit NCK hardware unit OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OPI Operator Panel Interface PCU Programmable Control Unit PG Programming device PI Program Instance PLC Programmable Logic Control Programmable logic controller POU Program organization unit in the PLC user program PPU Panel Processing Unit Panel based control QEC Quadrant Error Compensation Quadrant error compensation REF POINT Ref
148. MIT transformation MD24911 MC_TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 1 Limitation of working range in front of behind the pole 1st TRANSMIT Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 135 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD24920 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 i Vector of the base tool for the 1st TRANSMIT transformation 0 0 1 0 2 0 References Function Manual Extended Functions Kinematic Transformation M1 TRANSMIT 6 4 6 Inclined axis TRAANG Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function Inclined axis Function If the lathe has an inclined Y axis i e this axis is not perpendicular to axes X and Z you can still completely program machining operations in Cartesian coordinates The control uses the Inclined axis function TRAANG to transform the Cartesian coordinates to the motion of the inclined axis You still have to set up the Inclined axis function TRAANG via machine data See also Function Manual Extended Functions Kinematic Transformations M1 Example for a turning machine For example for a turning machine with X and Z axes and inclined Y axis main spindle C and tool spindle WZ you must configure the following machine data MD20050 MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TABIi Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis 0 1 1st real geometry axis X axis 1 0 2nd real geomet
149. M_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS MD17500 313 MN_MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE MD10880 104 MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB MD10712 104 MN_PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_IN MD12986 64 MN_PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_OUT MD12987 64 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME MD10717 318 MN_USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM MD14516 41 MNS_ACCESS_RESET_SERV_PLANNER MD51235 223 SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET SD54215 316 1 1 1 Change gt Tool change A Access levels 31 Acknowledgment Maintenance task 220 Process 320_ Rules 332_ Status 322_ Synchronous 321_ TM 301 Acknowledgment block 222 Acknowledgment step 330 Acknowledgment step table 312 Actual data table 219 Addressing Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBA0 DO 266 GUD 266_ MD 265 NC variables 265_ NX 267 Parameter 264_ Setting data 265_ Adjacent location 295_ Advanced Surface 182 Alarms Backing up permanently 44_ Colors 47_ Configuring variables 42_ Language code 383 Log 43 Number ranges 384_ Structure 40_ Archive Memory area 375 Series start up 376_ Axis configuration Lathe with milling tools 129 Milling machine 118_ B Buffer 294 C Certificate of License CoL 391 Chain magazine 294 Circular magazine 295_ Circumferential groove 117_ Company network 28_ Configuring the measuring system 78 Contour grooving CYCLE930 124 Contour milling CYCLE63 116 Contour tur
150. Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion 3 9998 2 9998 1 New tool from gripper 1 to spindle DB9900 DBW16 Step 7 or Step 14 gt continue with Step 8 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine 9 8 3 Example Acknowledgment steps milling machine Constant transfer step table Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 1 0 1 9998 2 New tool from magazine to gripper DB9900 DBWo 1 Step or 2 9998 9998 3 DB9900 DBW8 Step or 3 9998 9998 1 DB9900 DBW16 Step or 4 9998 3 0 2 DB9900 DBW24 Step or 5 0 2 9998 1 Storage location of the old tool DB9900 DBW32 6 0 1 9998 1 Magazine location with the new tool DB9900 DBW40 to the changing point Step or DB9900 DBW48 Variable transfer step table Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 101 1 n 9998 1 The variable location in Magazine 1 DB9901 DBWO is positioned at the changing point to the spindle 102 DB9901 DBW8 n here is the actual location number n 0 to be entered by the PLC user program in the variable transfer table Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 369 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Acknowledgment step table 370
151. Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control 7 Connect by double clicking on the icon Double click to update If the connection is made successfully the icon will be displayed with a green border Communications Links xj Communications Setup EEE TCP IP gt Marvell Yukon 8869055 4 Double click the icon representing the PLC to my Double Click communicate with to Refresh Communications Links xi Communications Setup EE TCP IP gt Marvell Yukon 88E 8055 Double click the icon representing the PLC to communicate with 828D Figure 1 3 Online connection 8 If the connection is unsuccessful the following setting may have to be deactivated Select Control Panel gt Network Connections Local Area Connection Properties Advanced gt Windows Firewall gt Settings Advanced Deactivate the option Local Area Connection Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBA0 21 Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control Windows Firewall O Local Area Connection Figure 1 4 Deactivate option Confirm with OK and repeat Step 7 22 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control 1 5 2 Example How to communicate with the control using the NCU
152. Module pin X21 1 gt X122 1 SINUMERIK 828D Connect further input and output signals to the PLC I O e DI PLC inputs e DO gt PLC outputs Additional information can be found in e SINUMERIK 828D Manual PPU e SINAMICS 120 Manual Booksize Power Units NOTICE DSC operation Parameterization of the combination STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE 1 and ENC_FEEDBACK_POL encoder inversion is not permitted The encoder inversion must be performed in the drive parameter p0410 bit 1 of the SINAMICS e DSC operation is preset for motor measuring systems e DSC operation must be explicitly activated for external measuring systems Requirement Message frame 2 116 SINAMICS drive parameters p1192 0 encoder selection p1193 0 encoder adaptation factor Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments 4 2 5 Connecting the probes Connecting the probes The probes are connected to both the SINUMERIK 828D CU and the NX 1st probe to terminal X 122 pin 11 X122 pin 11 of the NX 2nd probe to terminal X 132 pin 11 X122 pin 10 of the NX Note A precondition for measuring with the SINUMERIK 828D is that the distributed local measurement function has been parameterized Central measurement is not possible with SINUMERIK 828D Machine data The following machine data should be checked and adjusted if necessary e General machine data MD13200 0 MN_ME
153. NPUT gt key 11 Press Next gt 12 Confirm the query with OK This may take several minutes 13 While the data is being saved you receive the following status display Start up SINAMICS is saving the parameters Process completed by 20 TNH Figure 4 18 Encoder 2 Saving data 14 The next dialog tells you about the configuration of the control mode 15 Press Next gt 16 The next dialog tells you about the BICO connection Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0OBA0 81 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 17 Press Next gt 18 At the end you receive a summary showing all the data 19 If you press Finish gt you receive the following information Start up The configuration of drive SERYVO_3 3 2 has been completed The data must be stored in a non volatile manner for the configuration of drive SERYVO_3 3 2 to be retained after a restart Would you like to store the data of drive SERYO_3 3 2 in a non volatile manner Figure 4 19 Confirm saving 20 Confirm the saving of the configuration data with Yes Saving can take several minutes Result Step 3 for commissioning of the drives is now complete Turning and Milling 82 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the drive 4 1 5 Example How to assign the axes Assigning axes Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OB
154. NS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3 i Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in the positive direction 0 SD54646 SNS_MEA_TPW_EDGE_DISK_SIZE i Tool probe edge length disk diameter 0 D54647 SNS_MEA_TPW_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL i Automatic calibration tool probe enable axes directions 133 Turning and Milling 208 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles Example Turning and Milling 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions The following general setting data is used to define in which axes and directions it is possible to calibrate a tool probe Decimal place ONES 1st axis 0 axis not possible only minus direction only plus direction both directions TENS 2nd axis axis not possible only minus direction only plus direction both directions HUNDREDS 3rd axis axis not possible only minus direction only plus direction both directions If the general machine data SD54647 SNS_MEA_TPW_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL 123 the tool probe is calibrated as follows in the G17 plane e X in both directions e Y only in plus direction e Z only in minus direction SD54648 SNS_MEA_TPW_TYPE i Probe version 0 Cube default setting 101 Disk in XY working plane G17 201 Disk in ZX working plane G18 301 Disk in YZ working plane G
155. NTROLS ia E ers Te lye ieee eel 263 85 31 Addr ssingthe ARAL SIS iiss sibs chante yan E Eaa 264 8 5 32 Addressing the drive objects ccecceceeeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeceaeeeseaeeeaaeseeeeseaeescaeeeseeseaeeseeeeeeeeeas 266 8 5 33 XML identifiers for stateMent 00 0 2 eee ee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teases seneeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeaaees 268 8 6 String FUNCTIONS 0 2 eee eeee eee eee e ee entree erent eee rete ne ee ee ea nee setae ee eee aee EEA EEEE AEAEE E DRaa E ni 271 8 6 1 SUMO CIM e EEE E cunsned cand agudectaeadagiaceaseuasdenaddeeaaanceesinends 271 8 6 2 ae E ae e PA E E E E es 272 8 6 3 SS MMS Nias eat de eRe iach a Mae inde Masts ainsi 273 8 6 4 SUMMING oiire a a a aaae aa a a a a a 273 8 6 5 eue Rna a e e a e E A E E E E E EE T A E E E eaeeace tee 274 8 6 6 SS LMM lengoen e EE E E AE E E E TA 275 8 6 7 Sting replace aoinne aaee AEAEE EEE EEEa LE a EE AAG 275 8 6 8 SUING TEMOVE aignean aa eaaa SEE E EEEa A TEE E A TEES 276 8093 SUMMITS cee r E AE A EE S 277 8 6 10 SHIN INSEL te ee eee cece cece ceceeceeeceeeeeeeceeeaecaaeceaeceeeeeeeecaeecaecaaecaeseaeseeeesaeesaeesaeseaeeaecaeeseresereseneeses 277 8611 String AIAG occ sicesseescaseees cacisandacosteegsesexsqosedcasaeeuacedesa natives a AA eaa A aa aea a E Taaa Gan sesaieebeugeeetoens 278 8 6 12 stringreversefind s csssrceieirsrririesiiniiir s anria nE AEAEE TTEN TAEAE E 279 8 60 19 String MCR noii n aaa a aaea a baat Waa eG eee EE 280 8 6 14 string tri
156. O Settings on the HMI 2 6 Contiguring user alarms Editing the configuration file Procedure 1 Copy the configuration file oem_alarmprot_slaesvcconf xml from the siemens sinumerik hmi template cfg directory 2 Insert the file into the directory oem sinumerik hmi cfg or user sinumerik hmi cfg 3 Name the file slaesvcconf xml 4 Open the user specific file slaesvcconf xml in the editor 5 Enter the number of events to be output in the lt Records type gt identifier The default value is 500 The permissible number is in the range from 0 32000 OR The number of events to be output and the type of logging can also be entered directly via the user interface 1 Press the Alarm log gt Settings gt softkey in the Diagnostics operating area As soon as changes are made to the default settings the slaesvcconf xml file is automatically created in the user sinumerik hmi cfg directory 2 Enter the mode of the permanent storage in the lt DiskCare type int value 1 gt identifier The following values are possible 1 There is no saving of the alarm log default setting 0 Each alarm event triggers an immediate saving of the alarm log gt 0 Time for saving the log in seconds When there is a change the log is saved every n gt 0 seconds 3 You adapt the filter for the entry type in the lt Filter gt identifier Here the following applies An alarm event is only entered in the log
157. OR operation II II Logical OR operation amp amp amp Logical or bit by bit AND operation amp amp amp amp amp amp Logical AND operation Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Substitution characters The system offers the option of defining CONTROL properties attribute values during runtime In order to use this function the desired property must be set in a local variable and the variable name must be transferred to the tag as an attribute value preceded by the character Turning and Milling 238 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Example lt let name my_ypos gt 100 lt let gt lt let name field_ name type string gt lt let gt lt control name editl xpos 322 ypos S my_ypos refvar nck Channel Parameter R 1 gt lt op gt my_ypos my _ypos 20 lt op gt lt control name edit2 xpos 322 ypos S my_ypos refvar nck Channel Parameter R 2 gt lt print name field name text edit d gt 3 lt print gt lt op gt my_ypos my _ypos 20 lt op gt lt control name field name xpos 322 ypos my_ypos refvar nck Channel Parameter R 3 gt 8 5 2 Structure of the XML script Overview Description Turning and Milling The following identifiers are available for the description of the device e Identifier for Easy Extend e Identifier fo
158. P20 0OBA0O Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control 5 Check the IP address and enter the name for these settings in the Settings dialog NCU Connection Wizard Settings Provide Communications Settings Select Control Model Select Port Cabling Help Figure 1 8 Network settings IV Save these settings as a favorite yee Reset Settings SIEMENS X127 Engineering Tools Recommended 1 5 3 How to communicate with the control using the RCS Commander Connection options The following options are available for the RCS Commander to create a connection with the control e Direct connection peer to peer e Network connection The current status of the connection is shown at the bottom in the RCS Commander status bar Meaning of the buttons we Connect Disconnect Remote control Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO 25 Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control NOTICE Generally only one connection is permitted i e several simultaneous connections to different controls are not supported So data exchange between two NCUs using RCS Commander is not possible Direct connection To create a direct connection 1 The login data is entered in the dialog Settings gt Connection gt Direct connection Direct connection settings Here you can change the settings for the direct con
159. P20 0OBAO 307 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Acknowledgments DB4200 42xx Signals to tool management r w xx Tool holder Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBBO Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Total edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment acknowl step 7 step 6 step 5 step 4 step 3 step 2 step 1 edgment DBB1 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 15 step 14 step 13 step 12 step 11 step 10 step 9 step 8 DBB2 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 23 step 22 step 21 step 20 step 19 step 18 step 17 step 16 DBB3 Reserved Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 30 step 29 step 28 step 27 step 26 step 25 step 24 DBB4 Reserved DBB5 Reserved DBB6 Reserved DBB7 Reserved DBB8 Reserved DBB9 Resetting the acknowledg ment error Signal description e Total acknowledgment At a 0 1 edge the end acknowledgment with status 99 is sent to the current job job complete all target positions have been reached As long as the signal
160. PLC NCK user interface DB4300 43xx Signals from tool management r DBW18 Target magazine number for old tool INT DBW20 Target location number for old tool INT DBW22 Location type INT DBW24 Size left INT DBW26 Size right INT DBW28 Reserved DBW30 Reserved DBB32 Tool status for new tool Master To be To be Blocked Identifier tool loaded unloaded for tool DBB33 Tool status for new tool Tool has Tool fixed Tool being Prewarnin Measuring Tool Tool Active tool been in location changed g limit tools disabled enabled use coded reached DBW34 New tool Internal T number of NCK INT DBW36 Reserved DBW38 Reserved DBW40 Reserved DBW42 Reserved DBW44 Free parameter 1 DWORD DBW48 Free parameter 2 DWORD DBW52 Free parameter 3 DWORD Signal description e Job The interface contains a job Job processing has not yet been completed with an end acknowledgment This signal is reset after transmission of the end acknowledgment to the tool management e Fixed location coded The new tool is fixed location coded e Execute tool change The new tool is to be loaded into the tool holder the spindle The old tool is to be brought back to a magazine location This job always requires an end acknowledgment e Prepare a tool change Initialize new tools If necessary position magazine location for old tool at the changing point This job r
161. SH key file ey lal gt Remote monitor IP name JV Same as the control Port 5900 Transmission mode LAN Modem Delete Gonnection Save as new connection Gonnect Saye Changes Figure 1 11 Dialog Network connection 2 Inthe menu select Connection gt Connect gt Network connection or select if available one of the previously selected connections 3 Connection is made to the parameterized control Note SSh key file As an alternative to entering a password the user may also use an SSh key for authentication Please refer to the Online Help for more information on this topic Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 27 Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control 1 5 4 Communicating with the control via X130 Connection to the company network The NCU is connected to the company network via the Ethernet interface X130 The company network is used for example to access the network drives In the Diagnostics operating area select the Bus TCP IP gt TCP IP Diagnostics gt Details softkey with the menu forward key in order to set the parameters for the communication via X130 NCU company network X130 0 00 NCU X127 0 00 neu ibn 08 00 06 74 4d 5b 08 00 06 74 4d 5c DHCP Client DHCP Server Default 192 168 215 1 Subnet mask as
162. Stop dimensions 2 Jaw dimensions MD52243 MCS_SUB_SPINDLE_PARAMETER Parameters for counterspindle 0 Chuck dimensions 1 Stop dimensions 2 Jaw dimensions MD52246 MCS_TAILSTOCK_DIAMETER Tailstock diameter 0 MD52247 MCS_TAILSTOCK_LEGTH Tailstock length 0 The M code e g M34 or M1 34 for the spindle chuck is defined in the following machine data The manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF takes the M functions from the following machine data MD52250 MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_OPEN Ii M code for open chuck with stationary spindle 0 0 Main spindle 1 0 142 Counterspindle Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 OBAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 0 0 MD52251 MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_CLOSE_OPEN_ROTIi M code for open chuck with spindle rotating Main spindle 1 0 Counterspindle MD52252 MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_CLOSE i M code for close chuck 0 0 Main spindle 1 0 Counterspindle MD52214 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL Milling function mask Bit 3 Inner rear machining is enabled in the ShopTurn masks which themselves define the machining plane Bit 4 If you have implemented the Clamp release spindle function using the manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF then using this machine data you can activate the Clamp
163. Surface Example If more than three rotary axes are declared in the channel for the orientation transformation You can wrote the value to FGREF with the following syntax in the CUST_832 SPF FGREF AA SAA_FGREF C C rotary axis 1 axis is taken into account by CYCLE832 AA rotary axis 4 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 185 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 6 7 1 General settings for measuring Requirement Two types of electronic probes are used for measuring e Probe for workpiece measurement e Probe for tool measurement The electronic probe is only called probe in the following description You set the electrical polarity of the connected probe using the following general machine data MD13200 0 MN_MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE MD13200 1 MN_MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE Polarity change of the probe 0 Probe in the non deflected state 0 V default setting Probe in the deflected state 24 V 1 Probe in the non deflected state 24 V Probe in the deflected state 0 V MD13210 MN_MEAS_TYPE 1 Measuring type for distributed drives The distributed measuring is permanently preset data class SYSTEM See also Connecting the probes Page 97 Turning and Milling 186 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Contiguring cycles Testing the probe functi
164. _MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX2 i Positional deviation 2nd measuring axis in the plane However after the probe has been calibrated you can check these values and if required evaluate the probe quality e g for position deviations no values gt 0 1 mm should be reached Otherwise the probe must be mechanically readjusted Note Observe the manufacturer s instructions for the probe Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 203 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 6 7 10 AUTO Measure workpiece during turning Requirement MD51610 MNS_MEA_TOOLCARR_ENABLE Support of a probe or tool that is positioned with a toolholder that can be oriented swivel mounted 0 No support default setting 1 With support MD52605 MNS_MEA_TURN_CYC_SPECIAL_MODE Function for turning Measure in the Y axis 3rd axis and correct in the X axis face axis 0 Default setting Calibration data of the tool probe in relation to the MCS 204 Before calibration is started the position of the tool probe in the machine coordinate system MCS must be entered into the following general setting data D54615 SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_BASE_AX Ii Calibration slot base referred to the 1st measuring axis 0 D54617 SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_PLUS_DIR_AX1 I Calibration slot edge in the positive direction of the first measuring axis 0
165. _TURN_FIXED_STOP_RETRACTION Retraction distance before clamping after fixed stop After gripping you can cut off the workpiece Before doing so the counterspindle can retract a short distance with the workpiece to exert tensile stress on the workpiece This relieves pressure on the tool when cutting off Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 147 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning SD55543 SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_RETRACTION Retraction distance before parting After the part you can carry out a cutting off check and for turning use the Travel to fixed stop function You can activate or deactivate the cut off check via the following channel specific setting data D55540 SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_DIST Distance for cut off check D55541 SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FEED Feedrate for cut off check D55542 SCS_TURN_PART_OFF_CTRL_FORCE Force for cut off check in The cut off is successful when travel to fixed stop fails The following alarms are output Alarm Alarm text 20091 Axis 1 has not reached the fixed stop 20094 Axis 1 end stop has been aborted You can switch off the alarm display using the following machine data MD37050 MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK Enabling the fixed stop alarms 2 Suppressing alarms 20091 and 20094 You can set this machine data axis specifically in the Machine Data window in the Tool zero opera
166. a factor on the NC command OTOL This factor can be set in the following channel specific setting data for each machining type D55440 SCS_MILL_TOL_FACTOR_NORM 10 Factor tolerance of the rotary axes for CYCLE 832 G group 59 10 D55441 SCS_MILL_TOL_FACTOR_ROUGH Factor tolerance of the rotary axes for roughing of the G group 59 10 D55442 SCS_MILL_TOL_FACTOR_SEMIFIN Factor tolerance of the rotary axes for roughing finishing of the G group 59 10 D55443 SCS_MILL_TOL_FACTOR_FINISH Factor tolerance of the rotary axes for finishing of the G group 59 10 Turning and Milling 182 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles Machining type and technology G group 59 The machining types of the technology G group 59 are permanently assigned in CYCLE832 or in CUST_832 SPF 6 6 High Speed Settings Advanced Surface Machining type Technology G group 59 Array index Deselection DYNNORM 0 Roughing DYNROUGH 2 Pre finishing DYNSEMIFIN 3 Finishing DYNFINISH 4 Dynamic parameters can be adapted to the respective machining operation with the technology G groups Using the commands of technology G group 59 the value of the following channel and axis specific machine data is activated using the corresponding array index Note During the optimization of the machine axes the values array index of the following ma
167. ace transformation on main spindle TRACYL and inclined axis TRAANG MD24450 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_7 8192 Type of transformation 7 in the TRACON channel MD24454 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_7 i Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 7 0 1 1st axis channel axis XC 1 3 2nd axis channel axis YC 2 2 3rd axis channel axis ZC MD24996 MC_TRACON_CHAIN_2 i Transformation linking 0 3 Number of the TRACYL transformation main spindle for linking 1 5 Number of the TRAANG transformation for linking 6 4 7 ShopTurn Setting up cycles for turning Manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF In cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF the function markers _M1 to __M142 are prepared and documented The manufacturer cycle CYC_TECHCUST SPF is called by the ShopTurn cycles Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use the ShopTurn function ShopMill ShopTurn Making adaptations Adapt the cycle if you want to perform one of the following actions e Switch between spindle and C axis mode for the main spindle or counterspindle Markers _M1 M2 M21 M22 e Clamp or release rotary axes main spindle counterspindle Markers _M3 M4 M23 M24 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 139 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning e Open close flush chuck main spindle counterspindle Markers _M
168. achine data you can activate the Clamp release spindle parameter in the drilling and milling masks 0 The Clamp release spindle parameter is not displayed in the drilling and milling masks ShopTurn automatically clamps the spindle if it makes sense for the particular machining operation 1 The Clamp release spindle parameter is displayed in the drilling and milling masks The operator decides for which machining operation the spindle should be clamped Note The end face machining is automatically integrated in the cycles with the exception of the straight line and circle You can select the function for these two cycles in the Program operating area at Straight line and Circle Function Manual Extended Functions Kinematic Transformation M1 TRANSMIT Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 151 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 6 4 11 ShopTurn Inclined axis TRAANG Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function Inclined axis Function If you wish to use the Inclined axis function under ShopTurn please take the settings from Chapter Inclined axis TRAANG Page 136 Note Once the Inclined axis function has been set up in the user interface it is automatically integrated in the cycles This means that for machining with inclined axis you can select the Face Y or Surface Y machining plane and enter C
169. afety prompt appears With HMI options you will need to restart the HMI Corresponding prompts will appear in the dialog line 5 Press the OK softkey to trigger a warm restart OR 6 Press the Cancel softkey to cancel the process Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 39 Settings on the HMI 2 6 Configuring user alarms 2 6 Configuring user alarms Creating user PLC alarms The PLC alarms in the area from 700 000 700 247 are configured by the machine manufacturer The access level Manufacturer is required with the appropriate password To enter the user PLC alarms via the user interface select gt HMI Alarm texts in the Start up operating area Then you receive the following selection Alarm texts for Name of the xml file User cycle alarms oem_alarms_cycles User PLC alarms oem_alarms_plc User part program message texts oem_partprogram_messages Loading user PLC alarms See also 2 6 1 The alarm text files are only loaded during startup e Alarm attribute red is shown in the alarm list e Message attribute black is shown under Messages Select lt MENU SELECT gt then the menu forward key and press the HMI restart softkey to load the alarm texts You can find a detailed description of the alarms with system responses and deleting criteria in SINUMERIK 828D Diagnostics Manual Structure of user PLC alarms Structure
170. agnetic flux userdef user defined The unit is defined by the user If the machine data does not use units no units are displayed If the data is not available the symbol is displayed instead of the value If the value ends in an H it is a hexadecimal value Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Setting NCK machine data 5 1 Classification of machine data Effectiveness of the machine data The right hand column indicates when a machine data becomes effective cf with confirmation using the Activate MD softkey po NCK Power On Reset re Reset so immediately effective User views User views are user specific groups of machine data They are used to call all relevant machine data in a certain operating state from various areas for processing The user views are stored on the CompactFlash card with the following path user sinumerik hmi template user views The following user views are already available as template e Electrical_Startup e Mechanical_Startup e Optimizing_Axis Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 103 Setting NCK machine data 5 2 Processing part programs from external CNC systems 5 2 Processing part programs from external CNC systems Activate the ISO Dialect function Part programs from external CNC systems can be read in and executed Selection of ISO Dialect M or T MD10880 MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM 1_
171. aken place yet the control opens the commissioning dialog If a commissioning procedure has been programmed for the device XML statement START_UP and the device has not been commissioned yet the control starts the commissioning procedure This involves a complete data backup before the series startup archives saved in the script file are read in Standard or data class archives are permitted as archive types arc and ard e Inthe event of an error the commissioning engineer can decide whether to roll back the commissioning procedure or to rectify possible errors in machine configurations manually e Commissioning can be aborted early with the Cancel function The control then copies the previously saved commissioning files back If the machine has to be switched off after successful completion of the commissioning the XML statement POWER_OFF can be used to program that a corresponding message is output on the control Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 235 Easy Extend 8 4 Creating language dependent texts 8 4 Creating language dependent texts Structure of text file 236 The XML files with the language dependent texts must be created in UTF8 format Example oem_aggregate_eng ts lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE TS gt lt TS gt lt context gt lt name gt EASY_EXTEND lt name gt lt message gt lt source gt DEVICE_ONE lt source gt lt translation gt
172. al magazine to a buffer relocate MVTOOL acknowledgment with status 6 or total acknowledgment reserves the source location for this tool TC_MPP4 bit 1 and bit 2 The behavior is the same as for the removal of a tool from the magazine during tool change With status 1 there is no reservation of the source location during relocation or MVTOOL e Statuses 3 and 7 need only to be coded once in the acknowledgment step table as no transfers steps are evaluated e Status 99 does not need to be coded it is specified by the total acknowledgment bit Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 323 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Typical sequence of any job with total acknowledgment Order 7 Total acknowledgment Acknowledgment OK Signal description The PLC user program recognizes from the 0 1 edge of the signal DB43xx DBX0 0 job that a new job has been assigned by the tool management The PLC user program sets the acknowledgment signal in DB42xx DBX0 0 total acknowledgment With activation of the 0 1 edge the PLC firmware starts transferring the acknowledgment to the tool management After successful transmission of the acknowledgment to the tool management the PLC firmware sets a PLC cycle to 1 for the signal acknowledgment OK and at the same time the job signal and the acknowledgment bit are reset to 0 Typical sequence of any job with total acknowledgm
173. ame buttonl xpos 10 ypos 10 fieldtype combobox gt lt item gt text1l lt item gt lt item gt text2 lt item gt lt item gt text3 lt item gt lt item gt text4 lt item gt lt control gt Example of a value assignment 284 If an arbitrary integer value is to be assigned to an expression the attribute value value should be added to the identifier Rather than consecutive numbers the control variable now contains the item s assigned value lt control name buttonl xpos 10 ypos 10 fieldtype combobox gt lt item value 10 gt textl lt item gt lt item value 20 gt text2 lt item gt lt item value 12 gt text3 lt item gt lt item value 1 gt text4 lt item gt lt control gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 8 Examples Note hotlink attribute The hotlink attribute results in a cyclic update of the corresponding control This means that when a value is entered the following update cycle overwrites the entered value To avoid this behavior the immediate saving of the entries must be activated with the DATA_ACCESS tag Another possibility is to take the the SOFTKEY_OK identifier into the form This identifier is performed before the dialog is closed In this block the data comparison can be made between the control and reference variables with the UPDATE_CONTROLS statement 8 8 2 Example w
174. anagement via synchronous signals Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks 9 4 2 Types of acknowledgment Tool and magazine movements The tool management distinguishes between synchronous acknowledgment and an asynchronous job independent message Synchronous acknowledgment e Acknowledgment of the intermediate steps of a job tool management registers the current position changes of tools part program must wait The tool management is informed of intermediate steps of a job by an intermediate acknowledgment In intermediate acknowledgments only the target position of the intermediate step is relevant The source position is known from the job or the last intermediate acknowledgment During a tool change two tools new and old can also be acknowledged simultaneously Intermediate acknowledgments are only possible before the end acknowledgment e End acknowledgment of a job part program can be continued An end acknowledgment is necessary for every job The end acknowledgment allows the part program to continue and frees up the job interface for new jobs It should take place as soon as possible e g as soon as the new tool is in the spindle and a collision is no longer expected The tool management can be informed asynchronously of further steps after the end acknowledgment of a job e g the return path of the old tool into the magazine Asynchronous
175. ancel the return of the tool into the magazine A repeat order Status 7 can then be requested from the tool management e Meanwhile the tool management has received the message that the tool is in the shifter e It generates a new preparation order with the source position shifter for the new tool NOTICE The acknowledgment to repeat the order Prepare tool change may only be issued before the end acknowledgment of the Prepare tool change order Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status step tool tool XXX DB4000 DBXx x 0 0 7 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 353 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine 9 8 Application example for milling machine 9 8 1 Example Milling machine with chain magazine and dual gripper MAG_CONF_MPF Example file You can find the program for configuring the magazine in the Toolbox The program can be read into the control and should be adjusted for the specific machine concerned Configuration Magazine Gripper 1 9998 2 Spindle 9998 1 C Gripper 2 9998 3 p Magazine loading point Load and unload magazine 9999 1 1 11 Transfer steps Figure 9 6 Milling machine with chain magazine Description of the buffers and loading points Magazine Location Meaning 1 XX
176. ard block attributes are supported h2 Level 2 heading The standard block attributes are supported h3 Level 3 heading The standard block attributes are supported h4 Level 4 heading The standard block attributes are supported h5 Level 5 heading The standard block attributes are supported h6 Level 6 heading The standard block attributes are supported head Document header hr Horizontal line Supported attributes width can be specified as absolute or relative value html HTML document i Italic img Image Supported attributes src width height kbd User entered text meta Meta information li List item nobr Non breakable text ol Ordered list The standard attributes for lists are supported p Paragraph The standard block attributes are supported default setting left aligned pre Preformated text s Strikethrough samp Sample code Same effect as tag tt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Settings on the HMI Block attributes 2 7 Creating OEM specitic online help Tag Description Comment small Small font span Grouped elements strong Strong Same effect as tag b sub Subscript sup Superscript table Table Supported attributes border bgcolor RRGGBB cellspacing cellpadding width absolute or relative height tbody Table body No effect td Table data cell The standard attributes for table cells are supported tfoot Tabl
177. ard which only allows a limited number of write cycles e Therefore ensure that the backup is only performed when there is a justifiable need e Make sure you undo the setting on every event if you no longer require storage of the alarm log Default The alarm log is not backed up Filtering events Set up a filter to limit the number of events in the alarm log You can find more details on this in e Commissioning Manual Basesoftware and HMI sl chapter Configuring alarms e List of the alarm number ranges Page 384 How to configure the log Configuring the log 44 Procedure 1 Select the Diagnostics operating area 2 Press the Alarm log softkey 3 Press the Settings softkey 4 Enter the desired number in the Number of entries field to change the maximum number of raised and cleared events Default is 500 events permissible value range 0 32000 5 Select the type of logging under File write mode Off if the events are not to be written to a file On every event if every event is to be written to a file Time controlled if the file is to be overwritten after a particular time interval An additional Time interval input field appears in which you can specify the time in seconds 6 Press the Save log softkey to save the alarm log The settings become effective only after restarting the HMI Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBA
178. artesian coordinates References Programming Manual Job Preparation Inclined axis TRAANG Turning and Milling 152 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel 6 5 Swivel 6 5 1 Technology cycles for swiveling Requirement The commissioning of the kinematic chain of the machine is a mandatory requirement for the swivel function CYCLE800 The kinematic chain is stored in the tool parameters TC_CARR1 to TC_CARR65 Note For the activation of the swivel function one tool holder that can be oriented swivel data set and the system frames Setting the workpiece tool and rotary table reference Page 156 are already activated in the NCK default setting _ References Function Manual Basic Functions Tool offset W1 inclined surface machining with 3 2 axes Activating the swivel function The swivel function is activated via the following channel specific machine data MD52212 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Cross technology function mask Bit O 1 Enable swivel Configuring the input dialog You can configure the input dialog for swivel via the following channel specific setting data The setting data is effective for all of the declared swivel data sets D55221 SCS_FUNKTION_MASK_SWIVEL_SET Function mask swivel CYCLE800 Bit 0 Input field No swivel 0 hide 1 display Bit 1 Text displayed for retract the tool ax
179. as a ee 510 STOPRE N520 Definition of buffer magazine N530 TC_MAP1 9998 7 N540 TC_MAP2 9998 BUFFER lt lt NUM_ MAG N550 TC_MAP3 9998 17 N560 TC_MAP6 9998 1 N570 TC_MAP7 9998 NUM_ BUFFER Locations in the buffer Number of lines in magazine Number of magazine locations Location type Location type every tool location type 0 compatible with Consider adjacent location On would be 0 Off Location status Location type index always number 9998 Magazine type 7 Buffer Magazine status Number of lines Number of locations Spindl 580 1 590 1 600 1 e C_MPP1 9998 1 2 C_MPP2 9998 1 0 C_MPP3 9998 1 0 Location Location Consider Location type here spindle type here always 0 adjacent location Off status 610 TC_MPP4 9998 1 2 ZB Baa Bw 620 TC_MPP5 9998 1 1 630 640 FOR PLACE 2 to NUM BUFFER Gripper 650 STOPRE 660 TC_MPP1 9998 PLACE 3 670 TC_MPP2 9998 PLACE 0 680 TC_MPP3 9998 PLACE 0 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Location type index here gripper here always 0 Consider adjacent location Off 357 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine N690 TC_MPP4 9998 PLACE 2 N700 TC_MPP5 9998 PLACE PLACE N710 endfor N720 STOPRE r N740 TC_MAP1 9999 9 N750 TC_MAP2 9999 LOADING MAGAZINE lt lt NUM_MAG 760
180. ation 10 vation 9 DBB2002 Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti vation 24 vation 23 vation 22 vation 21 vation 20 vation 19 vation 18 vation 17 DBB2003 Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti Deacti vation 32 vation 31 vation 30 vation 29 vation 28 vation 27 vation 26 vation 25 Designation Meaning Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O Deactivation n The deactivation bit assigned to task n If the bit is set via the HMI or from the PLC user program the current state of task n is frozen and no longer processed TRUE Task deactivated FALSE Task active This means it is possible for example to adapt the maintenance interval according to the actual runtime of the modules 221 Service Planner 7 2 Interfaces in the PLC user program DB1800 Acknowledgment block DB1800 Acknowledgment block r w Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB5000 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment block 8 block 7 block 6 block 5 block 4 block 3 block 2 block 1 DBB5001 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment block 16 block 15 block 14 block 13 block 12 block 11 block 10 block 9 DBB5002 Acknowl Acknowl A
181. being configured This may take up to several minutes depending on the configuration of the drive system The display will then be updated Figure 4 8 Drive unit Configuration Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 73 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 10 Then you receive the following display Start up CHAN1 Channel reset MPFO Program aborted DP3 SLAVE3 CU_I_3 3 1 1 To match the cyclic data traffic between the NCK and SINAMICS to the SINAMICS configuration an NCK power ON reset warm restart should be executed Do you want to execute an NCK power ON reset warm restart CU_I_3 3 1 Control_Unit_1 1 Figure 4 9 NCK Power On Reset 11 Confirm with Yes The system carries out a warm restart This operation can take several minutes After the warm restart you receive the following selection JOG Ref nfiguration DP3 SLAVE3 CU_I_3 3 1 1 O SENO a32 Moio Mode Mm as peac z ooann Moh ETES Start up The configuration of the drive unit has been completed Now continue commissioning in the Drives area To do this select Drives Select OK to continue commissioning in the current dialog Figure 4 10 Continue configuration 12 To continue commissioning press the Drive softkey Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning t
182. ber corresponds to the error message of the tool management in the NCK caused by this transfer The error status is reset by acknowledgment of the error by the user Map of acknowledgments DB43xx DBB108 to DBB111 The acknowledgments last set by the PLC user program DB42xx DBBO to DBB3 are set and reset by the PLC firmware together with the bits Acknowledgment OK or Acknowledgment error If there is an error the user uses these statically pending bits to see which acknowledgment step triggered the error If the PLC user program incorrectly set multiple acknowledgment bits these are also entered one to one in the map Job status DB4300 43xx xx Tool holder Signals from tool management r Byte Bit7 Bit Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBW124 Current magazine number for new tool INT DBW126 Current location number for new tool INT DBW128 Target magazine number for new tool INT DBW130 Target location number for new tool INT DBW132 Current magazine number for old tool INT DBW134 Current location number for old tool INT DBW136 Target magazine number for old tool INT DBW138 Target location number for old tool INT 310 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface 9 2 3 Transfer step and acknowledgment step tables
183. between grooving and retracting for grooving technology Tool clearance time during grooving at the base gt 0 Dwell time in seconds lt 0 Dwell time in spindle revolutions D55580 SCS_TURN_CONT_RELEASE_ANGLE Angle through which the tool is lifted from the contour for contour turning roughing 45 Retraction angle of 45 degrees Turning and Milling 124 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning Angle Figure 6 4 Angle of retraction SD55581 SCS_TURN_CONT_RELEASE_DIST Amount by which the tool is lifted in both axes when roughing a contour This applies for stock removal plunge cutting and plunge turning 1 1 mm or 1 inch retraction distance SD55582 SCS_TURN_CONT_TRACE_ANGLE The angle between cutting edge and contour as of which rounding is performed on the contour during contour turning in order to remove residual material If the angle of the residual material is greater than that specified in the setting data the tool will round the contour 5 5 degree angle Contour Current cutting depth D Residual material Figure 6 5 Angle of the residual material SD55583 SCS_TURN_CONT_VARIABLE_DEPTH Percentage of the changing cutting depth when turning a contour You can select changing the cutting depth for stock removal and for removing residual material 20 20 variable cutting depth
184. ble Motor Module booksize e Motor connection X1 Encoder at X202 e Motor connection X2 Encoder at X203 Single Motor Module chassis X402 Power Module blocksize e CUA31 Encoder at X202 e CU310 Encoder at X100 or via TM31 at X501 Power Module chassis X402 Note If an additional encoder is connected to a Motor Module it is assigned to this drive as encoder 2 in the automatic configuration CU Active Single 320 Line Motor Module Module X103 CJ E Co X102 X202 X402 X202 X402 co Cas X101 X201 X401 X201 X401 J X100 X200 X400 X200 X400 VSM Figure A 3 Example Topology with VSM for booksize and chassis components Component VSM connection Active Line Module booksize X202 Active Line Module chassis X402 Power Modules The VSM is not supported Note The following applies for firmware versions lt V2 5 All of the nodes on a DRIVE CLIiQ line must have the same basic sampling time in p0115 0 Otherwise the VSM must be connected to a separate DRIVE CLiQ interface on the Control Unit e Only one final node should ever be connected to free DRIVE CLiQ ports of components within a DRIVE CLiQ line e g Motor Modules wired in series for example one Sensor Module or one Terminal Module without forwarding to additional components e f possible Terminal Modules and Sensor Modules of direct measuring systems should not be connected to th
185. body gt lt let name my_ var gt 4 lt let gt lt function name test return my var gt 2 3 4 lt function gt lt print text result d gt my var lt print gt Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 247 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 11 INCLUDE Description An XML description is included in this statement Programming Identifier INCLUDE Syntax lt include src file name gt Attributes src Identifier for the file name 8 5 12 LET Description Identifier for a local variable under the specified name The variable remains valid until the end of the higher level XML block Variables which are to be available globally should be created directly after the AGM tag Note Preassignment of a STRING variable Texts containing more than one line can be assigned to a string variable if the formatted text is transferred as a value If a line is to end with a line feed lt LF gt the characters n should be added at the end of the line Turning and Milling 248 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend Programming Identifier LET 8 5 Description of the script language Syntax lt let name lt Name gt gt preassignment lt let gt lt let name lt Name gt type lt Variable type gt gt preassignment lt let gt Attributes name Identifier for the variable name type Permissible identifiers for the variable type
186. cepted by the PLC as a valid maintenance task 1st warning h Time in hours after which the first warning is displayed this value must be less than that of the interval Number of warnings Number of warnings that are output by the PLC before the PLC sets the alarm bit for the last time after the interval has expired remaining time 0 Remaining time h Time until the interval expires in hours The dialog is opened with different contents depending on the access level e Access level 2 Configuration mode All columns are visible and can be edited except Remaining time e Access level 3 Standard mode Maintenance text and remaining time are visible but cannot be edited Note Acknowledgment of a maintenance task The access level for the acknowledgment of a maintenance task is determined by MD51235 MNS_ACCESS_RESET_SERV_PLANNER Default setting Access level 2 service Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 223 Service Planner 7 3 Functions on the HMI Configuration mode Maintenance completed Pos Maintenance task 1 MAINTENANCE TASK 1 32 MAINTENANCE TASK 32 task m System 3 Drive utiliz Figure 7 2 Configuration mode Maintenance tasks can be created changed and also deleted in this mode The maintenance tasks can also be acknowledged All columns are visible but cannot be edited Navigation between the columns is with lt Tab gt
187. ch NC channel then a name is assigned to each swivel data set No name needs to be specified if the swivel mounted tool carrier is not exchangeable TC_CARR34 n Name of the swivel data set TC_CARR35 n Name of rotary axis 1 TC_CARR36 n Name of rotary axis 2 Note The name of the swivel data set may only contain characters that are also permitted in the NC programming A Z 0 9 and _ The following identifiers should be chosen for the rotary axes names where possible e Rotary axis rotates around machine axis X gt A e Rotary axis rotates around machine axis Y gt B e Rotary axis rotates around machine axis Z gt C For automatic rotary axes the channel names of the corresponding NC rotary axes must be entered see TC_CARR37 n TENS and HUNDREDS position Automatic mode For manual manually adjustable and semi automatic rotary axes you can use any axis identifier up to six letters or numbers System variables TC_CARR37 n Display versions of the input masks for CYCLE800 In the Program gt Miscellaneous operating area the Swivel plane and Swivel tool softkeys are assigned to the swivel function The Swivel tool softkey is subdivided into Set milling tool and Align milling turning tool The Align milling turning tool softkeys are only displayed if the B axis kinematics turning technology function was activated refer to TEN THOUSANDS position in the
188. change with T and M6 in one block Note The sequence with block splitting should be adhered to as far as is possible If no block splitting is to be used when programming Txx and M206 in a single block make sure that the jobs for prepare tool change and execute tool change are output simultaneously at the interface and are acknowledged with a common end acknowledgment Sequence with M6 function replacement in the part program T TOOL NAME starts the prepare tool change job magazine positioning M6 M6 is used to call up the tool change subprogram L6 Minimum content of L6 M206 The tool change command stops block search wait for tool change acknowledgment Valid for default setting MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 1 M17 Subprogram is continued Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 317 Tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management Default setting for turning technology Two machine data items determine the function for turning technology e MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 Setting for a revolver magazine The new tool is changed immediately with the T function No additional M command is used No distinction is made between Prepare tool change and Execute tool change The function Manual tools is not enabled for this case e MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 81400F bit 16 1 Bit 16 is used to set the tool programming type T x with x as
189. chapter System overview Page 13 is chosen as an example The DRIVE CLiQ connections are connected as in the following diagram SMM SMM DRIVE CLiQ connection Spindle Motor 2 Encoder Encoder Motor 1 Motor 3 Encoder Encoder Figure 4 1 DRIVE CLiQ connections Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 67 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive See also Sequence 68 The following applies to the configuration of 4 axes The sequence of the DRIVE CLiQ connections corresponds to the sequence of the SINAMICS drive object numbers default Adjustments are only necessary if this setting does not fit with the sequence in the drive system Index Axes SINAMICS drive object Number Name 1 CU_I_3 3 1 2 SLM_3 3 2 4 MSP1 3 SERVO_3 3 3 1 MX1 4 SERVO _3 3 4 2 MY1 5 SERVO_3 3 5 3 MZ1 6 SERVO_3 3 6 Rules for wiring with DRIVE CLiQ Page 393 The sequence is divided into the following steps Create connection to control Step 1 Configure the drive Step 2 Configure the infeed Step 3 Assign the encoders Step 4 Assign the axes Finally Save the data These steps are described in more detail in the following sections Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBA0O Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 4 1 2 Example How to conf
190. charged again when the control is switched on during startup Turning and Milling 18 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Scope of delivery and requirements 1 5 Communication with the control 1 5 Communication with the control Creating the connection An Ethernet cable is needed to connect the control and PG PC The following Ethernet interfaces are available on the control Connection via X127 behind the flap on the front Cable type Crossed Ethernet cable At interface X127 the control is preset as a DHCP server delivering the IP address192 168 215 1 for a direct connection peer to peer connection Connection via X130 at the back Cable type Uncrossed Ethernet cable The interface X130 is the connection to the company network The IP address that the PG PC receives here as a DHCP client is determined by the DHCP server from the company network or fixed IP address is entered manually 1 5 1 How to communicate with the control using the Programming Tool Setting up the communications interface in the Programming Tool Turning and Milling Proceed as follows to set up the network connection in the Programming Tool 1 2 Start the Programming Tool In the navigation bar click the Communication icon or select View gt Communication from the menu In the left column under Communications parameters enter 192 168 215 1as the IP address for X127 Double click on the icon TCP IP
191. chine data must be set correctly Machine data Meaning MD20600 MC_MAX_PATH_JERK 0 4 Path dependent maximum jerk MD20602 MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL 0 4 Influence of path curvature on path dynamic response MD20603 MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK 0 4 Influence of path curvature on path jerk MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCELJ O 4 Maximum axis acceleration MD32310 MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTORJO 4 Overload factor for axial velocity jumps MD32431 MA_ MAX_AX_JERK O 4 Maximum axial jerk for path motion MD32432 MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM O 4 Maximum axial jerk at the block transition in continuous path mode MD32433 MA_SOFT_ACCEL_FACTORJO 4 Scaling of acceleration limitation for SOFT Machining type deselection When CYCLE832 is deselected the G groups are programmed for the settings during the program run time these settings are declared in MD2150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES If when deselecting CYCLE832 a tolerance has not been programmed the setting from the following channel specific setting data is used SD55445 SCS_MILL_TOL_VALUE_NORM Tolerance value for deselection Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 183 Configuring cycles 6 6 High Speed Settings Advanced Surface 6 6 2 How to adapt the High Speed Settings function CYCLE832 Adapting manufacturer cycle CUST_832 SPF In contrast to the settings G com
192. cific setting data SD55212 SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SET Cross technology function mask 6H Default setting Bit 0 Tool preselection active The next tool is prepared directly after a tool change Note For a turret the setting data must be set to 0 Bit 1 Automatic calculation of the thread depth for metric threads Bit 2 Take the thread diameter and thread depth from the table Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 123 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 6 4 Turning 6 4 1 Technology cycles for turning Thread cutting CYCLE99 During program runtime the master spindle can be the main spindle or the counterspindle Bit 3 must be set accordingly in the array index i channel axis number MD52207 MCS_AXIS_USAGE i Direction of rotation of the master spindle channel axis number Bit 3 Direction of rotation of the C axis normal or in the opposite direction Il m Normal M3 is C Opposite M3 is C Il Set setting data for e Contour grooving CYCLE930 e Contour turning CYCLE950 CYCLE952 e Stock removal corner CYCLE951 D55500 SCS_TURN_FIN_FEED_PERCENT Enter the finishing feedrate for complete machining roughing and finishing The percentage of the value corresponds to that entered under parameter F feedrate 100 100 finishing feedrate D55510 SCS_TURN_GROOVE_DWELL_TIME Dwell time which is necessary
193. cknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment block 24 block 23 block 22 block 21 block 20 block 19 block 18 block 17 DBB5003 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment block 32 block 31 block 30 block 29 block 28 block 27 block 26 block 25 Designation Meaning Acknowledgment The acknowledgment blocking bit assigned to task n block n If the bit is set via the HMI or from the PLC user program the task is not acknowledged even when the acknowledgment bit is set TRUE Acknowledgment of the task blocked FALSE Acknowledgment of the task permitted In this way it is possible for example to incorporate a sensor in the PLC user program which signals that the maintenance task has been performed and if required block the acknowledgment Turning and Milling 222 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Service Planner 7 3 Functions on the HMI 7 3 Functions on the HMI Dialog on the HMI The system provides the machine manufacturer with a configurable dialog in which 32 maintenance tasks can be displayed The opened table has columns with the following meaning Column Meaning Maintenance display Name of the maintenance task Interval in hours h Maximum time until the next maintenance in hours if this value 0 this data set is ac
194. ckup Create software backup NCK default data Drive default data PLC default data HMI default data Factory settings Delete OEM data PLC Stop Normal system startup Operating modes for startup Selection Normal startup Function The system carries out a normal startup Reload saved user data The system loads the stored user data Save data softkey from the system CompactFlash card Install software update backup An update is installed on the system CompactFlash card from the user CompactFlash card or USB FlashDrive Create software backup A backup of the system CompactFlash card is saved to the user CompactFlash card or USB FlashDrive NCK default data The system loads the Siemens NCK data default settings and deletes the retentive data on the PLC Drive default data The SINAMICS user data is deleted PLC default data PLC general reset and load default NOP PLC program 16 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Scope of delivery and requirements 7 4 Starting up the control Selection Function HMI default data The HMI user data is deleted Factory settings Choice between two cases No case 1 Yes case 2 e Case 1 The SINAMICS user data is deleted Siemens standard NCK data is loaded PLC general reset and load default NOP PLC program Save HMI user data e Case 2 As case 1 and additionally Deleti
195. claration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at http support automation siemens com under the Product Order No 15257461 or at the relevant branch office of DT MC Division of Siemens AG CompactFlash cards for users The SINUMERIK CNC supports the file systems FAT16 and FAT32 for CompactFlash cards You may need to format the memory card if you want to use a memory card from another device or if you want to ensure the compatibility of the memory card with the SINUMERIK However formatting the memory card will permanently delete all data on it Do not remove the memory card while it is being accessed This can lead to damage of the memory card and the SINUMERIK as well as the data on the memory card If you cannot use a memory card with the SINUMERIK it is probably because the memory card is not formatted for the control system e g Ext3 Linux file system the memory card file system is faulty or it is the wrong type of memory card Insert the memory card carefully with the correct orientation into the memory card slot take note of arrows etc This way you avoid mechanical damage to the memory card or the device Only use memory cards that have been approved by Siemens for use with SINUMERIK Even though the SINUMERIK keeps to the general industry standards for memory cards it is possible that memory cards from some manufacturers will not function perfectly in thi
196. commissioning of a swivel table ccccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeenaees 174 65 11 Manufacturer cycle CUST_800 SPPF sessen aranan a a A aa N S AAE T76 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Table of contents 6 6 High Speed Settings Advanced Surface cceccceceececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeseaeeseeeeeentens 182 6 6 1 Configuring the High Speed Settings function CYCLE832 00 ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 182 6 6 2 How to adapt the High Speed Settings function CYCLE832 esesesreeesrsserrreserrrssrrrrsrernss 184 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement FUNCHIONS cc eee eeeeee ee eete ee ee eene eee eaeee ee teaeeeeetaeeeettaeeeeeeee 186 6 7 1 General settings for MEASUTING ccceceeceseeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeaeeceeeeeeaecaaeeaeseesaeteateateaeseeeeeetees TOO 6 7 2 Manufacturer cycle CUST_MEACYC SPP 0 cccccceeeeeeereeeeeeneeeeeeineeeeteeeeetaeeeeetiaeeeeseeeeneae T189 6 7 3 Measuring in the JOG Mode xisctscsctr ts acd Gna ned i dae Guenindeeae TOO 6 7 4 JOG Measure workpiece during Milling cccccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeceaeeeeeeeeesesetsaetsaeesetetteeree TOT 6 7 5 JOG Measure tool duning Millin 2 cc ccccseetececedsdeceeeedeetecesensecesdeeceaesecaeeedentesedenseaensiecaettertesente TOO 6 7 6 JOG Measure tool during turing cisssisisscicliniacosvecstsenipissatclind cusiednniiesnisteteesssainseiuianesesa LOE 6
197. ction set the following machine data 1 MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE The current total frame work offsets is recalculated when switching over geometry axes selecting deselecting TRAORI MD11450 MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE Settings block search Bit 1 1 Activate PROG_EVENT SPF after block search This means that for a block search the rotary axes of the active swivel data set are pre positioned MD11602 MN_ASUP_START_MASK Ignore stop conditions for ASUB Bit 0 1 ASUB modal used for the swivel function in JOG 154 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles Turning and Milling 6 5 Swivel MD11604 MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL Priorities MN_ASUP_START 64 Corresponds to 100 used for the swivel function in JOG MD20196 MC_TOCARR_ROTAX_MODE Rotary axis mode for tool holders with orientation capability Bit O 1 Swivel data set with one rotary axis used for a rotary table with C axis Bit 1 1 Swivel data set with two rotary axes used with swivel default setting MD20360 MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Tool parameter setting Bit 10 1 Orientation vector is retained for TO and DO no tool Used for machine kinematics types T and M See also Parameter TC_CARR34 MD21186 MC_TOCARR_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR Offset of the rotary axes for a tool holder with
198. cuitry for a CU with line contactor sssseessrnnsennaensnnaneennnrannnneennannnnanennnnanannannnn ae OF 4 2 5 CONMECKMG ThE PrODSS vascseivates cceivadceybusawcck vince byvece vusdeens a a aN ewer Yr setting NCK machine data vis ii sccesestievesseessiecissevesedederetdsaccved a RENARE KEENE A KATERN NANESENE E 101 5 1 Classification of machine dala sessossssis kridi sanea rar aAA EE SANE KAA ERa ia EANA A a 101 5 2 Processing part programs from external CNC systemS esseesesrssesrresrrreserrssrrrssrrrssrrrnssnt 104 CONPIQUIING CYCIOS sirsiran heeisdis coe deci essed siilatitesauneeidisunhs etndindbausatieedictieeasieioebiidas ini Sens REEN 105 6 1 Settings for activating CYCIOS ccciiscccdesssecceussaccecevesaseceesastceesiadecensvlecevesiuceeussnecesiadecevandecehccceesese 105 6 1 1 How to adapt the manufacturer CYCIOS ccccccceccececeeeceeeeceseeeeeeaeeeeeseeseeseeseaesaeeaeseeseeeeenteees 109 6 1 2 Standard cycle PROG_EVENT SPF cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeesenaeeeeeeaas TTO 6 1 3 Setting the simulation and simultaneous recording Option sssssseesssissesrresssrrsserresrrrssrerns TIT 6 2 DrMr EA Ta A Aaaa 113 6 2 1 Technology cycles for milling 2 cccccccececsecceessesecceetsneecesvenscaaecsaveuctenveusvenedecanendecatensvecutnaececetecanensy TS 6 2 2 ShopT urn Drilling centered 2c0hcvevieeiatisenddnte seats adi ncudinier dtc AE 115 6 3 Milgin E reer ede ede het RR R 116
199. current total frame work offsets is recalculated when switching over geometry axes selecting and deselecting TRACYL MD24040 MC_FRAME_ADAPT_MODE Adapting the active frames 7H Default setting BitO 1 Rotations in active frames that rotate coordinate axes for which there are no geometry axes are deleted from the active frames Bit1 1 Shearing angles in the active frames are made orthogonal Bit2 1 Scaling factors of all geometry axes in the active frames are set to 1 Turning and Milling 130 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD28082 MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK Bit 6 1 Configuration of channel specific system frames which are included in the channel calculation When setting up the functions you can take the following channel specific machine data into account MD24300 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3 Cylinder surface transformation main spindle Transformation 3 512 Without groove side offset without Y axis 513 With groove side offset with Y axis 514 With groove side offset and Y offset MD24400 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4 Cylinder surface transformation counterspindle Transformation 4 512 Without groove side offset without Y axis 513 With groove side offset with Y axis 514 With groove side offset and Y offset Note You must also set up further machine data for the indivi
200. d the NCK part of this documentation is also valid for the SINUMERIK 828D The description of the PLC functions and the communication between NC and PLC in this documentation is not valid for the SINUMERIK 828D e The settings of the tool management user interface are described in gt Commissioning Manual Basesoftware and HMI sl IM9 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 291 Tool management 9 1 Fundamentals 9 1 1 Structure of the tool management Function structure The software components of the control have the following tasks in the tool management PLC user program HMI Tool data display input output Magazine data display input output Load Unload relocation dialog NCK The tool management administrates the magazine locations These locations might be empty loaded with tools or assigned to oversized tools in adjacent locations Empty locations can be loaded with other tools The tool management provides the machine manufacturer with optimized management of tools and magazine locations Magazine management provides extended functions such as load unload or position tools It also includes searches for tools magazine locations and search strategies for replacement tools For the tool monitoring functions while the active monitoring is running tools are disabled and no longer used To continue machining an equivalent tool duplo tool that is not disabled is used if
201. d Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Commissioning the PLC 3 Creating a PLC program The PLC is commissioned with the Programming Tool This is a Windows program and is installed on a PC A typical Windows easy to use online help is available If the Programming Tool is called without specifying an existing project a new project is implicitly created with the name Project1 This project can be used immediately to create the PLC user program and then saved under an arbitrary name and loaded to the control Existing projects can be opened in the usual Windows manner See also A detailed description on the operation of the Programming Tool the properties and the programming of the PLC as well as further useful functions from the PLC can be found in Function Manual Basic Functions PG Chapter PLC for SINUMERIK 828D P4 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 63 Commissioning the PLC 3 1 Activating O modules 3 1 Activating I O modules General machine data I O modules machine control panel and PN bus coupler are assigned fixed addresses for the input and output image of the PLC See table below The machine data contains two fields to deactivate the update of the input and output image of the PLC Machine data Value range 12986 i MN_PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_IN 0sis7 Input addresses 12987 i MN_PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_O 0sis7 Output addresses UT
202. d correction table SD54689 SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER Activate pre configured compensation tables for several tool probe models customer specific 0 No data default setting 1 TT130 Heidenhain 2 TS27R Renishaw Correction values for users Turning and Milling For the general setting data SD54691 SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_OFFSET 2 the following settings apply SD54695 to SD54700 Correction values for radius See the subsequent general measurement setting data D54705 to SD54710 Correction values for length measurement Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 211 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54695 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD i D54705 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN I Radius measurement Length measurement 0 1st radius 2nd radius 3rd radius 4th radius SD54696 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD2 i SD54706 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN2 i Radius measurement Length measurement 1st peripheral speed Correction value for 1st radius length measurement Correction value for 2nd radius length measurement Correction value for 3rd radius length measurement Correction value for 4th radius length measurement SD54697 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD3j i D54707 SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN3 i Radius measurement
203. d dual gripper MAG_CONF_MPP 354 9 8 2 Flow chart TOO CHANGE ic c scccccscceectesaccdece te baaacecttaeecteeaaciveh n aO 9 8 3 Example Acknowledgment steps milling MaChiNE ceceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeteees 369 9 8 4 Example Tool change cycle for milling MACHING ececeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesenaeeeeneaas 371 10 Senes start Upiss issiteee crete ceva AEON eels ah easter A anna ee 373 10 1 Series start up and Archiving isian A 374 10 2 How to create and read in a series Start Up archive cececeecececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeteees 376 10 3 Example Data archiving Easy Archive use case 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeetaeeeeetaeeeetnaeeeereas 378 10 4 Parameterizing the V 24 interface 22 ccceccecceececeecenceeeneeceeeecaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeceeseaesesseceneecseanteenneees 380 A References see isciectecs deveestseievsdecenescxeeyteselds sje veeevcuaxevsteniaey EG Ra saaa aaran aaea aa ara aena aaa aa E akataa 383 A 1 List of language codes used for file names eeeeeceeeee ene eeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeenaaes 383 A 2 List of the alarm number ranges 22660cccseecesecseeeeeesseeeeeseceeeedesdeeceteceeeedeadadensenadensaaceeeneaseesneaeens 384 A 3 LiSt Of the color CODES insusiri a Aaa sevaadhadend cad euesae RUER 385 A 4 Directory structure on the CompactFlash Card ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeceeee
204. d is adopted by the system Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO 33 Settings on the HMI 2 3 Available system languages 2 3 Available system languages System languages In the basic configuration the SINUMERIK 828D is delivered with the following system languages 34 German English French Italian Spanish Portuguese Brazil Chinese simplified Chinese traditional Korean All system languages are installed in the SINUMERIK 828D as delivered so that a change of language can be carried out directly via the user interface without having to download system language data Note Additional languages No CNC option needs to be ordered for the installation of additional languages not included in the scope of delivery The language files can be ordered on the DVD Additional Languages for SINUMERIK Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 4 How to set the date and time 2 4 How to set the date and time Requirement Changes can only be made with the appropriate access authorization as of User and higher Setting the date and time Procedure 1 Select the Start up operating area 2 Press the HMI softkey 3 Press the Date Time softkey The Date Time window opens 4 Select the required formats for the date and time in the Format field 5 Confirm the entry with the OK softkey The new da
205. data and generates warning and alarm messages in numeric form either with or without Power OFF status The HMI alarm handler converts these messages with the appropriate PLC alarm text file oem_alarm_plc_ lt Ing gt ts to a message for the operator which is displayed on the HMI lt Ing gt currently set language and which can be logged if required Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 215 Service Planner Maintenance dialog Alarm handler Maintenance text file Maintenance text 1 32 Wartungtext Oebeh iter f len 04 10 2007 PLC alarm text file Warning and Programming Tool or alarm messages 1 32 XML file olololololololo o o ololo olo olo olol5 INPUT DB1800 DBX4000 INPUT OUTPUT Acknowledgments DB 9903 Actual data DB 9904 Maintenance tasks 1 32 Start data Maintenance interval 1 32 Remaining time 1 32 Number of warnings 1 32 Number of output Time of 1st warning 1 32 warnings alarms 1 32 OUTPUT DB1800 DBX3000 Warnings alarms Maintenance tasks 1 32 INPUT DB1800 DBX2000 Deactivations Maintenance tasks 1 32 Figure 7 1 Service Planner Configuration Turning and Milling 216 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Service Planner 7 1 PLC user program 7 1 PLC user program PLC user program The PLC user program operates the user interface Th
206. de to the data of this interface This signal is reset by the PLC firmware after the acknowledgment has been transmitted to the tool management In certain circumstances resetting may take place after several PLC cycles There are further advantages if the tool management is also informed of intermediate positions e Information about intermediate positions If the intermediate tool positions are known in the tool management the allocation of the buffer magazine may be queried This makes powering up easier after switching off and on again or after canceling a command e g via reset If the tool currently being changed is needed again immediately it can be loaded back into the spindle from a buffer location without loading it into the magazine first e Information about magazine positions If the tool management knows at which magazine location there is a transfer point changing point for the spindle loading point it can determine the shortest paths in the magazine for finding an empty location or for selecting a new tool During orders the tool management can usually recognize the magazine position from intermediate acknowledgments e g tool transfer between the real magazine and the buffer or from the end acknowledgment e g magazine positioning order complete If the magazine is positioned by the PLC user program itself e g by means of HMI or machine keys without a tool management order this must be communicated to the tool m
207. der and the magazine After the magazine configuration program has finished running restart the NC using NCK reset Turning and Milling 342 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management See also 9 7 Application example for turning machine You will find a precise description of the parameters used in the Tool Management Function Manual of SINUMERIK 840D sl Example MAG_CONF_MPF Turning and Milling 1 Plant configuration 1 revolver magazine with 8 locations can be set up in N40 1 loading point 3 buffer locations can be set up in N50 assignments from N540 2 Part program MAG CONF MPF N10 def int NUM _MAG MAG TYPE LOCATIONS PLACE NUM BUFFER NUM LOAD PLACE SEARCH r N20 NUM MAG 1 Number of the magazine N30 MAG TYPE 3 Magazine type 1 chain 3 revolver 5 box magazine N40 LOCATIONS 8 Number of magazine locations N50 NUM BUFFER 1 Number of buffers spindle gripper N60 NUM_LOAD 1 Number of loading points N70 PLACE SEARCH 257 Type of search strategy 7 257 Bit13 0 no exchange of the old tool on the location of the new tool 7Setting for pickup magazine 7 12289 Bit13 1 exchange old tool on the location of the new tool Setting for chain magazine N80 N90 7Check parameters 00 STOPRE 10 if NUM_MAG 0 or LOCATIONS 0 20 Errl STOPRE 30 MSG Wrong Parameter gt Cancel 40 G04 F4 50 STOPRE 60 MO 70 GOTOB E
208. ding configurations The configurations created are transferred to the manufacturer directory of the control with the script and text file Additionally the corresponding PLC user program should be loaded Programming the equipment Communication between the operator component and the PLC takes place in the PLC user program via data block DB9905 in which 128 words are reserved for the device management PLC words are assigned beginning with Device 1 Data block Device designation DB9905 DBBO DB9905 DBW1 Device 1 DB9905 DBB4 DB9905 DBW2 Device 2 DB9905 DBB8 DB9905 DBW3 Device 3 DB9905 DBB12 DB9905 DBW4 Device 4 etc Four bytes with the following meanings are used for each device Byte Bit Description 0 0 Device has been started up HMI acknowledgment 1 Device is to be activated HMI request 2 Device is to be deactivated HMI request 3 7 Reserved 1 0 7 Reserved 2 0 Device is active PLC acknowledgment 1 Device has an error 2 7 Reserved 3 0 7 Unique identifier for the device Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 233 Easy Extend 8 2 Configuration in the PLC user program General sequence The machine manufacturer must execute the following steps to make the required data available 1 Creating a PLC user program which activates the device during activation on the PLC 2 Commissioning of the standard
209. dual transformations Cylinder surface transformation without groove side offset MD24300 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3 Definition of the 3rd transformation in the channel 512 TRACYL main spindle MD24310 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 i Axis assignment for transformation 3 0 1 Perpendicular to the rotary axis XC 1 3 Rotary axis main spindle C1 2 2 Parallel to rotary axis ZC MD24320 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3 I Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 3 0 1 1st channel axis X Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 131 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD24320 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_3 i 1 3 2nd channel axis Y 2 2 3rd channel axis Z MD24800 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Offset of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation 0 MD24805 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 Axial offset of the rotary axis is taken into account during TRACYL 2 MD24810 MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Sign of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation 1 MD24820 MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_ i Vector of the base tool for the 1st TRACYL transformation 0 0 Index i assumes values 0 1 2 for the 1st 2nd and 3rd geometry axis 1 0 Programmed tool length offsets are added to the base tool 2 0 Cylinder surface transformation with groove side offset
210. e The colors of the tabular overviews of alarms and messages in the Diagnostics operating area are permanently set and cannot be changed Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 6 Contiguring user alarms Copy the following files into the oem user or addon branch e Alarm attribute file siemens sinumerik hmi cfg oem_slaedatabase xml To be able to add further colors for alarms and messages at a later point use the alarm attribute file already available or extend other alarm attribute files e Configuration file siemens sinumerik hmi cfg oem_slaesvcconf xml In the configuration file notify the Alarm amp Event Service of the new alarm attribute file Alarm colors The following attributes for colors can be configured for each alarm number Identifier lt Attribut AtttName gt Meaning TEXTCOLOR Font color of the alarm message text TEXTBACKGROUNDCOLOR Background color of the alarm message text NUMBERCOLOR Font color of the alarm number NUMBERBACKGROUNDCOLOR Background color of the alarm number 2 6 6 How to configure colors for user alarms General procedure The sequence includes the following steps e Create alarm attribute file e Define alarm colors e Create configuration file e Trigger restart of the HMI Create alarm attribute file Procedure 1 Copy the alarm attribute file oem_slaedatabase xml as a template from the directory siemens s
211. e CUST_MEACYC SPF Page 189 Generating manufacturer cycles General procedure CUST_TECHCYC SPF Manufacturer cycle for the adaptation of technology cycles 1 Select the Start up operating area 2 Press the System data softkey 3 Open the following directory NC data Cycles Standard cycles 4 Select the manufacturer cycles CUST_ SPF 5 Press the Copy softkey 6 Open the following directory NC data Cycles Manufacturer cycles 7 Press the Paste softkey ShopTurn Setting up cycles for turning Page 139 The cycles copied to the Manufacturer cycles directory can be modified See also Standard cycle PROG_EVENT SPF Page 110 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 109 Configuring cycles 6 7 Settings for activating cycles 6 1 2 Standard cycle PROG_EVENT SPF Rules for PROG_EVENT PROG_EVENT SPF is a standard cycle and cannot be changed not accessible e Storage of aPROG_EVENT SPF cycle that you have written under manufacturer of user cycles is not switched active e Manufacturer specific prog_events must be reproduced by the following cycles which when available are automatically called by the PROG_EVENT CYCPE1MA SPF is called at the start of the internal prog_event CYCPE_MA SPF is called at the end of the internal prog_event Remark CYCPE_MA SPF should preferably be used e Block search Default setting The corr
212. e FALSE the FOR loop is ended 3 The following statements are executed 4 The expression continuation INCREMENT is analyzed 5 Proceed with Step 2 for initialization test continuation statements Syntax lt FOR gt lt INIT gt lt INIT gt lt CONDITION gt lt CONDITION gt lt INCREMENT gt lt INCREMENT gt Statements lt FOR gt BREAK Conditional cancellation of a loop WHILE The WHILE loop is used to execute a sequence of statements repeatedly while a condition is met This condition is tested before the sequence of statements is executed while test statements Syntax lt WHILE gt lt CONDITION gt lt CONDITION gt Statements lt WHILE gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 269 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Identifier lt tag gt Meaning DO_WHILE The DO WHILE loop comprises a block of statements and a condition The code within the statement block is executed first then the condition is analyzed If the condition is true the function executes the code section again This is continuously repeated until the condition is false do Statements while test Syntax lt DO_WHILE gt Statements lt CONDITION gt lt CONDITION gt lt DO_WHILE gt SWITCH The SWITCH statement describes a multiple choice A term is evaluated once and compared with a number of constants If the term
213. e DRIVE CLiQ line of Motor Modules but rather to free DRIVE CLiQ ports of the Control Unit Turning and Milling 396 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 List of abbreviations B 1 Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning Explanation ALM Active Line Module ASCII American Standard Code for Information American coding standard for the exchange of Interchange information AUTO Automatic operating mode BAG Mode group BERO Proximity limit switch with feedback oscillator BICO Binector Connector Interconnection technology for the drive CEC Cross Error Compensation CNC Computerized Numerical Control Computerized numerical control DB Data Block in the PLC DBB Data Block Byte in the PLC DBW Data Block Word in the PLC DBX Data Block Bit in the PLC DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Dynamic Data Exchange DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm DO Drive object Drive Object DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Dynamic memory block DRF Differential Resolver Function Differential resolver function handwheel DRY DRY run DRY run feedrate ESR Extended Stop and Retract FIFO First In First Out Method of storing and retrieving data in a memory GUD Global User Data Global user data Hardware Hardware HD Hard Disk Hard disk HMI Human Machine Interface Controller user interface IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor INC Increment Increment INI
214. e Integer INT e Double DOUBLE e Float FLOAT e String STRING Default If no type is defined the system creates an integer variable lt LET name VAR1 type INT gt A variable can be initialized with a value lt LET name VAR1 type INT gt 10 lt LET gt If values comprising NCK or PLC variables are saved in a local variable the assignment operation automatically adapts the format to that of the variables which have been loaded permanent If the attribute is set to TRUE the variable value is saved permanently This attribute only applies to global variables Syntax lt let name lt Name gt type lt Variable type gt permanent TRUE gt preassignment lt let gt Example lt LET name text type string gt F4000 G94 n G1 X20 n Z50 n M2 n lt LET gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 249 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 13 MSGBOX Description The identifier opens a message window whose return value can be used for branching If a text reference is used the message window displays the text which is saved for the identifier Programming Identifier MSGBOX Syntax lt MSGBOxX text lt Text gt caption lt Title gt retvalue lt Variable gt type lt Acknowledgment gt gt lt MSGBOxX text lt Text gt caption lt Text reference gt retvalue lt Variable gt type lt Acknowledgment gt gt Attribu
215. e acknowledgment 321 322 IP address 66 ISO Dialect 104 J Job status 310 K Kinematics Check list 160_ Swivel data set 161 with Hirth tooth system 156 L Language code 383 License 37 391 License key 37 392 License management 391 License number 391 Loading magazine 294 Location type 332_ M Machine data 101 Effectiveness 103 Unit 102 Machining type G group 59 183 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Index Magazine 293 327_ Configuration 351_ Magazine list 294 Manual tools 296 MD10712 NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB 104 MD10715 0 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE 313 MD10716 0 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 313 MD10717 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 318 MD10880 MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE 104 MD12986 PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_IN 64 MD12987 PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_OUT 64 MD14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM 41 MD17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT _TOOLS 313 MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER 313 MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 313 MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 314 MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 295 313 MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_MCODE 313 MD22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE 296 337 338 MD51235 ACCESS_RESET_SERV_PLANNER 223 MD52270 TM_FUNCTION_MASK 315_ Measure tool In AUTO mode during turning 213 In JOG mode during turning 197_ when milling 205 Measure workpiece AUTO settings 200_ In AUTO mode during milling 202_ In JOG mode during milling 191
216. e data classes selected under Selection in the archive 5 Mark the control component s for the archive Make use of the option to enter a comment and the creator of the archive Press the Generate archive softkey The Generate Archive Select Storage Location window opens Select a directory or press the New directory softkey to create a new subdirectory The New Directory window opens Enter a name and confirm with OK The directory is created subordinate to the selected folder The Generate Archive Name window opens 10 Enter a name and confirm with OK An archive file is created in the chosen directory Read in Series start up Requirement The access level User is necessary for reading in an archive Procedure 1 2 Select the Start up operating area Press the menu forward key and then the Series start up softkey The Series Start up window opens Select the option Read in series start up with the lt SELECT gt key and confirm with OK The Select Start up Archive window opens 4 Select the archive and confirm with OK 5 To read in the archive confirm the prompt with OK Turning and Milling The Read In Archive window opens and a progress message box appears for the read in process Press the Cancel softkey to cancel the read in process Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 377 Series start up 10 3 Example Data arc
217. e footer No effect th Table header cell The standard attributes for table cells are supported thead Table header This is used to print tables that extend over several pages title Document title tr Table row Supported attributes bgcolor RRGGBB tt Typewrite font u Underlined ul Unordered list The standard attributes for lists are supported var Variable Same effect as tag tt The following attributes are supported by the tags div dl dt h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 p align left right center justify dir ltr rtl Standard attributes for lists The following attributes are supported by tags ol and ul type 1 a A square disc circle Standard attributes for tables The following attributes are supported by tags td and th Turning and Milling width absolute relative no value bgcolor RRGGBB colspan rowspan align left right center justify valign top middle bottom Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 55 Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help CSS properties The following table includes the supported CSS functional scope middle top bottom Property Values Description background color lt color gt Background color for elements background image lt uri gt Background image for elements color lt color gt Foreground color for text text indent lt length gt px Indent the first line of a paragraph in pixels
218. e functions for monitoring tools tool life and workpiece count are enabled Bit 2 OEM functions active Bit 3 Adjacent location consideration active Bit 14 Tool and offset selection according to the settings in MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK Bit 23 With offset selection no synchronization with main run 314 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management Bit 24 MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 1 An asynchronous transfer which moves a tool to a location reserved for another tool with reserved for tool from buffer is possible This location reservation is then removed before the movement is executed Reserved for new tool to be loaded bit value H8 remains effective Additionally only for T version Bit 16 1 T location number is active If a locked tool is at the programmed location the location of a replacement tool if available is output as job from the tool management when the option Spare tools for tool management option is set Channel MD52270 MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK Settings SD52270 MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK Tool management function mask Bit 0 Creating tool at the magazine location is not permitted Tools can only be created outside of the magazine Bit 1 Load unload lock if the machine is not in th
219. e in mm min in the working plane for active collision monitoring 1000 Default setting MD51758 MNS_J_MEA_COLL_MONIT_POS_FEED Position feedrate in mm min in the infeed axis for active collision monitoring 1000 Default setting Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 191 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions MD51770 MNS_J_MEA_CAL_RING_DIAM i Pre assignment of the calibration diameter in mm specifically for the calibration data sets 1 Default setting MD51772 MNS_J_MEA_CAL_HEIGHT_FEEDAX I Default setting of the calibration height in mm in the infeed axis specifically for the calibration data sets 99999 Default setting General setting data D54798 SNS_J_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_PIECE Settings of the input masks for measuring in JOG Bit 0 n a Bit 1 n a Bit 2 1 Activates measurements with an electronic probe Bit 3 1 Selects the probe calibration data field enable Bit 4 n a Bit 5 n a Bit 6 1 Selects WO in the base reference SETFRAME enable Bit 7 1 Selects WO in the channel specific basic frames enable Bit 8 1 Selects WO in the global basic frame enable Bit 9 1 Selects WO in adjustable frames enable default setting Channel specific setting data D55770 SCS_J_MEA_SET_COUPL_SP_COORD Behavior of the probe carrier spindle 0 C
220. e is now empty the old tool is outside the magazine Next step Synchronous acknowledgment new tool to gripper 1 Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 3 0 1 9998 2 New tool to gripper 1 DB9900 DBW16 Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step for the Transfer step for the Status ment step new tool old tool XXX DB4200 DBXx x 3 0 105 The job is unchanged Next step Synchronous acknowledgment new tool from gripper 1 to spindle Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 4 9998 2 9998 1 New tool from gripper 1 to spindle DB9900 DBW24 Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step for the Transfer step for the Status ment step new tool old tool XXX DB4200 DBXx x 4 0 105 This completes the tool movement End acknowledgment Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step for the Transfer step for the Status ment step new tool old tool XXX DB4200 DBXx x 0 0 1 Turning and Milling 340 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 6 Example Change manual tools The step New tool from gripper 1 to spindle can be omitted and replaced by a total acknowledgment This also informs the tool management that all tools are in their target positions Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transf
221. e machine If a complete archive from the prototype machine is now transferred to the affected machine the individual customized data of this machine is overwritten by the individual customized data of the prototype machine Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Series start up 10 3 Example Data archiving Easy Archive use case For the SINUMERIK 828D the machine manufacturer s customized data to which no individual change has been made may be archived separately If this archive is transferred to the affected machine it is ensured that the individual customized data and the end user data are retained So the machine manufacturer s update process is simplified considerably Advantages The advantage of the Easy Archive is that archive creation occurs directly at the SINUMERIK 828D user interface So no separate PC is needed for the archive By separating the system data from the customized and user data the SINUMERIK 828D system updates can be completely carried out by the OEMs without changes to the customized data A system update can be carried out by the end user themselves in a short time Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 379 Series start up 10 4 Parameterizing the V 24 interface 10 4 Parameterizing the V 24 interface Requirement To activate the V 24 interface the following must be entered File slpmconfig ini V24 v24Settings 1
222. e relevant machine data Identifier for identifying the temporary memory Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Example lt DATA_LIST action read id lt name gt gt nck channel parameter r 2 nck channel parameter r 3 nck channel parameter r 4 MN_USER_DATA_ INT 0 lt DATA LIST gt lt DATA LIST action write id lt name gt gt 8 5 7 DRIVE_VERSION Description Identifier for the drive version The version number is copied to the Sdriveversion variable which is valid within the DEVICE identifier Further details are described in Chapter Addressing the parameters Page 264 Programming Identifier DRIVE_VERSION Syntax Attributes Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 243 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 8 FILE Description The identifier enables the reading in or creation of standard or data class archives e Reading in an archive The file name of the archive must be specified for reading in an archive e Creating an archive If the attribute create true is specified the function creates a standard archive arc under the specified name and stores the file in the dvm archives directory If the attribute class is also used the system also creates a data class archive The attributes class and group define the content
223. e reset state Tools can only be loaded unloaded when the relevant channel is in the reset state Bit 2 Load unload lock for EMERGENCY STOP Tools can only be loaded unloaded when EMERGENCY STOP is not active Bit 3 Tool in out of spindle load unload locked Tools cannot be loaded to or unloaded from the spindle Bit 4 Loading is performed directly into the spindle Tools are only loaded directly into the spindle Bit 5 Bit 6 Reserved Reserved Bit 7 Create tool using the T number The T number of the tool must be entered when creating a tool Bit 8 Hide tool relocation The Relocate tool function is hidden in the user interface Bit 9 Hide magazine positioning The Position magazine function is hidden in the user interface Bit 10 Reactivate tool with magazine positioning Before Reactivate the tool is positioned at the loading point Bit 11 Reactivate tool in all monitoring types When reactivating a tool all the monitoring types for this tool enabled in the NC are reactivated l e also the monitoring types that are not set for the relevant tool but are only in the background Bit 12 Hide reactivating tool The Reactivate tool function is hidden in the user interface Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 315 Tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management Settings on the HMI
224. e same loading point 298 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Interface signal Meaning xx Load location DB40xx DBX0 0 DBX 3 6 PLC user program Acknowledgments for loading unloading relocating or positioning the magazine DB40xx DBX9 0 PLC user program Resetting the message Acknowledgment error DB41xx DBX100 1 and the diagnostic information in the feedback interface DB41xx DBX0 0 Tool management Job for loading unloading relocating or positioning the magazine DB41xx DBB1 Tool management Job specification DB41xx DBW 6 DBW34 Job description DB41xx DBX100 0 Positive feedback Acknowledgment status acknowledgment OK 1 PLC cycle pending DB41xx DBX100 1 Negative feedback Acknowledgment status acknowledgment error static pending DB41xx DBB104 Tool management Feedback error status DB41xx DBX108 0 Map of acknowledgments for load unload relocate or position DB41xx DBX111 6 magazine This map belongs to the positive or negative feedback and remains valid for the same time DB41xx DBW124 DBW130 Job status Jobs DB4100 41xx Signals from tool management r xx Load location Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBBO Job DBB1 Job from NC Positioning Relocating Unloading Loading program DBB2 Reserved DBB3 Reserved DBB4 Re
225. e value is set to zero the parser aborts the function processing Example lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt DOCTYPE AGM gt lt AGM gt Identifier for Easy Extend lt DEVICE gt lt NAME gt Device 1 lt NAME gt Identifier for the device lt START_UP gt Identifier for commissioning the device lt START_UP gt lt SET_ACTIVE gt Identifier for activating the device lt SET_ACTIVE gt lt SET_INACTIVE gt Identifier for deactivating the device lt SET_INACTIVE gt lt TEST gt Identifier for testing the device lt TEST gt lt DEVICE gt lt AGM gt Turning and Milling 240 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 3 CONTROL_RESET Description Programming This identifier allows one or more control components to be restarted Execution of the script is only continued when the control has resumed cyclic operation Identifier CONTROL_RESET Syntax lt CONTROL_RESET resetnc TRUE gt Attributes resetnc true The NC component is restarted resetdrive true The drive components are restarted 8 5 4 DATA Description Programming Identifier for access to NCK PLC and drive data Further details are described in Chapter Addressing the parameters Page 264 Identifier DATA Syntax lt data name lt Address gt gt value lt data gt Attributes name Identifier for the variable name 8 5 5
226. e_3 se value lt encoder 1 SERVO_3 3 3 Encoder_17 Axis Measuring system lt none gt Actual value lt encoder2 SERYO_3 3 3 Encoder_20 Aris system Profibus link Oo Change Drive number DR1 4100 Value not yet active Assign ation _ Sets tions Figure 4 21 Assigning axis Note Both the following actions are each carried out twice so the softkeys Change and Accept must be pressed repeatedly 2 Press the Change softkey to assign an axis to DO number 2 3 From the selection list choose MSP1 and press the Accept softkey 4 An NCK Power On Reset is needed to make the assignment effective in the system Turning and Milling 84 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBA0O Commissioning the drive 5 Press the Cancel softkey to assign the other axes first Start up CHAN1 A Channel reset 206400 4 DPOO03 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Axis assignment Infeed Line supply data identification selected active SERVO_3 3 3 Motor_Module_3 Actual value lt encoder 1 SERVO_3 3 3 Encodet_17 gt Profibus link LC Change Drive number DR1 4100 Value not yet active A Communication to PLC failed Figure 4 22 i Assigning axis Spindle ctual value lt encoder 2 SERY0_3 3 3 Encoder_20 Measuring system 4 1 Configuring the drive 6 Select the next module with t
227. eactor proportional computing power in a gt Control Unit switching devices etc is called gt Basic infeed gt Smart infeed and gt Active infeed Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 405 Glossary Motor Motor encoder Motor Module Parameter Sensor Module Servo control 406 For the electric motors that can be driven by gt SINAMICS a basic distinction is made between rotary and linear motors with regard to their direction of motion and between synchronous and induction motors with regard to their electromagnetic operating principle For SINAMICS the motors are connected to a gt Motor Module See gt Synchronous motor gt Induction motor gt Motor encoder gt External encoder An gt Encoder integrated in the motor or attached to the motor e g gt Resolver gt Incremental encoder TTL HTL or gt Incremental encoder sin cos 1 Vpp The encoder is used for detecting the motor speed In the case of synchronous motors also for detection of the rotor position angle the commutation angle for the motor currents For drives without an additional gt Direct position measuring system it is also used as a gt Position encoder for position control In addition to the motor encoders there are gt External encoders for gt Direct position sensing A motor module is a power unit DC AC inverter that provides the power supply for the motor s connected to it Power is supplied
228. ecitic online help 2 7 4 Example How to create an OEM specific help Requirements Create the following files e Configuration file slhlp xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt lt DOCTYPE CONFIGURATION gt lt CONFIGURATION gt lt OnlineHelpFiles gt lt hmi_myhelp gt lt EntriesFile value hmi_myhelp xml type QString gt lt DisableIndex value false type bool gt lt hmi_myhelp gt lt OnlineHelpFiles gt lt CONFIGURATION gt e Definition of the help book hmi_myhelp xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt HMI_SL_HELP language en US gt lt BOOK ref index html title Easy Help helpdir hmi_myhelp gt lt ENTRY ref chapter 1 html title Chapter 1 gt lt INDEX_ENTRY ref chapter 1 html title Keyword 1 gt lt INDEX_ENTRY ref chapter 1 html title Keyword 2 gt lt ENTRY gt lt ENTRY ref chapter 2 html title Chapter 2 gt lt z DEX ENTRY ref chapter 2 html title Keyword 2 gt lt ENTRY gt lt ENTRY ref chapter 3 html title Chapter 3 gt lt INDEX_ENTRY ref chapter 3 html title Keyword 3 gt lt ENTRY ref chapter 31 html title Chapter 3 1 gt lt INDEX_ENTRY ref chapter 31 html title test Chapter 3 1 gt lt ENTRY lt ENTRY ref chapter 32 html title Chapter 3 2 gt lt INDEX_ENTRY ref chapter 32 html title test Chapter 3 2 gt lt ENTRY lt ENTRY gt
229. ection of tool change spindle direction of rotation speed swivel axes is performed by the internal PROG_EVENT the necessary machine data is appropriately preset The manufacturer does not have to use a CYCPE_MA SPF for the actions described above Special features of the block search in conjunction with PROG_EVENT Machine data Bit MD11450 MD52212 MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Note If gt _PROG_EVENT 5 is used in the cycpe_ma no REPOSA may be programmed as this is already present in the prog_event otherwise an error occurs for SSL with calculation Turning and Milling 110 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 1 Settings for activating cycles 6 1 3 Setting the simulation and simultaneous recording option Machining technologies Milling technology e Swivel head change Milling on turning machines e Milling with geometry axes TRANSMIT TRACYL TRAANG Turning technology e Conventional turning with two geometry axes e Three spindles Main spindle counterspindle tool spindle e Counterspindle slides tailstock as NC axis e B axis Aligning turning tools in the tool spindle Options E E Software option For the Simultaneous recording function you require the option Simultaneous recording real time simulation Software option You require the following option for further simulation settings 3D simulatio
230. eduction 50 Default setting of the percentage reduction of the rapid traverse velocity for internal cycle intermediate positioning without collision monitoring The setting of the channel specific setting data SD55600 SCS_MEA_COLLISION_MONITORING must be 0 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 201 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions D55631 SCS_MEA_FEED_PLANE_VALUE Feedrate of the intermediate positioning in the working plane with active collision monitoring 1000 Default setting D55632 SCS_MEA_FEED_FEEDAX_VALUE Feedrate of the intermediate positioning in the infeed axis with active collision monitoring 1000 Default setting D55633 SCS_MEA_FEED_MEASURE Fast measuring feedrate 900 Default setting 6 7 9 AUTO Measure workpiece during milling Settings Measuring in the Program operating area can be adapted corresponding to the specific requirements using the channel specific setting data SD54660 SNS_MEA_PROBE_BALL_RAD_IN_TOA Acceptance of the calibrated probe ball radius into the probe tool data 0 Without acceptance default setting 1 With acceptance D55602 SCS_MEA_COUPL_SPIND_COORD Coupling of the spindle alignment with coordinate rotation in the active plane 0 No coupling of the spindle position probe in the spindle with coordinate rotation around the infeed axi
231. eee tees eeeneeeetiaeeeersneeeneaa 233 8 3 Display on the User interface 0 00 eeeeeeceeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeetenaeeeeeeeenaees 235 8 4 Creating language dependent texts eececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeesnaeeeees 236 8 5 Description of the Script IANQUAGE eeeeeceeeee cece eeeeeeeeceeeeeetaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeseeaeeaaaees 237 8 5 1 Special characters ANd Operators ccccccccsecsecesecssecseesecsecssecseeceecseesacsaecsessecsecascaeseesesees sees DOO 8 5 2 Structure of the XML script c cccccccccecsneceeecesseeeeecaeeeeceaeeeeecaeeeseaeeeessaeesesssateeeestesesteessssete DOO 8 5 22 XML identifiers for the dialog cceccccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeaeseaeeeeseseeseaeeaeeeesestteeteeetetest 200 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 9 Table of contents 10 8929 1k Preece per cree fe ene E er ne perry eee pacar reer per E creer ene freer ere reer acetate terete erent tee 260 8 5 26 PROPERTY sste tectemcti aetna ieee athe tate adeeb dew Ge ne eae aes 261 8527 REQUEST e a a a a E E a e aa A A Z6Z 8 5 28 SOFTKEY_OK SOFTKEY_CANCEL c cccecececeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaaesaaeeaeseaeseeeeeneeseeeeeetaees 262 8 5 29 TEX scsasccccetescuatesscecent sen seed eadsezanneuduaapeal acadanansdeeaceblecasaneadnannaecuarscadsntauadeentencgeeneeaesnceeaenaaddvunaaeds 263 85 30 UPDATE CO
232. eeeeseteees 386 A 4 1 How to edit files in the file SYSteM ccccccccceeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeesaaeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeetitetaserse DOO A 5 Definitions for license management ee ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 391 A 6 Rules for wiring with DRIVE CLIQ 000 0 cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee ee eeee eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeteneaeeeseeeeeeees 393 B Listof abbreviations aons eieaa didayeswactes de a ea aaa a eaaa a a aaa aa E aa aa aana 397 B 1 ADbreviatiOnS asesina aiaa a a a AE O A AE i a ee uel 397 B 2 Feedback on the dOCUMENTALION ceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseceaeaeceeeeeececaaeaeeeeeesensaaeeeeeeseesea men 400 B 3 Overview of COCUMENTATION eccccceeeeeeeeeeeaeee cece iiaia aaia a aaae diaaa aAa aa EAA aa 402 E eE TE E A A AE E A T E E E O T E EEE 403 aE A a a E E T 409 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 11 Table of contents 12 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Scope of delivery and requirements 1 1 System overview System design The following configuration shows a typical example Company network Industrial Ethernet F SINAUT MD 720 3 SINUMERIK 828D a E PG PC DRIVE CLIQ PLC I O interface based 2x handwheels on PROFINET SINAMICS S120 MCP 483 PN PP 72 48D PN r l I SMC20 l l I I l I Synchronous m
233. emoved directly from the magazine Normally a single acknowledgment from the operator or the PLC user program tool holder is closed again is sufficient as a message that the process is complete There is no need to configure a transfer step The total acknowledgment can be set in DB40xx DBX0 0 Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status step tool tool XXX DB4000 DBX0 0 99 Network 1 DB4100 DB8x1 0 DB4100 DBx0 0 DB4000 DBx0 0 r c e DB4100 DBx1 1 Figure 9 2 Programming in PLC user program Loading procedures using handling systems or transporting the tool from the spindle into the magazine can be performed using further asynchronous messages Different loading sequences are described below Loading via the spindle with preselection of a magazine location 336 You can create a new tool directly on the chosen free magazine location or using the load dialog move a tool from the tool list which is not located in the magazine to a magazine location 1 Ajob from the tool management is always output at the interface for the loading point You must acknowledge this job 2 Then move this tool which is not yet positioned in the magazine into the spindle with Txx M6 or via an asynchronous transfer 3 Then manually place the tool into the spindle and deposit it in the magazine with TO M6 The procedure is always po
234. ent and end acknowledgment Order Intermediate acknowledgment a ee a End acknowledgment Acknowledgment OK Signal description The PLC user program recognizes from the 0 1 edge of the signal DB43xx DBX0 0 job that a new job has been assigned by the tool management The PLC user program acknowledges the transfer steps configured in DB9900 DB9901 and DB9902 with an acknowledgment status 105 or as an asynchronous transfer The positions of the tools are updated using the transfer steps of the acknowledgments from the tool management The execution of the job is acknowledged by the PLC user program with acknowledgment status 1 After successful transmission of the acknowledgment to the tool management the PLC firmware sets a PLC cycle to 1 for the signal acknowledgment OK and at the same time the job signal and the acknowledgment bit are reset to 0 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Sequence of the tool management with block splitting machine data setting milling Txx M6 Program L6 is called with M6 basic setting Order l Execute tool change Prepare a tool change l Intermediate acknowledgment ee T S End acknowledgment i Acknowledgment OK oS nmn Signal description The PLC user program receives a new job The job prepare tool change and the job execute tool change
235. enter of the table A measuring rod in the spindle is used to determine the turning center of rotary axis C Turning and Milling 174 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Contiguring cycles 6 5 Swivel Rotary axis Reference point of machine ee ae E MCS XO YO ZO ieee otary axis V2 Figure 6 11 Swivel table TABLE_5 side view Front view of the machine from the Y direction Reference point of machine _ Je Senn ease ee ane Wn eR MCS XO YO ZO I2x 260 Rotary axis A Figure 6 12 Swivel table TABLE_5 front view Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 175 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Commissioning softkey Swivel kinematics example 5 Kinematics Swivel table TABLE_5 X Y Z Offset vector 12 260 000 200 000 0 000 Rotary axis vector V1 1 000 0 000 0 000 Offset vector I3 0 000 0 020 20 400 Rotary axis vector V2 0 000 0 000 1 000 Offset vector 14 260 000 200 020 20 400 Display version Swivel mode Axis by axis Direction Rotary axis 1 Correct tool No Rotary axes Rotary axis 1 A Mode Auto Angular range 90 000 90 000 Rotary axis 2 C Mode Auto Angular range 0 000 360 000 6 5 11 Manufacturer cycle CUST_800 SPF Overview During swiveling all axis positions are approached using the CUST_800 SPF cycle The call is exclusively made from the
236. equires an individual end acknowledgment If there is a parallel job Execute change end acknowledgment for the preparation is not necessary e TO TO has been programmed empty tool holder spindle Turning and Milling 306 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management Turning and Milling 9 2 PLC NCK user interface No old tool Tool change into the previously empty tool holder spindle Load manual tool A manual tool is to be loaded The HMI displays the tool which is to be loaded Unload manual tool The tool is to be changed via manual operation Tool remains in spindle The bit is set at a change from tool holder gt spindle to tool holder gt spindle Triggers can be for example reset start mode or block search Source location for the new tool Magazine and location number from where the new tool comes mostly a location in a real magazine Target location for the old tool Magazine and location number to where the old tool is to be transported mostly a location in a real magazine Origin of the new tool Internal T number Internal T number of the new tool Tool status Tool status of the new tool Location type Location type of the new tool Size Size right left up down of the new tool User definable parameters Three user definable parameters which are transferred by the part program to the PLC user program Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3D
237. er step for the new tool Transfer step for the old tool Status 99 Starting position 2 A manual tool is in the spindle and is to be replaced by a tool from the magazine Job from tool management to the PLC user program tool change DB4300 DBX0 0 DBX1 2 and DBX1 6 Prepare tool change Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO DB43xx DBW6 Source magazine number DB43xx DBW8 Source location number DB43xx DBW10 Target magazine number 9999 DB43xx DBW12 Target location number Acknowledgment Prepare tool change Acknowledgm Acknowledgment bit Transfer step for the ent step new tool XXX DB4200 DBXx x 0 Transfer step for the old tool 0 Status Displayed on the interface DB4300 DBX0 0 1 1 and 1 6 Execute tool change The job remains otherwise unchanged the tools are still at the starting positions Synchronous acknowledgment The old tool is no longer in the spindle 339 Tool management 9 6 Example Change manual tools Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 6 9998 DB9900 DBW40 Asynchronous message unload the tool from the spindle Acknowledgm Acknowledgment bit Transfer step for the Transfer step for the Status ent step new tool old tool XXX DB4200 DBXx x 0 6 105 The spindl
238. er step for the Transfer step for the Status ment step new tool old tool DB4200 DBX0 0 99 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 341 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine 9 7 Application example for turning machine 9 7 1 Example Turning machine with revolver magazine MAG_CONF_MPF Example file You can find the program for configuring the magazine in the Toolbox The program can be read into the control and should be adjusted for the specific machine concerned Configuration Magazine revolver Toolholder 9998 1 O Load and unload 9999 1 1 4 Transfer steps Figure 9 3 Turning machine with revolver magazine Description of the program To start with all the old magazine definitions and tools are deleted As the program sequence continues all magazines and buffers are newly created and assigned by writing the magazine parameters Search strategies for tools and magazine locations can be defined in N70 For revolver magazines it is advisable to define all locations as fixed location coded For magazine type 3 N320 TC_MAP3 NUM_MAG 81 Bit6 1 is set The chain magazine locations are set up from N430 to N500 Magazine location type 0 means that the magazine location can be loaded with tools of different location types The buffers are set up from N520 onwards From N920 the buffers are assigned to the spindle tool hol
239. erence point approach in JOG mode REPOS Repositioning in JOG mode RPA R parameter Active Memory area on the NCK for R parameter numbers RTC Real Time Clock Real time clock SBL Single Block Single block SBR Subroutine Subroutine PLC SD Setting Data SDB System Data Block SEA Setting Data Active Identifier file type for setting data SK Softkey SLM Smart Line Module SPF Subprogram file Subprogram NC SRAM Static Random Access Memory Static memory block SW Software TEA Testing Data Active Identifier for machine data TM Tool Management TMMG Tool Magazine Management TO Tool Offset Tool offset TOA Tool Offset Active Identifier file type for tool offsets Turning and Milling 398 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 List of abbreviations B 1 Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning Explanation WCS Workpiece Coordinate System WO Work Offset ZOA Zero Offset Active Identifier file type for work offset data Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 399 List of abbreviations B 2 Feedback on the documentation B 2 Feedback on the documentation This document will be continuously improved with regard to its quality and ease of use Please help us with this task by sending your comments and suggestions for improvement via e mail or fax to E mail mailto docu motioncontrol siemens com Fax 49 9131 98 2176 Please use the fax for
240. es that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The product system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Trademarks Note the following NWARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems The permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to The information in the relevant documentation must be observed All names identified by are regi
241. eseeceeceseeeaeenaees 146 6 4 9 ShopTurn Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL ssssesseeseseeeserrsserrrssrrrssrrrssrrrnssreens T50 6 4 10 ShopTurn End face machining TRANSMIT c cc ceeceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeesaeeaaeees T5T 6 4 11 Shop lume Inclined axis TRAANG ticcietitce cial sci inndeiapicanttieraelairoumawnionsdasdatsleeidacaueinadanae 152 6 5 SWN elaine a a E E E teeta 153 6 5 1 Technology cycles for swiveling istisini ike aaa aaa aE aaa N 153 6 5 2 Setting the workpiece tool and rotary table reference ssseseesssreseerreserrrssrrsstirrnsrerresrer nne 156 6 5 3 ShopMill Swivel plane and swivel tool c cece cece ceesneeeeesneeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeseeeessneeeessneeeeene ee 159 6 5 4 CYCLE800 checklist for the identification of the machine kinematics 0 eeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 160 6 5 5 Commissioning of the kinematic chain Swivel data record esesessessesrrsseerreseresrerrssrens 161 6 5 6 Example of the commissioning of swivel head 1 o oo eee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeaeeeeenaes T67 6 5 7 Example of the commissioning of swivel head 2 c ccceecceeeceeeceeeeeseeeeeesaeesaeeeaeeeseeeneestetees 168 6 5 8 Example of the commissioning of a cardanic table cccceccesceeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeees 170 6 5 9 Example of the commissioning of a swivel head rotary table 00 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaes 72 6 5 10 Example of the
242. eseenaeeeeeiaeeeaas 336 9 6 Example Change manual tools 0 ccceeccccecesneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeeeesesaeeeseseeeeeeneeesnsaneeess 338 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Table of contents 9 7 Application example for turning Machine ceecceceeeeeeeeecceceeeeeeetecaeceeeeeeesecanaeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 342 9 7 1 Example Turning machine with revolver magazine MAG_CONF_MPP 2 eeeeeeees 342 9 7 2 Example Acknowledgment steps turning machine sssseessssrissssrrsserrsserrssrtrrsstnrssennssennns 347 9 7 3 Example Tool change cycle for turning Machine eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeee ee ee eaeeeeettaeeeetnaeeeeeeee 348 9 7 4 Example Tool change cycle for TCA COMMANG ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteetieeeieeninens 350 9 7 5 Example Turning machine with counterspindle cccccceceeceeceeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeesesesnieeeeeeeeneees 39T 9 7 6 Example Test for empty buffet sriii niinniin ai a i a iaaa 351 9 7 7 Example Transporting a tool from a buffer into the MAQGAZING cee ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeettteeeeeee 352 9 7 8 Example Repeat Prepare tool change Ordel ccceceeeeeececeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeesecanaeeeeeeseeenaees 352 9 8 Application example for milling MACHhING cecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeees 354 9 8 1 Example Milling machine with chain magazine an
243. et cccceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteeee 25 1 5 4 Communicating with the Control Via X130 ccccccsecssececseecssececsseceseeesseeecsaeeesaeceeseeeseeeseesens 28 2 Settings onthe AMD wssiicscciessietesteiivire hia eaten AEE A 31 2 1 ACCESS levels iieo aneta a a a iaaa a a a aal a E E A 31 2 2 How to set and change the password ssssisssinniniininann kiinan anin ee ANANA ANNAA ANAN AAAA RARAN 33 2 3 Available system languages ceccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeceanaeeeceeeeceeaeaeceeeeeseneaeeeeeseeeeeneeeseeee 34 2 4 How to set the date and time ccececeecccce cece a a a E a a a aaa daaa EE 35 2 5 Checking and entering liCENSES 0000 cece ee cece e eter eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseneaeeeeeae anaes 36 2 5 1 How to enter a license Key icc vscedenvsscecavsiadeeevuirandae stele data aden ahadaaeandtane reid acsde acta tae eaactae es 3 2 5 2 How to determine the license requirement cccccccecssecececseeeeecsneeeeeseeeeecsaeeeeesteeeesssieeeesseees 38 2 6 Configuring user AlArMS cccececeseeeeeeeeee cette ee ceeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeereeeeseeeaeees 40 2 6 1 Structure of User PLC Alarims ccccccccccscccsscccssccssecesecseeesseccseecsscsaecssecssecesescsescssecssesseeseeseeeseees 40 2 6 2 How to create user PLC alar MSsir idestelecentviaciteestavtanesceeiieuaccs dae Metuuc teenies sg eosausldcaeyeesaaeeaeess 42 2 6 3 Configuring teala loge Taer e
244. et MDS 0 Drive object type SERVO Dri ci The drive has already been started up If you wish to start up the drive again which may lead to setting of default data press Restart Si If you wish to change the drive that has already been started up without setting of default data press Change Cc jif you wish to cancel the process press Cancel Se L Identify via LED oO Communication to PLC failed missioning Figure 4 15 Change drive 2 Confirm the query with the Change softkey The dialog Configuration Motor is opened and the drive object 3 Spindle is selected Press Next gt 3 The next dialog tells you which motor is assigned to the drive Press Next gt Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 79 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 4 The next dialog tells you about the motor assignment Press Next gt Start up CHAN1 A Channel reset Program aborted DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 206400 4 infeed Line supply data identification selected active DP3 SLAVE3 SERVO_3 3 3 3 MDSO Drives Configuration Motor Name of motor 2 Motor selec Select a standard motor from the list O Enter motor data C Template from list Motor type 1PH7 induction motor iv Recognized motor Type order no Rated speed Rated current IPH7101 xxFxx xxxx 1500 00 U min 23 55Nm 37
245. execute statement Program parts of the script The script is divided into the following areas e Identifier for Easy Extend e Identifier for the device e Identifier for commissioning the device e Identifier for activating the device e Identifier for deactivating the device e Identifier for testing the device e Identifier for machine data and high level language elements e Identifier for the parameter dialog The individual identifiers are described in the following sections Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 237 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 1 Special characters and operators Displaying special characters Characters with special meanings in XML syntax have to be rewritten if they are to be displayed correctly by a general XML interpreter The following characters are affected Character Notation in XML Meaning lt amp gt Greater than gt amp lt Less than amp amp amp i amp quot Quotation marks straight i amp apos Apostrophe Permitted operators The operation statement processes the following operations Operator Notation in XML Meaning Assignment Equal to Not l l Not equal to gt gt amp gt Greater than lt lt amp lt Less than gt gt amp gt Greater than or equal to lt lt amp lt Less than or equal to Bit by bit
246. f another tool SPOS _SPP position spindle GO approach tool change position G75 Z 0 WAITS 1 ENDIF ELSE ENDIF Load tool Tool management and PLC M206 M17 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 371 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Turning and Milling 372 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Series start up 1 0 Overview In line with the data segregation in data classes an archive can be created separately for each data area and for each data class The data class System is an exception This data is set permanently and becomes effective at the first installation or a default initialization For this reason data backup of system data is unnecessary as this data class contains no data created during commissioning or during the machine run time A system archive delivered by Siemens can for example contain a new NCK version or an integrated HMI version or also a cycle hotfix NOTICE Protection of the system data All system data and data contained in the System data class in the HMI NCK PLC and drive areas may not be affected System data cannot be changed through operation or through the writing of a part program or subroutine or cycle or through reading in an archive When you load user data with a USB FlashDrive the data volume must not be larger than 4 MB Identification of archives Every archive contain
247. f the error status occurs when the user acknowledges the error in DB40xx DBX9 0 or DB42xx DBX9 0 9 4 6 Adjust the PLC user program Adjust the PLC user program See also The control of mechanical processes monitoring and prevention of potential collisions and the acknowledgment of tool position changes are the task of the PLC user program In the PLC project on the Toolbox CD you can find examples of transfer steps and their acknowledgments for a turning machine with a circular magazine and a milling machine with a chain magazine and dual gripper e Application example for milling machine Page 354 e Application example for turning machine Page 342 These blocks are function examples for the acknowledgment of different tool management jobs Acknowledging jobs Turning and Milling Many tool movements or tool management jobs can be directly acknowledged using total acknowledgment at bit 0 0 of the interface without previous intermediate acknowledgment For example e Turns of a circular magazine e Loading unloading only for systems without additional buffers such as handling systems loaders etc e Changing manual tools e Positioning a magazine Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 331 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Rules for acknowledgment If intermediate steps are useful several rules must be observed during acknowledgment The PLC user program must ensure that all acknowledgmen
248. fine window This deviation depends on the position control properties of the axis The maximum deviation that can be expected at a specific axis should be entered into the parameter If the tolerance is exceeded the following alarm is output 61442 Toolholder not parallel to the geometry axes Turning and Milling 214 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Service Planner Overview Turning and Milling By means of the Service Planner dialog on the HMI or Programming Tool time intervals and alarm sequences for the tasks to be processed mainly machine maintenance tasks can be edited started deactivated or reactivated The tasks are managed in the PLC The numeric data of the tasks is organized in data blocks and provided in the user interface for the PLC user program HMI and Programming Tool The text data of the tasks i e the designations of the respective tasks is managed and edited via the HMI and displayed there together with the numeric data The PLC firmware accesses the user interface data blocks processes the data and then provides the results in the form of remaining times as well as warnings and alarms in data blocks The Service Planner is processed every minute in the PLC firmware When the control is switched off the actual data of the maintenance tasks is frozen When the control is switched on processing is continued with these retentively saved values The PLC user program evaluates the actual
249. for e Tools with different location types e Different tool sizes e Fixed location tools By programming TO in the NC program a tool change is initiated without a new tool Only the spindle tool is transported to the magazine empty the spindle refer to the steps in the flow chart below You can see the different acknowledgment options from the steps Job related acknowledgments and asynchronous messages are used Please take the transfer steps used from the table in Chapter Example Acknowledgment steps milling machine Page 369 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Tool change flow chart Order Prepare tool change End acknowledgment Positioning magazine Location from old tool to changing point TAR i Acknowledge prepare tool Positioning magazine change order Location from new tool to changing point Old tool from spindle to Order Execute tool gripper 2 change Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine 1 1 Change requested Old tool from the spindle to gripper 2 and new tool from the magazine to gripper 1 Positioning magazine Location from new tool to changing point Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine and new tool from gripper 1 to spindle New tool from magazine to gripper 1 End acknowledgment New
250. for tool to be loaded n 16 occupied in left half location n 32 occupied in right half location n 64 occupied in upper half location n 128 occupied in lower half location 333 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Location type TC_MPP6 with variables index 9 Parameter assignment Read variable from Address Signal Valid values the NCK Job DB1200 DBX0 0 Start 0 1 DB1200 DBX0 1 Write variable 0 DB1200 DBB1 Number of variables 1 8 Parameter DB120x DBW1000 Variables index 9 DB120x DBW1002 Location number 1 31999 DB120x DBW1004 Magazine number 1 9999 Result DB1200 DBX2000 0 Job completed 0 1 DB1200 DBX2000 1 Error in job 0 1 DB120x DBX3000 0 Variable is valid 0 1 DB120x DBB3001 Access result 0 3 5 10 DB120x DBW3004 Data from NCK variable n n T number of the tool on the parameterized location Error for all location types 334 In case of error DB120x DBX3000 0 0 and an entry is made in the access result Values in DB120x DBB3001 0 No error 3 Illegal access to object 5 Invalid address 10 Object does not exist Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 4 8 Function PI service TMMVTL 9 4 PLC Program Blocks With PI service TMMVTL it is possible to initiate a job to relocate a tool from the PLC After an error free PI Start the tool management perform
251. for transformations please refer to Chapter Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Page 130 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 133 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning Function The end faces of a turned part are machined with the end face machining function TRANSMIT You can make additional settings in the following channel specific machine data MD24100 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 End face machining main spindle Transformation 1 256 Machining without Y axis 257 Machining with Y axis MD24200 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2 End face machining counterspindle Transformation 2 256 Machining without Y axis 257 Machining with Y axis MD24110 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_ i Axis assignment for the 1st transformation in the channel 0 1 Perpendicular to the rotary axis XC 1 3 Rotary axis main spindle C1 2 2 Parallel to the rotary axis ZC MD24120 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_ i Assignment of the geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 1 0 1 1st channel axis X 1 3 2nd channel axis Y 2 2 3rd channel axis Z MD24900 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 Offset of the rotary axis for the 1st TRANSMIT transformation MD24905 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 2 Axial offset of the rotary axis is taken into account during TRANSMIT 1 MD24910 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 0 Sign of the rotary axis for the
252. found the function provides the index to the first character starting with zero otherwise 1 Programming Designation Syntax Parameters Example string reversefind lt function name string reversefind return lt int val gt gt str1 find string lt function gt string String variable find string String to be found Turning and Milling lt let name index gt 0 lt let gt lt let name str1 type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name string reversefind return index gt strl _T brown lt function gt Result index 21 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 279 Easy Extend 8 6 String functions 8 6 13 string trimleft Description The function trims the starting characters from a string Programming Designation string trimleft Syntax lt function name string trimleft gt str1 lt function gt Parameters str1 String variable Example lt let name strl1 type string gt test trim left lt let gt lt function name String trimleft gt strl lt function gt Result strl test trim left 8 6 14 string trimright Description The function trims the closing characters from a string Programming Designation string trimright Syntax lt function name string trimright gt str1 lt function gt Parameters str1 String variable Example lt let name str1 type String gt test trim right lt let gt
253. g Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 213 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54640 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1 i Trigger point minus direction of the 1st measuring axis for G18 Z 0 SD54641 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX i Trigger point plus direction of the 1st measuring axis for G18 Z 0 SD54642 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point minus direction of the 2nd measuring axis for G18 X 0 SD54643 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point plus direction of the 2nd measuring axis for G18 X 0 Index i stands for the number of the actual data field _PRNUM 1 Measure tool with Toolholder that can be oriented or Swivel tool MD51610 MNS_MEA_TOOLCARR_ENABLE Support for toolholders that can be orientated 0 No support for toolholders that can be orientated default setting 1 With support of a measuring probe or tool positioned using a tool holder that can be oriented kinematics type T referred to the special holder positions 0 90 180 and 270 If the general machine data MD51610 MNS_MEA_TOOLCARR_ENABLE 1 then the following setting applies MD51618 MNS_MEA_CM_ROT_AX_POS_TOL Tolerance parameter for rotary axis settings 0 5 Default setting The real angular position of rotary axes can deviate from that programmed exact stop
254. g instruction Programming Identifier Syntax Attributes 8 5 20 WAITING PRINT lt print name Variable name text text formatting gt Variable lt print gt name Name of the variable where the text is to be stored text Text After a reset of the NC or the drive there is a wait for the restart of the respective Description component Programming Identifier Syntax Attributes Turning and Milling WAITING lt WAITING WAITINGFORNC TRUE gt waitingfornc true There is a wait for the restart of the NC waitingfordrive true There is a wait for the restart of the drive Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 255 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 21 up Description SinuCom Update Agent This section contains the script language for the SinuCom Update Agent If the code from an Update Agent file is to be included the INCLUDE Page 248 statement must be used Programming Identifier up Syntax lt up lt include src Filename gt gt Attributes 8 5 22 XML identifiers for the dialog Dialog for the parameterization A dialog can be configured for each device so that additional parameters can be set or output during runtime This is displayed by pressing the Additional parameters softkey The following dialog elements are available e Input dialog e Dialog title e Combined input output field e Text
255. g infeed feedback unit with IGBTs in infeed feedback direction which supplies a DC link voltage for the gt Motor Modules Basic infeed Overall functionality of an infeed with gt Basic Line Module including the additional components required filters switching devices etc Basic Line Module Unregulated line infeed unit diode bridge or thyristor bridge without feedback for rectifying the line voltage of the gt DC link CompactFlash card Memory card with non volatile memory The CompactFlash card can be plugged into the gt Control Unit from outside Control Unit Central open and closed loop control module The following Control Units are available e SIMOTION Control Units e g D425 and D435 e SINAMICS Control Units e g CU320 e SINUMERIK solution line Control Units e g NCU 7x0 PPU Double Motor Module DMM Two motors can be connected to and operated with a Double Motor Module See gt Motor Module Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 403 Glossary Drive The drive includes the electric or hydraulic motor the actuator converter valve the control unit the measuring system and the supply components line infeed module pressure accumulator For electric drives a distinction is made between a converter system and an inverter system With a converter system e g gt MICROMASTER 4 the line infeed the actuator and the control component form a single device f
256. ge display lt TEXT gt hello world lt TEXT gt Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 257 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 23 BOX Description Identifier for drawing a filled rectangle at the specified position colored as specified Programming Identifier Syntax Attributes 8 5 24 CONTROL Description Identifier for creating control elements Default fieldtype edit The data can be edited Programming Identifier Syntax Attributes 258 BOX lt box xpos X position ypos Y position width X extension height Y extension color Color code gt Position in the X direction zero point in the left upper corner Position in the Y direction zero point in the left upper corner Extension in X direction in pixels Extension in Y direction in pixels xpos ypos width height color CONTROL lt control name edit1 xpos X position ypos Y position refvar NC variable hotlink true format Format gt Name of the field A local variable of the same name is created for each field Position in the X direction zero point in the left upper corner Position in the Y direction zero point in the left upper corner name xpos ypos Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language fieldtype Field type e fieldtype edit e The data can be edi
257. get location number of the tool INT Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 303 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface 9 2 2 Tool change Interface description Per tool holder spindle there is one interface for e Jobs for preparing and executing the tool change Message to the PLC user program Job active job specification and job description The jobs appear in the toolholder interface of the spindle where a tool is to be exchanged e Acknowledgments of the PLC user program All acknowledgments for a job must take place in the interface of the same tool holder of the same spindle Acknowledgment errors should also be reset in this interface e Feedback from the tool management to the PLC user program Message to the PLC user program Acknowledgment status error status map of the acknowledgment bits e Job status Selected data from the last intermediate or end acknowledgment is saved This data is needed by the PLC firmware for the next acknowledgment to the tool management and is readable for diagnostic purposes This data can be used by the user program to restart after an abort e g reset during a tool change End acknowledgment for tool change A common end acknowledgment tool change via T command using turret or separate end acknowledgment Txx and M206 in separate blocks default milling is possible for Prepare tool change and Implement tool change Wi
258. ggregat_6 Aggregat_7 Aggregal_8 Aggregat_9 Aggregat_10 Aggregat_11 Aggregat_12 Aggregat_13 Aggregat 14 Aggregat_15 ODOOOOOOOOOB8oOmno00 eeeeedeeeoeeeeoee HMI NCK interface HMI PLC interface NCK PLC DRIVE Figure 8 1 Mode of operation of Easy Extend Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 231 Easy Extend 8 1 Overview of functions To use Easy Extend the following functions should be configured by the machine manufacturer e PLC e HMI interface The optional devices are managed via the interface between the user interface and the PLC e Script processing The machine manufacturer saves the sequences to be executed for commissioning activating deactivating or testing a device in a statement script e Parameter dialog optional The parameter dialog shows device information that is saved in the script file Storage of the files The Easy Extend files are stored on the system CompactFlash card in the oem machine 232 manufacturer directory File Name Target directory Text file oem_aggregate_xxx ts oem sinumerik hmi Ing Script file agm xml oem sinumerik hmi dvm Archive file Any oem sinumerik hmi dvm archives PLC user program Any PLC Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 2 Configuration in the PLC user program 8 2 Configuration in the PLC user program Loa
259. he drive Result Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 4 1 Configuring the drive 13 Carry out a POWER ON for the drive as requested in the message Switch off Start up cnan completely and then on again The following will be displayed MPF DIR ROV_TEST_MPF ZA Channel reset Program aborted 206400 J Drives Overview Motor Data Set MDS Drive data set DDS PROFIBUS PZD telegram Ci loop contr type Component number Power section type Order no Power section rated current Power section rated output Serial no DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active r SERVO_3 3 3 Motor_Module_3 Power section Drive object type SIEMENS telegram 116 PZD 11 19 Speed control with encoder 3 MM_1AXIS_DCAC 6SL3120 1TE23 QAA3 30 00 A 15 10 kW T 82015928 Figure 4 11 A Communication to PLC failed Configur ation Drive data overview functions 14 Option To identify the individual Motor Modules select Identify via LED The RDY Step 1 for commissioning of the drives is now complete LED flashes alternately red orange Select the next module with the vertical softkeys Drive and Drive Note Alternative procedure If in the Configuration dialog Fig Continue configuration you accidenta
260. he screen SD55619 SCS_MEA_SIM_MEASURE_DIFF Value for simulated measuring difference 0 For the simulation a setpoint actual value difference can be entered default setting SD55600 SCS_MEA_COLLISION_MONITORING Internal intermediate positioning of the measuring cycle is monitored for deflection of the probe 0 Without collision monitoring 1 With collision monitoring default setting Configuring input masks for measuring cycles in the program editor You can extend or restrict the entries and measuring variants with the following user variable _MZ_MASK i The GUD is displayed in the operating area Parameter gt User variable gt Global GUD or Channel GUD GUD parameter Function _MZ_MASK 2 Input field for the number of measurements and measuring speed 0 Without input field default setting 1 With input field _MZ_MASK 5 Selection box for probe type 0 Multiprobe default setting 1 Monoprobe Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 199 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Note SGUD parameters The SGUD parameters are not defined via the user interface Program the parameters with value assignment in the appropriate NC program in the MDA or AUTOMATIC mode Example _MZ_MASK 2 1 The value of parameter _MZ_MASK is also retained after NC program end reset a
261. he tool is changed MD52231 MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON M code for coolant 1 ON 8 This machine data is used to define the M function for coolant 1 which is output when the tool is changed MD52232 MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON M code for coolant 2 ON 7 This machine data is used to define the M function for coolant 2 which is output when the tool is changed MD52233 MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND_2_ON M code for both coolants ON 1 This machine data is used to define the M function for coolant 1 and 2 which is output when the tool is changed MD52210 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP Function mask display Bit 0 Dimension system for programs always in the basic system Bit 1 For G17 use the training coordinate system MD52281 MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON M code for tool specific function ON 1 M function is not output If both M commands of a function 1 the corresponding field is not displayed on the user interface 0 M code for tool specific function 1 ON 1 M code for tool specific function 2 ON 2 M code for tool specific function 3 ON 3 M code for tool specific function 4 ON Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD52282 MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF Ii M code for tool specific function OFF M function is output If both M commands of a function 1 the corresponding field
262. he vertical softkeys Drive and Drive 7 Assign all axes one after another Axis Drive MSP1 SERVO_3 3 3 MX1 SERVO_3 3 4 MY1 SERVO_3 3 5 MZ1 SERVO_3 3 6 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBA0 85 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive Accept settings Finally carry out the NCK Power On Reset and check the following settings Axis assignment These changes will become effective only after an NCK POWER ON RESET Would you like to execute an NCK POWER ON RESET Figure 4 23 Confirming Power On Reset Confirm with OK and carry out a restart not only for the drives and but also for the control The following assignment is shown on the PG PC MPF DIR ROV_TEST_MPF Program aborted Start up CHAN1 Jog A Channel reset DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 206400 Infeed Line supply data oF eo selected active Machine configuration NCK Drive Index Name Type Drive Identifier SERVO_3 3 5 SERVO_3 3 6 SERVO_3 3 3 Current access level Manufact Figure 4 24 Assignment of all axes Turning and Milling 86 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive After the restart the following machine configuration is displayed on the control 206400 DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Machine configuration Machine Axis Drive Inde
263. hen so called anchors must be defined for this purpose Example of an HTML anchor lt a name myAnchor gt This is an anchor lt a gt See also Example How to create an online help for user PLC alarms Page 60 e The contents of HTML documents must be saved with the UTF 8 coding This guarantees that the HTML documents are correctly displayed in all of the supported country languages Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 53 Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specitic online help HTML tags 54 The following sub set of the HTML functional scope is supported Tag Description Comment a Anchor or link Supported attributes href and name address Address b Bold big Larger font blockquote Indented paragraph body Document body Supported attributes bgcolor RRGGBB br Line break center Centered paragraph cite Inline citation Same effect as tag i code Code Same effect as tag tt dd Definition data dfn Definition Same effect as tag i div Document division The standard block attributes are supported dl Definition list The standard block attributes are supported dt Definition term The standard block attributes are supported em Emphasized Same effect as tag i font Font size family color Supported attributes size face and color RRGGBB h1 Level 1 heading The stand
264. hiving Easy Archive use case 10 3 Example Data archiving Easy Archive use case Easy Archive User example 378 With Easy Archive the SINUMERIK 828D has a fundamentally new procedure for data archiving This procedure is tailored exactly to the needs of series machine manufacture Easy Archive is based on a strict separation between SINUMERIK system software customized OEM data machine data manufacturer cycles and operator data part programs tool offsets There is a further separation for customized data for data that is the same for all machines of that type and for data that has been adjusted for an individual machine This will be clarified with an example A machine manufacturer builds a vertical machining center in series The customized data is created on a prototype machine This prototype machine s customized data set will later be ported to all series machines cloned After porting the data however individual settings are made on each individual machine Prototype machines Series machines Single customer machine Individual data class User data class e g reference cams Part programs TOA Clone archive gt M 1 U ZOA Patch archive M Figure 10 2 User example For example reference cams and ball bearing spindles are measured and entered as individual customized data If an error occurs at the end user the error is reproduced and solved on the prototyp
265. igure the drive Initial state Before you begin e Connect PG PC with the control See chapter Example How to communicate with the control using the NCU Connection Wizard Page 23 e Power up of the control is carried out with Siemens default data e Display in Start up operating area on the control Machine configuration Machine Axis Drive Motor Index Name Type No Identifier Type Channel 2 MyY1 Linear CHAN1 3 M Linear CHAN1 4 MSP1 Spindle CHAN1 Current access level Manufacturer MD Mach C data 4 Figure 4 2 Control after power up Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 69 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive Procedure To configure the drive 1 Start the commissioning software for SINAMICS S120 2 Select the Start up operating area PME Startup 3 If necessary change the password to Manufacturer access level Display the commissioning software on PG PC Start up CHAN1 ZA Channel reset Program aborted Machine configuration NCK Drive Motor Index Name Type Drive Identifier Type Channel Note Updating firmware When a drive is connected the update of the firmware is started automatically Alternatively The firmware update can also be started via the following softkeys Turning and Milling 70 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive
266. in the tool direction The tool lengths are taken into account accordingly IC UKS SHOPPILL SM1A Swivel plane NC UKS SUN Swivel plane Input dialog with ShopMill ShopTurn CYCLE800 input dialog Figure 6 13 CYCLE800 programming Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 177 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Structure CYCLE800 178 Sequence in AUTOMATIC mode Structure of CYCLE800 SPF CUST_800 SPF Init It is possible to rewrite the vectors for a kinematic chain e g for temperature compensation vectors or when taking the W axis into account for boring machines Swivel data set invalid Adaptation of the retraction strategy No retraction Traversing of the rotary axes for NC axes No traversing of the rotary axes Figure 6 14 Structure CYCLE800 SPF CUST_800 SPF Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Structure E_TCARR SPF F_TCARR SPF The following structure refers tot the swivel data set change and the related tool change tool change during milling or turning CUST_800 SPF SDS swivel data set Figure 6 15 Structure E_TCARR SPF Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 179 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Markers _M2 to _ M13 If the swivel data set or tool is changed the linear axes are retracted using
267. in the PLC user program does not trigger an alarm The PLC user program always works with the image memory Whether there is a connection to the physical input outputs is configured via MD12986 i and MD12987 i Active modules are then monitored cyclically for failure Figure 3 1 1 0 switch Activating fast onboard I O for PLC The PLC of the SINUMERIK 828D use four fast inputs and outputs respectively which are provided onboard via the X142 connector Example X142 1 corresponds to A_IN 9 These four inputs and four outputs are assigned to the NC of the SINUMERIK 828D as standard and can be jointly assigned to the PLC by changing the following machine data Machine data I O of the NC I O of the PLC assigned assigned 10366 0 MN_HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN 10101H 10001H 10368 0 MN_HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT 10101H 10001H Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO 65 Commissioning the PLC 3 1 Activating O modules IP addresses of the I O modules You can find the DIP switch setting for the IP address belonging to the appropriate I O module in the following table The maximum configuration with five PN modules for PPU 28x 1 and four PN modules for PPU 26x 1 including analog modules bus coupler and machine control panel with PLC I O interface based on PROFINET are taken into account 66 Example setting for machine control panel BERET Tg gp E E E E E i m 1 2 3 4 5
268. ing Device 1 to 16 1 Device 17 to 32 2 Device 33 to 48 3 Device 49 to 64 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 16 PASSWORD Description If this identifier is assigned to a device a softkey appears when the option is not set requesting the input of a password for this device The character string is processed by the PLC and the result forwarded to the HMI via the option data Programming Identifier PASSWORD Syntax lt password refvar variable name gt Attributes refvar Name of the reference variable Example lt password refvar plc db9900 dbd0 gt 8 5 17 PLC_INTERFACE Description This identifier permits the PLC e HMI interface to be redefined The system expects 128 addressable words Default DB9905 Programming Identifier PLC_INTERFACE Syntax lt plc_interface name Address identifier of the data gt Attributes name Identifier for the address e g plc mb170 Example plc mb170 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 253 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 18 Description POWER_OFF Identifier for a message prompting the operator to switch the machine off The message text is permanently saved in the system Programming 8 5 19 Description 254 Identifier Syntax Attributes PRINT POWER_OFF lt power_off
269. ing Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 113 Configuring cycles 6 2 Drilling Tapping CYCLE84 and CYCLE840 If the technology masks are hidden using the channel specific machine data MD52216 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL then the settings in the following channel specific setting data are effective D55481 SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG12 0 Exact stop response 0 Exact stop response as before the cycle call default value 1 G601 2 G602 3 G603 D55482 SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG21 0 Acceleration behavior 0 Acceleration behavior as before the cycle call default value 1 SOFT 2 BRISK 3 DRIVE D55483 SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG24 0 Precontrol 0 Precontrol as before the cycle call default value 1 FFWON 2 FFWOF Tapping CYCLE84 0 D55484 SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_MC 0 Spindle operation for MCALL For MCALL reactivate spindle operation default value 1 For MCALL remain in position controlled spindle operation 114 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 2 Drilling 6 2 2 ShopTurn Drilling centered Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use the ShopTurn function ShopMill ShopTurn Tapping centered CYCLE84 If the technology masks are hidden using the channel specific machine da
270. ing and Milling 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive To operate the axes in the previous example in JOG mode after commissioning the drive enter the new values for the following machine data Spindle machine data Default setting New value 32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO 10000 3000 32010 MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID 10000 100 32020 MA_JOG_VELO 2000 50 35100 MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT 10000 3000 35110 0 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO 0 500 3000 35110 1 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO 1 500 3000 35130 0 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT 0 500 3150 35130 1 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT 1 500 3150 36200 0 MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT 0 11500 3300 36200 1 MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT 1 11500 3300 Further information on the status of axes and spindle is available in the Diagnostics 4 1 7 Parameters for the axis spindle test run operating area with the menu forward key e The Axis diagnostics softkey opens the Service overview e The Service axis softkey opens the Service Axis Spindle dialog Relevant parameters and terminals Turning and Milling Infeed Parameter terminal Meaning p0840 ON OFF 1 p0844 1st OFF2 p0845 2nd OFF2 p0852 Enable operation X21 3 24 V and X21 4 ground EP terminals enable pulse enable Drive Parameter terminal Meaning p0840 ON OFF 1 p0844 1st OFF2 p0845 2nd OFF2 p0848 1st OFF3 Com
271. interface for the loading point You must acknowledge this job 2 Now place the tool in the magazine This sequence is not subject to any restrictions or constraints Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 337 Tool management 9 6 Example Change manual tools 9 6 Example Change manual tools Programming In MD22562 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Bit 1 1 additional tools without magazine allocation have been selected by the NC part program The selected tool must be inserted in the machine manually and removed again manually after machining manual tools The operator must ensure that the data block for the tool on the spindle is in the NCK or that he she puts the appropriate tool onto the spindle for the data block stored in the NCK Note The responsibility is on the user to comply with the safety regulations via the PLC user program The PLC user program is informed with DB43xx DBX1 5 and DBX1 6 whether a manual tool is involved in a tool change job With alarm 17212 Channel 1 Manual tool 2 Duplo No 3 Load to toolholder 4 or Alarm 17214 Remove manual tool from spindle tool holder the operator is requested to execute the tool change The alarms are reset after a tool change by the acknowledgment from the PLC Starting position 1 338 The manual tool in the spindle should be exchanged for another manual tool Job from tool management to the PLC user program tool change DB4300 DBX0 0
272. inumerik hmi template cfg 2 Paste the file into one of the following directories oem sinumerik hmi cfg oOruser sinumerik hmi cfg Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 47 Settings on the HMI 2 6 Contiguring user alarms 48 3 Give the file a new name e g alarm_slaedatabase xml When assigning a name please note Any name can be chosen but it must be written in lower case letters The name must contain a period and file extension Example of the copied file alarm_slaedatabase xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding ISO 8859 1 lt DOCTYPE SlAeAlarmAttributs gt lt SlAeAlarmAttributs Version 01 00 00 00 gt lt Types gt lt Type gt lt Category gt lt CatDesc gt Alarms of the Sinumerk 828 lt CatDesc gt lt Attributes gt lt Attribute AttrName TEXTCOLOR AttrDefault 5003 AttrDataType 10 gt lt AttrDesc gt Text color of the alarm used when displayed at the header panel lt AttrDesc gt lt Attribute gt lt Attribute AttrName TEXTBACKGROUNDCOLOR AttrDefault 5004 AttrDataType 10 lt AttrDesc gt Background color of the alarm used when displayed at the header panel lt AttrDesc gt lt Attribute gt lt Attribute AttrName NUMBERCOLOR AttrDefault 5005 AttrDataType 10 lt AttrDesc gt Text color of the alarm number used when displayed at the header panel lt AttrDesc gt lt Attribute gt lt Attribute AttrName NUMBERBACKGROUND
273. ion gt lt chars gt 30 lt chars gt lt message gt lt context gt lt TS gt Integration in the existing language concept When started the Service Planner reads the oem_maintenance_ lt Ing gt ts file with the language set in the language selection menu If this is not available the English version is read which has to be available for the commissioning Editing text entries The maintenance texts are entered in the dialog with the values for the interval time of the first warning and the number of warnings In addition the ts file can also be edited in the alarm text editor if the necessary entry is available in the setting file oem_alarms_config xml Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 229 Service Planner 7 3 Functions on the HMI Turning and Milling 230 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend 8 1 Overview of functions Purpose Easy Extend provides you with a simple facility for commissioning activating deactivating or testing optional equipment The available equipment and device states are displayed in a list by the control system The system can manage a maximum of 64 devices Softkeys are used to activate or deactivate a device The Easy Extend function is available in the operating area Parameter gt Extension menu gt Easy Extend Configuration Agoresat_1 Aggregat_2 Aggregat_3 Aggregat_4 Agoregat_5 A
274. is 0 Display text Z Z display text Z XY Z XY 1 Display text Z Fixed point 1 Display text Z XY Fixed point 2 If you wish to modify the retraction version Z or Z XY via the manufacturer cycle CUST_800 SPF the neutral text Fixed point 1 and Fixed point 2 can be displayed when retracting in this case Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 153 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Bit 2 Deselecting the active swivel set D55221 SCS_FUNKTION_MASK_SWIVEL_SET 0 Deselection not permitted If deselection is not permitted the Swivel data set TC selection field is not displayed in the Swivel input dialog 1 Deselection permitted Parameter TC_CARR37 n HUNDRED MILLIONS position TC_CARR37 n display versions of the input dialog for CYCLE800 HUNDRED MILLIONS Enable swivel data set Swivel data set change Tool change n Swivel data set Swivel data set change Swivel data set not enabled Tool change Enable swivel data set Automatic swivel data set change Automatic tool change Enable swivel data set Automatic swivel data set change Manual tool change Enable swivel data set Manual swivel data set change Automatic tool change Enable swivel data set Manual swivel data set change Manual tool change Additional settings To use the Swivel fun
275. is includes in particular the bit interfaces of the DB1800 and the evaluation of the remaining time in DB9904 You must ensure that appropriate messages are displayed for the warnings and alarms During the configuration of these messages so called alarm responses can be selected e g the machine is disabled after a Power OFF message The alarm messages are configured in accordance with the specifications of the SINUMERIK 828D PLC messages The texts are entered with the alarm text editor The texts are then available on the HMI Functionality to be implemented e Evaluation of the alarm and actual data with the aim of generating PLC warning and alarm messages Further signals can be included in the evaluation logic e Optional linking of the deactivation bits with bit memory or I O signals Note A sample program is supplied in the PLC function library This can be adapted by machine manufacturers to meet their requirements Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 217 Service Planner 7 2 Interfaces in the PLC user program 7 2 DB9903 Initial data Interfaces in the PLC user program DB9903 Byte Initial data table r16 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBWO Interval 1 h DBW2 Time of first warning 1 h DBW4 Number of warnings to be output 1 DBW6 Reserved 1 DBW8 Interval 2 h DBW10 Time of first warning
276. is present no changes may be made to the data of this interface This signal is reset by the PLC firmware after the acknowledgment has been transferred to the tool management e Acknowledgment step 1 30 At a 0 1 edge the appropriate acknowledgment step from the acknowledgment step table is sent to the tool management As long as the signal is present no changes may be made to the data of this interface and the variable transfer step table This signal is reset by the PLC firmware after the acknowledgment has been transferred to the tool management e Resetting the acknowledgment error Resetting the message Acknowledgment error DB43xx DBX100 1 and the diagnostic information in the feedback interface Turning and Milling 308 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Feedback reports DB4300 43xx Signals from tool management r xx Load location Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB100 Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment error OK DBB101 Reserved DBB102 Reserved DBB103 Reserved DBW104 Error status WORD DBB106 Reserved DBB107 Reserved DBB108 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 7 step 6 step 5 step 4 step 3 step 2 step 1 step 0 DBB109 Acknowl Acknowl Acknow
277. ith parameters to support the commissioning Dialog with additional parameters The input fields list selected drive parameters lt DEVICE gt lt list_id gt 3 lt list_id gt lt name gt Test form lt name gt lt form gt lt init gt lt caption gt Equipment Manager lt caption gt lt control name edit1 xpos 400 ypos 34 refvar drive dc p105 DO5 gt lt control name edit1 xpos 400 ypos 54 refvar SMC AXCONF MACHAX USED 4 gt X lt control name edit1 xpos 400 ypos 74 refvar drive dc p971 D05 gt lt control name edit1l xpos 400 ypos 94 refvar drive dc r2 DO5 gt lt init gt lt paint gt lt text xpos 40 ypos 34 gt dc D05 p105 lt text gt lt text xpos 40 ypos 54 gt SMC AXCONF MACHAX USED 4 lt text gt lt text xpos 40 ypos 74 gt dc DO5 p971 lt text gt lt text xpos 40 ypos 94 gt dc DO5 r2 lt text gt lt paint gt lt form gt lt DEVICE gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 285 Easy Extend 8 8 Examples Dialog with combo box 286 lt form gt lt init gt lt caption gt selected machine data lt caption gt lt DATA_ACCESS type true gt lt switch on the direct access to the NC variables gt lt control name edit1l xpos 322 ypos 34 crefvar SMN AXCONF MACHAX NAME TAB 0 gt
278. l Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 15 step 14 step 13 step 12 step 11 step 10 step 9 step 8 DBB110 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 23 step 22 step 21 step 20 step 19 step 18 step 17 step 16 DBB111 Reserved Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 30 step 29 step 28 step 27 step 26 step 25 step 24 Signal description Turning and Milling e Acknowledgment OK DB43xx DBX100 0 Positive feedback of acknowledgment status The acknowledgment of the PLC user program area DB42xx DBBO to DBB3 was transferred without error to the tool management This signal is reset after one PLC cycle e Acknowledgment error DB43xx DBX100 1 Negative feedback of acknowledgment status There is an error in the acknowledgment of the PLC user program area DB42xx DBB0 to DBB3 The cause of the error is displayed in Error status The acknowledgment error bit is only set if the acknowledgment from the PLC firmware is accepted as error free and the tool management detects and signals an error in the acknowledged tool transfer for example when the target location for tool transfer is occupied Err
279. l change l l Intermediate acknowledgment l i End acknowledgment Acknowledgment OK Signal description The PLC user program receives a new job The job prepare tool change and the job execute tool change are issued simultaneously Txx and M206 have been programmed in one NC block Several intermediate steps are acknowledged The state of the job remains unchanged The positions of the tools are updated using the transfer steps of the acknowledgments from the tool management The end acknowledgment OK is returned and the bit for the job is simultaneously reset The description of the job execute tool change and prepare tool change is not reset Byte 1 of DB43xx is not overwritten until the next job Note MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK The response of the interface in DB43xx DBB1 is affected by the setting in MD20310 bit 10 This sequence described here corresponds to the presetting of the machine data Turning and Milling 326 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks 9 4 4 Configuring step tables Configuring step tables You can find the transfer step tables TM_CTS DB9900 and TM_VTS DB9901 and the acknowledgment step table TM_ACK DB9902 in the Programming Tool under Libraries gt Special data blocks The blocks are copied into a project with a double click The structure of the data blocks is pe
280. l properties of an operator control Identifier PROPERTY Syntax lt property attribute lt Value gt gt Attributes max Maximum input value min Minimum input value default Default lt control name edit xpos 10 ypos 10 width 100 hotlink true refvar nck Channel GeometricAxis actProgPos 1 gt lt property min 0 gt lt property max 1000 gt lt control gt lt control name edit1 xpos 10 ypos 10 gt lt property min 20 gt lt property max 40 gt lt property default 25 gt lt control gt Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 261 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 27 REQUEST Description This identifier is only valid within the INIT statement of a form This identifier is used to add a variable to the cyclic reading service hotlink Programming Identifier REQUEST Syntax lt REQUEST name NC variable gt Attributes name Address identifier 8 5 28 SOFTKEY_OK SOFTKEY_CANCEL Description The identifier SOFTKEY_OK overwrites the standard behavior when closing a dialog by means of the OK softkey The identifier SOFTKEY_CANCEL overwrites the standard behavior when closing a dialog by means of the CANCEL softkey The following functions can be performed within this identifier e Data manipulation e Conditional processing e Loop processing Programming Identifier SOFTKEY_OK Syntax lt SO
281. le address A slash should be used as a separating character 264 Addressing PLC data blocks Data format f x address Bit addressing B Byte W Word D Double word Valid PLC address identifier b Bit number The following addresses are permissible DBx DB f Data format identification is not applicable for bit addressing Data block Input Output Bit memory Variable DBx DBXx b Data block Ix b Input Qx b Output Mx b Bit memory Vx b Variable Example lt data name plc mb170 gt 1 lt data gt lt data name plc db9905 dbb0 gt 0 lt data gt lt data name plc i0 1 gt 1 lt data gt lt op gt plc m19 2 1 lt op gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend Addressing NC variables Addressing starts with the path section nck This section is followed by the data address its structure should be taken from the OEM Package Parameter Manual 2 8 5 Description of the script language Example lt let name tempStatus gt lt let gt lt op gt tempStatus nck channel state chanstatus lt op gt Addressing the machine data and setting data Machine data and setting data is identified by the character followed by the name of the data Machine data Mx_ lt name index AX lt axis_number gt gt HMI machine data MxS_ lt name index AX lt axis_number gt gt Option data Ox_ lt name index AX lt axis_number gt
282. lect the vertical softkey Change to continue configuration Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Commissioning the drive Turning and Milling NO A 4 1 Configuring the drive Then press the horizontal softkey Infeed for the following display Start up A Channel reset Supply Select a supply i DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active DP3 SLAVE3 SLM_3 3 2 2 206400 J infeeds O verview Drive object name SLM_3 3 2 Drive object number PROFIBUS telegram Infeed has not been brought into operation You can start up the infeed with Change File functions Configur To configure the infeed select the vertical softkey Change In the following dialog Configuration Active Line Module press Continue gt In the following dialog Configuration Further data press Continue gt In the following dialog Configuration Terminal wiring press Continue gt Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBA0 77 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 8 In the following dialog Configuration Summary press Finish The infeed has been configured 9 Confirm the query if you want to save the data with Yes This process may take several minutes Start up CHAN1 Jog ZA Channel reset
283. les Turning and Milling 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54656 SNS_MEA_REPEAT_WITH_MO MO for repeating measurement and alarm dimension difference or confidence range 0 No MO for alarm default setting 1 With MO for alarm D54657 SNS_MEA_TOL_ALARM_SET_MO MO for alarm oversize or undersize 0 No MO for alarm default setting 1 With MO for alarm Channel specific setting data SD55606 SCS_MEA_NUM_OF_MEASURE Number of repeated measurements at a measuring position when the probe does not switch 0 Maximum of 5 measurement attempts default setting 1 Only 1 measurement attempt SD55608 SCS_MEA_RETRACTION_FEED Retraction velocity from the measuring point 0 Retraction velocity corresponding to the intermediate positioning default setting 1 Retraction with percentage rapid traverse corresponding to the settings from SD55630 SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT The setting of the channel specific setting data SD55600 SCS_MEA_COLLISION_MONITORING must be 1 SD55610 SCS_MEA_FEED_TYP Selection of the measuring feedrate 0 Measuring with the measuring feedrate default setting 1 1st measurement with the feedrate corresponding to the channel specific setting data SD55633 SCS_MEA_FEED_FAST_MEASURE 2nd measurement with measuring feedrate SD55630 SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT Percentage r
284. lication example for milling machine Transfer step 1 DB9900 DBWO 2 DB9900 DBW8 Comment from to Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 0 1 9998 2 9998 1 9998 3 Step 6 or Step 13 Old tool from spindle to gripper 2 Step 6 or Step 9 New tool from magazine to gripper 1 gt continue with Step 7 Step 7 Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine and new tool from gripper 1 to spindle lt Previous step Step 6 The PLC program controls the machine functions for the gripper movements tool clamping etc As soon as the mechanical movements are completed and acknowledged in the PLC user program the tool movements are acknowledged to the tool management Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status ment step tool tool 7 DB4200 DBX0 7 3 4 105 Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 3 9998 2 9998 1 New tool from gripper 1 to spindle DB9900 DBW16 Step 7 or Step 14 4 9998 3 0 2 Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine DB9900 DBW24 Step 7 or Step 10 gt continue with Step 8 Step 8 End acknowledgment Turning and Milling lt Previous step Step 7 or Step 14 End acknowledgment takes place with tool changeover in the initial setting or in a state where the machine can continue machining Here it is possible that there are s
285. lly press OK continue the configuration after POWER ON with the following selection On the horizontal softkey bar select Drive system gt Drive devices gt Configuration 75 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive 4 1 3 Example How to configure the infeed Configuring the infeed 76 Note If there are alarms that require acknowledgment after switching on these must be acknowledged first Then commissioning can be continued Procedure 1 Inthe Overview dialog select the vertical softkey Change then the following query appears Start up CHANI fp bape dd ROV_TEST_MPF Program aborted ROY A Channel reset DP003 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 206400 4 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active Drives Overview DP3 SLAVE3 SERVO_3 3 3 3 MDSO Motor Data Set MDS 0 Drive object type SERVO Dri Adata st NNC a PR cy The drive has already been started up If you wish to start up the drive again which may lead to setting of default data press Restart Ifyou wish to change the drive that has already been started up without setting of default data press Change Ce jif you wish to cancel the process press Cancel Pc Or Pe Pc Se Identify via LED O i Recom missioning Communication to PLC failed Figure 4 12 Query for further action 2 Here se
286. ls are in the positions specified The part program can be continued Job canceled The job is canceled previously acknowledged tool position changes will be kept The cancel command itself does not trigger any position acknowledgments or changes in the tool management End acknowledgment for Move tool from the real magazine to a buffer gripper spindle with reservation of the old location in the magazine for this tool Same meaning as status 1 Repeat prepare tool change job The tool change was informed of a new tool position in advance The prepare tool change job is to be recalculated with this position This is permissible only for preparation commands which have not yet been acknowledged 99 Total acknowledgment Job complete all positions reached All the tools concerned are in the positions specified in the job The part program can be continued All target positions from the job have been reached Synchronous intermediate acknowledgment 105 Intermediate position for tool The tools are moved from the source position specified in the job or from the last acknowledged intermediate position to the specified target position Communicating an asynchronous transfer 201 Communicate tool movement The tool is moved from the source position to the specified target position When moving from a location in a real magazine to an intermediate buffer location the source location is rese
287. m on the back of this page Turning and Milling 400 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 List of abbreviations B 2 Feedback on the documentation To From SIEMENS AG I DT MC MS1 Name P O Box 3180 Address of your company department D 91050 Erlangen Germany Street Zip code City Fax 49 9131 98 2176 Documentation Suggestions and or corrections Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 401 List of abbreviations B 3 Overview of documentation B 3 Overview of documentation Overview of documentation for SINUMERIK 828D General documentation catalogs SINUMERIK SINAMICS C Brochure Catalog D21 1 Converter chassis units User documentation SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 828D 828D 840D sl 840D sl Operating Manual HMI sl Programming manual Diagnostics Manual Turning Fundamentals Milling Job planning Manufacturer service documentation SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 828D 828D 828D 840D sl Commissioning Manual Function Manual Function Manual Parameter Manual EMC directives Manual Basic Functions ISO dialects Service Manual Extended Functions Electronic documentation SINUMERIK SINAMICS Motors DOCONCD DOCONWEB Turning and Milling 402 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Glossary Active Line Module ALM A controlled self commutatin
288. machine data depend on the direction from which the coordinate axis is viewed The settings for the direction of rotation as well as the interface signal DB380x DBX2001 6 must be observed under all circumstances Turning and Milling 140 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles Turning and Milling 6 4 Turning NOTICE Under all circumstances ensure that bit 5 in MD52207 is identical to DB380x DBX2001 6 Main spindle direction of rotation 52207 C Ax 52207 Spnd DB380x 52207 Spnd Bit 3 Bit 4 DBX2001 6 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 M3 1 0 1 1 M4 1 1 0 0 M3 0 1 1 1 M4 The setting of machine data marked with assumes that the viewing direction was towards the negative coordinate axis If on the other hand you are looking towards the positive coordinate axis you need to reverse the values i e swap 0 and 1 Note The MD52207 i is only relevant for display in the ShopTurn user interface not for correct machining on the machine Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 141 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning Further settings for ShopTurn MD52241 MCS_SPINDLE_CHUCK_TYPES Spindle jaw type 0 Main spindle 1 Counterspindle 0 Clamping outer 1 Clamping inner MD52242 MCS_MAIN_SPINDLE_PARAMETERT Main spindle parameters 0 Chuck dimensions 1
289. machining position The programming command T identifier initiates the tool change T location can be programmed as an alternative If T location no tool need actually be stored in the location Description of the buffers and loading points Magazine Location Meaning 1 XX Real magazine 1 circular position xx 9998 1 Tool holder 9999 1 Loading point for tool holder manual tool If the value 1 is set for the revolver in MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE the same applies as for chain magazines Consider adjacent location See also Turning and Milling Consider adjacent location is used for oversized tools When searching for empty locations loading tool change the bits 4 11 are then evaluated in the magazine location parameter TC_MPP4 half location occupied reserved You can find additional information in the Machine data for the tool management Page 313 section Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 295 Tool management 9 1 Fundamentals 9 1 3 Loading and unloading tools manually Manual tools Bit 1 of MD22562 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE decides whether additional tools without magazine allocation can be selected during tool change The automatically selected tool must be inserted in the machine manually and removed again manually after machining Responsibility of the operator The operator must ensure that the data block for the tool on the spindle is in the NCK or
290. mands by CYCLE832 SPF these settings can be modified in the manufacturer cycle CUST_832 SPF Procedure 1 Copy the CUST_832 SPF cycle from the directory NC data Cycles Standard cycles Paste the CUST_832 SPF cycle into the following directory NC data Cycles Manufacturer cycles Open the cycle The following settings are programmed SOFT COMPCAD G645 FIFOCTRL UPATH FFWON 7 ORISON 7OST DYNNORM DYNFINISH DYNSEMIFIN DYNROUGH depending on the machining type Corresponding markers are prepared in CUST_832 SPF _M NORM _M FINISH _M SEMIFINISH _M ROUGH The programming of FGREF is useful when machining with active multi axis transformation e g TRAORI In this case in CUST_832 SPF variable _FGREF is pre assigned a value of 10 mm This value can also be modified In CYCLE832 SPF the value of variable _FGREF is written to the rotary axes involved in the machining which are declared as orientation axis of a 5 axis transformation using the FGREF rotary axis command When G70 G700 is active the value from _FGREF is converted into inches before writing to the command FGREF Note More than three rotary axes orientation axes in CYCLE832 In CYCLE832 a maximum of three rotary axes of the orientation transformation TRAORI are taken into account for FGREF 184 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Contiguring cycles 6 6 High Speed Settings Advanced
291. matches the constants the statements are processed within the CASE statement The DEFAULT statement is processed when none of the constants listed match the expression Syntax lt SWITCH gt lt condition gt Expression lt condition gt lt CASE value lt constant 1 gt gt Statements lt CASE gt lt CASE value lt constant 2 gt gt Statements lt CASE gt lt DEFAULT gt Statements lt DEFAULT gt lt SWITCH gt Turning and Milling 270 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 6 String functions Overview of the functions The script language offers various string functions The function names are reserved and cannot be overloaded 8 6 String functions Name Function string cmp Comparing character strings string cmp Page 271 string icmp Comparing character strings without consideration of upper lower case string icmp Page 272 string left Selecting number of characters from the left string left Page 273 string right Selecting number of characters from the right string right Page 273 string middle Selecting number of characters from the middle string middle Page 274 string length Determining the length of a character string string length Page 275 string replace string remove Replacing character strings string replace Page 275 Deleting character strings string remove Page 276
292. mation 150_ Face end machining 151_ Setting up a counterspindle 146_ Tapping 115_ Simulation 111_ Deactivate 112 Simultaneous recording activating the runtime 112 Source ID 384_ Source URL 384_ STARTER drive commissioning software 14_ Stock removal corner CYCLE951 124 String functions 271_ Swivel Activating 153 _ Commission kinematic chain 161_ Configuring the input dialog 153 under ShopMill 159_ System languages 34_ System variables 163_ T Tapping 114 TCP IP 28 Technology Drilling 113 Milling 116_ Swivel 153_ Terminal assignment X122 91 X132 92_ Thread cutting CYCLE99 124 TMMVTL PI service 335_ Tolerance value 182_ Tool change 304 360_ End acknowledgment 304_ Tool list 294 Tool management 291 Toolbox 14_ Toolholder that can be oriented 214 Total acknowledgment 322_ TRAANG 138 Inclined axis 152 TRACON 138 412 TRACYL 139 Cylinder surface transformation 150_ Transfer step 327 Transfer step table Constant 311 Variable 312_ TRANSMIT 138 TRANSMIT with Y axis 135 Trigonometric functions 282 Turning Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL 130_ Inclined axis TRAANG 136 Measure workpiece 204 U USB flash drive 375 User example 378 User interface 297_ User views 103 V V 24 Interface 380 Parameter 380 W Wiring rules DRIVE CLIiQ 393 X XML Identifiers 239 Operators 238_ Special characters 238_ Statements
293. mber of the new tool 1 0 TsOldT_1 0 Transfer step number of the old tool 2 0 State_1 3 Status to NCK 2 4 0 TsNewT_2 1 Transfer step number of the new tool 5 0 TsOldT_2 0 Transfer step number of the old tool 6 0 State_2 1 Status to NCK Acknowledg Transfer step Acknowledg Comment ment step New tool old tool ment status 1 0 0 3 Cancel order command 2 2 0 1 Prepare Tool The tool is taken from the magazine changing point and placed into gripper 1 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Acknowledgment is given by setting the corresponding bits in the user interface e DB40xx for loading unloading relocating or positioning the magazine e DB42xx for prepare tool change and execute tool change After processing the acknowledgment bit is reset one PLC cycle by the PLC firmware In the same data block where the acknowledgments have taken place for a PLC cycle the feedback message is output in bit 100 0 acknowledgment Ok or as a static signal in bit 100 1 acknowledgment error the error status is output in byte 104 for an acknowledgment error and in bytes DBB108 to DBB111 the acknowledgment bits last set are output The user can use these bits to see which acknowledgment step triggered the error If the PLC user program incorrectly set multiple acknowledgment bits these are also entered one to one in the map Resetting o
294. mensions MD52244 MCS_SUB_SPINDLE_PARK_POS_Y Parking position of Y axis for counterspindle 0 Manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF See also Turning and Milling If you want to perform one of the following actions you must adapt the manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF e Switch between spindle and C axis mode for the main spindle or counterspindle e Open close flush chuck main spindle counterspindle e Change default settings for the coupling of the main spindle and counterspindle ShopTurn Setting up cycles for turning Page 139 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 149 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning 6 4 9 ShopTurn Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation Function If you wish to use the function cylinder surface transformation TRACYL under ShopTurn please take the settings from Chapter Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Page 130 In addition set the following channel specific machine data MD52214 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL Milling function masks Bit 3 Enable internal rear machining in ShopTurn masks that define the machining plane themselves Bit 4 If you have implemented the Clamp release spindle function using the machine manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC SPF then using this machine
295. missioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 89 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive Parameter terminal Meaning p0849 2nd OFF3 p0852 Enable operation X21 3 24 V and X21 4 ground EP terminals enable pulse enable p0864 Infeed enable p1140 Ramp function generator enable p1141 Ramp function generator start p1142 Setpoint enable The drive parameters are set at Start up operating area gt Drive units softkey gt Inputs outputs Start up CHAN1 a Channel reset Inputs Outputs Input Infeed operational 2 OFF3 Drives Select Safe Stop SH Group 1 Select Safe Stop SH Group 2 Status of Safe Stop Group 1 Status of Safe Stop Group 2 Input external zero mark X122 1 X122 2 X122 3 X122 4 X122 7 X122 8 X122 10 Signal Row X122 11 DI 11 0 total targets No standard connections Signal sIn Qutt 071 Terminal Terminal 0 1 In Out Signal In Program aborted Drive device Drive DP3 SLAVE3 CU_I_3 3 1 1 device 0 Input 4_IN 1 Select drive dev Input 4_IN 2 Assign Terminal Input 4_IN 3 Input 4_IN 4 Set Defaults Output 4_OUT 1 Output 4_OUT 1 Output A_OUT 2 Output A_OUT 1 Show All Configur PROFIBUS ation Topology Figure 4 27 Drive parameters See also Further references on the drive e SINAMICS 120 Commissioning Manual e Booksize Po
296. mright cececeeeceeceecceeeeeceeeeceaeceaeceaeceaeeeeeeceeecaeeeaeceaeseaeeeeeesaeesaeeseaeeaeenecseeeresereeeneees 280 8 7 Trigonometric TUNCHONS sitet niente ie nite ee 282 8 8 Examples irme ea a e EE a eaS a i E EN 284 8 8 1 Example with control elements cccccccsecesscecssecssecssecsseeseeecseecaecsaecssecsaesesuseseecseeensesseees eases 284 8 8 2 Example with parameters to support the COMMISSIONING e ecceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeenteaeeeeeees 285 8 8 3 User example fora DOWER Unit ccccccecceceeeecesneeeceeeeeeecaeeeeecsaeeeessaeeeseeaeeeseaeeessesaeeeseeeeeeaas 288 MOOMMANAGEMON iiesie cavessdcccas essere dieccseeaseatsteadiateccasucbstentice davasyoezidsucleeedesteeadstesecdadsiigsaesasSadersvesseysnaseevs 291 9 1 F pdamentalS 5 0 cd cfivicecedsasceeveeuasddenls aachess a gaeceesa spade ceatepeeetaenes 291 9 1 1 Structure of the tool MaNageMent ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeeceeeceeeeseaeeesaaeesaeeeeeeessueetse eases 292 9 1 2 Components of the tool MANAGEMENK ceecceescecee cece eeeseeeeeesaeceaeceaeceeeeeeeeseeesaetsaeseeeeaeenseees 293 9 1 3 Loading and unloading tools Manually ccccccceeeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeseeseaeeaeeaeeeeseeeeeeeees 296 9 2 PLC NCK user interface cceceseeeeeeenne eects eeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeesesaeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 297 9 2 1 Relocating unloading loading tool positioning magazine
297. ms directly on the control Then the file oem_alarms_plc_xxx ts is created and you have a document template with the correct structure which you can then extend with further alarms The abbreviation xxx stands for the language in which the file has been created 1 Select the Start up operating area 2 Press the HMI softkey 3 Press the Alarm texts softkey The Select file window appears 4 5 Enter the alarm number in the Number field and the desired alarm text in the Text Select oem_alarms_plc to create user PLC alarm texts field The alarm numbers and their alarm texts do not have to be consecutive If an alarm is triggered without a configured text only the alarm number is specified Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 6 Configuring user alarms Searching within the alarm texts To search for a text or a series of characters 1 Press the Find gt softkey The Find window opens and a new menu is displayed on the vertical softkey bar 2 Enter the search term in the Text field 3 Place the cursor in the Direction field and choose the search direction forward backward with the SELECT key 4 Activate the Case sensitive checkbox when a distinction is to be made between upper and lower case in the entered text 5 Press the Find replace softkey The Find and replace window appears 6 Press the OK softkey to s
298. n rval gt strl str2 lt function gt g p Result rval 0 8 6 2 string icmp Description Programming Example 272 Two strings are compared the comparison is not case sensitive The function gives a return value of zero if the strings are the same a value less than zero if the first string is smaller than the second string or a value greater than zero if the second string is smaller then the first string Designation string icmp Syntax lt function name string icmp retvar lt int var gt gt str1 str2 lt function gt Parameters str1 String str2 Comparison string rval Result lt let name rval gt 0 lt let gt lt let name str1 type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt A brown Bear hunts a brown Dog lt let gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Easy Extend 8 6 String functions lt function name string icmp return rval gt strl str2 lt function gt 7 Result rval 0 8 6 3 string left Description The function extracts the first nCount characters from string 1 and copies them to the return variable Programming Designation string left Syntax lt function name string left return lt result string gt gt str1 nCount lt function gt Parameters str1 String nCount Number of characters Example lt let name strl type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt
299. n 1 finished part Setting the coordinate system for simulation Set the appropriate coordinate system in the channel via the following channel specific machine data MD52000 MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Position of coordinate system 0 47 0 For milling example 34 For turning example See also Section Settings for activating cycles Page 105 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 111 Configuring cycles 6 7 Settings for activating cycles Deactivating simulation 1 Copy the file slsimconfigsettings xml from the following directory siemens sinumerik hmi appl 2 Store the file in the following directory user sinumerik hmi cfg or oem sinumerik hmi cfg If the slsimconfigsettings xml file already exists in the directory add the entries from the Siemens file slsimconfigsettings xml The settings become effective only after restarting the HMI Simultaneous recording Activating the runtime 112 Timers are provided as system variables in the Program runtime function While the NCK specific timers are always activated for time measurements since the last control power up the channel specific timers must be started via the following channel specific machine data MD27860 MC_PROCESS_TIMERMODE Activating the runtime measurement of the program Bit 0 1 Measurement of the total runtime for all
300. n such a way that an adjustment of machine data is only necessary in exceptional cases Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 101 Setting NCK machine data 5 7 Classification of machine data See also A separate list image is provided for each of these areas in which you can view and edit machine data General MD General Channel Azis Display SD SD SD MD Figure 5 1 Softkey bar The following properties of the machine data are displayed from left to right e Number of the machine data if applicable with array index in square brackets e Name of the machine data e Value of the machine data e Unit of the machine data e Effectiveness of the machine data e Data class Description of the data classes Function Manual Basic Functions P4 A detailed description of the machine data and interface signals is given in the Parameter Manual with cross references to the appropriate section in the Function Manual Physical units of the machine data 102 The physical units of machine data are displayed on the right hand side of the input field Display Unit Measured quantity m s 2 m s Acceleration rev s 3 rev s Acceleration change for the rotating axis kg m 2 kgm Moment of inertia mH mH millihenry Inductance Nm Nm Newton meters Torque us us microseconds Time pA pA microamperes Electric current yVs uVs microvolt seconds M
301. n the right hand half of the window Context sensitive selection of online help pages is not possible General sequence 1 Generating HTML files 2 Generating a help book 3 Integrating the online help in the operator software 4 Saving help files in the target system 2 7 1 Structure and syntax of the configuration file Syntax description of the slhlp xml You require the configuration file slhlp xml to integrate the help book in the existing online help system of the user interface Tag Number Meaning CONFIGURATION 1 Root element of the XML document Indicates that this involves a configuration file OnlineHelpFiles 1 Introduces the section of the help books lt help_book gt Introduces the section of a help book EntriesFile File name of the help book with the list of contents and subject keyword entries 1 Attributes value Name of the XML file type Data type of the value QString Ill Technology Specifies the technology for which the help book applies All applies for all technologies If the help book applies to several technologies then the 0 1 technologies are listed separated by comma Possible values All Universal Milling Turning Grinding Stroking Punching Attributes 50 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specitic online help Tag Number Meaning value Technology data ty
302. nal evaluation Save measured value in machine coordinates at R1 Save measured value in workpiece coordinates at R2 Check measured value in R1 R2 187 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Measuring input of the PPU for the workpiece or tool probe The assignment of the NC measuring input is defined in the following general machine data MD51606 MNS_MEA_INPUT_PIECE_PROBE 0 Workpiece probe measuring input 0 Workpiece probe at the 1st NC measuring input default setting 1 Workpiece probe at the 2nd NC measuring input MD51607 MNS_MEA_INPUT_TOOL_PROBE 0 Tool probe measuring input 0 Tool probe at the 1st NC measuring input 1 Tool probe at the 2nd NC measuring input default setting MD51614 MNS_MEA_PROBE_LENGTH_RELATE Length reference when calibrating the probe length 0 In the infeed axis calibration is performed to the center of the probe ball 1 In the infeed axis calibration is performed in relation to the circumference of the probe ball default setting Note After changing MD51614 the probe must be recalibrated MD51616 MNS_MEA_CAL_MONITORING Monitoring the calibration status 0 Without monitoring 1 With monitoring default setting Turning and Milling 188 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Contiguring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 6
303. nd X132 are on the rear side of the control Turning and Milling Main switch A 000 00 OOOO Line filter Line reactor L1 gt L2 L3 gt PE t Smart Line Module 24 V Elk DI DO Ready 2 CU DO Warning I t EP 24 V EPM READY DC LINK 24V DI Disable Uuiv1W1 D D O O es i Ret Fa eee ee a a A aa a Early opening contact t gt 10 ms 24 VDC and ground must be applied for operation DI DO controlled by the Control Unit No additional load permitted downstream of line contactor The current carrying capacity of the DO must be observed an output interface must be used if required DO high feedback deactivated a jumper can be inserted between X22 pin 1 and pin 2 for permanent deactivation X22 pin 4 must be connected to ground external 24 V Contacting via rear mounting panel or shielding buses in accordance with EMC installation guideline 5 kW and 10 kW line filters via shield connection Signal output of the control to avoid interference of the 24 VDC supply on the EP terminal Connect via BICO to parameter p0864 gt X122 1 Figure 4 29 Example SLM connection Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 95 Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments See also 96 ON OFF1 enable Connection of Smart Line
304. nd power OFF ON If you have created the prerequisites described in this section and you have set and checked the machine and setting data you can perform measurements on the machine with a workpiece or tool probe in the AUTOMATIC mode See also If you wish to set up workpiece measurement on a lathe then additional settings are required e AUTO Measure workpiece during turning Page 204 If you wish to set up tool measurement using a tool probe then you must also make additional settings e AUTO Measure tool during milling Page 205 e AUTO Measure tool during turning CYCLE982 Page 213 A description is provided in the following sections as to which settings you can make in order to adapt measuring to the specific requirements of the machine 6 7 8 AUTO General settings for the workpiece measurement Requirement You have already made the settings from the following chapter General settings for measuring Page 186 Settings Using the following setting data you can appropriately adapt workpiece measurement to the specific requirements in the Program operating area General setting data SD54655 SNS_MEA_REPEAT_ACTIVE Repeating measurements for alarm dimension difference or confidence range 0 Measurement is not repeated default setting 1 Measurements are repeated a maximum of four times Turning and Milling 200 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cyc
305. ndif Configuration N280 TC_MAMP2 PLACE SEARCH Magazine Set up magazine 290 300 310 320 U TC_MAP1 NUM_MAG MAG_TYPE U TC_MAP2 NUM_MAG MAGAZINE lt lt NUM_MAG if MAG_TYPE me a Ce U TC_MAP3 NUM MAG 81 N330 else Zz 340 U TC_MAP3 NUM MAG 17 356 7 12289 Bit13 1 exchange old tool on the location Delete old data when magazine 1 is set Number of magazine locations 7Number of buffers gripper spindle Number of loading points Type of search strategy on the location of the new tool of the new tool up Delete magazine Delete Tools Type of search strategy Magazine status all locations fixed location coded for revolver magazine Magazine status Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management Turning and Milling 9 8 Application example for milling machine N350 endif N360 TC_MAP4 NUM MAG 1 N370 TC_MAP5 NUM MAG 1 N380 TC_MAP6 NUM MAG 1 N390 TC_MAP8 NUM MAG 0 N400 TC_MAP9 NUM MAG 0 N410 TC_MAP7 NUM MAG LOCATIONS N420 TC_MAP10 NUM MAG PLACE SEARCH Magazine locations N430 for PLACE 1 to LOCATIONS N440 STOPRE N450 TC_MPP1 NUM_MAG PLACE 1 N460 TC_MPP2 NUM_MAG PLACE 0 N470 TC_MPP3 NUM_MAG PLACE 1 480 TC_MPP4 NUM MAG PLACE 2 490 TC_MPP5 NUM_ MAG PLACE PLACE 500 endfor V
306. ne help files hlps Online help files zipped and version files lico Icon files lico640 Icons in resolution 640 x 480 ico800 Icons in resolution 800 x 600 ico1024 Icons in resolution 1024 x 768 ico1280 Icons in resolution 1280 x 1024 ico1600 Icons in resolution 1600x1240 Ing Text files Ings Text files zipped and versions files proj Easy Screen configurations template Various templates user directory user sinumerik data Version data archive User specific archives prog User specific programs hmi Icfg Configuration files data Version data hlp Online help files lico Icon files lico640 Icons in resolution 640 x 480 ico800 Icons in resolution 800 x 600 ico1024 Icons in resolution 1024 x 768 ico1280 Icons in resolution 1280 x 1024 ico1600 Icons in resolution 1600x1240 Ing Text files log Log files md Machine data views proj Easy Screen configurations Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO References A 4 Directory structure on the CompactFlash card A 4 1 How to edit files in the file system Requirements To perform specific adaptations use a copy of the sample files that are contained in the following directories siemens sinumerik hmi template cfg siemens sinumerik hmi template lng Store the modified files in the appropriate folder of the user or oem directory Note In order to copy files you need access rights for protection level 1 password f
307. nection IP 192 168 215 1 Port 22 Login User hd Password eecccce or SSH key File fel Transmission mode LAN Figure 1 9 Dialog Login data for direct connection 2 Inthe menu select Connection gt Connect gt Direct connection or click the Connect button The following dialog box is displayed Select a connection 2j x Please select here the control which you want to connect to Available connections direct connection 192 1 Information of the control IP control 192 168 215 1 port 22 control name not possible direct connection IP remote viewer 192 168 215 1 port 5900 cms Figure 1 10 Dialog Direct connection 3 The last selected direct connection is highlighted Using the Connect button a connection to the IP address196 168 215 1 is created This dialog does not appear when the direct connection is selected using the menu Turning and Milling 26 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO Scope of delivery and requirements 1 5 Communication with the control Network connection To create a network connection 1 In the menu select Settings gt Connection gt Direct connection or click the Connect button Network connection settings 2 x Available connections 4_ Control IP control name Port 22 Connection name Connection _01 Login User v Password babble or S
308. ng 190 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Activating tool manager functions 4002H Minimum value Bit 1 1 Tool manager and monitoring functions active Bit14 1 Automatic tool change for reset and start Note If you create the conditions described in this section and you have set and checked the machine setting data then in the JOG mode you can measure a workpiece using a workpiece probe on a milling machine In the JOG mode you can measure a tool using a tool probe on a milling machine or lathe A description is provided in the following sections as to which settings you can make in order to adapt measuring to the specific requirements of the machine 6 7 4 JOG Measure workpiece during milling Measure workpiece Turning and Milling Measuring in the Machine operating area can be appropriately adapted to the specific requirements using the following channel specific general machine data and channel specific setting data General machine data MD51751 MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_MANUELL Measuring path in mm before and after the measuring point 10 Default setting MD51755 MNS_J_MEA_MEASURING_FEED Measuring feedrate in mm min for workpiece measurement and calibration 300 Default setting MD51757 MNS_J_MEA_COLL_MONIT_FEED Position feedrat
309. ng feedrate for tool probe and tool measurement with stationary spindle 100 Default setting Channel specific setting data D42950 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYP Assignment of the tool length offset independent of tool type 0 Measuring turning tools type 5xx default setting 2 Measuring turning tools type 5xx drilling and milling tools type 1xx 2xx Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 197 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 6 7 7 Measuring in the AUTOMATIC mode Requirement Measure tool 198 Software option In order to use the Measuring in AUTOMATIC function you require the software option Measuring cycles You have already made the settings from this section General settings for measuring Page 186 Workpiece measurement for milling e The probe has been inserted in the tool spindle e The probe has been selected in the tool list as type 710 3D probe milling e The probe is activated in the current NC channel Workpiece measurement for turning e The tool of type 580 3D probe turning is selected e The tool is activated in the current NC channel To measure tools an appropriate probe must be located in the machine space so that this can be reliably and safely reached with a tool in the spindle The following tool types are supported with measure tool e Milling technology Tool types 1xx and 2xx e
310. ning CYCLE950 CYCLE952 124 CUST_800 SPF 109 CUST_832 SPF 109 184 CUST_MEACYC SPF 109 189_ CUST_TECHCYC SP 109 139 139 149 CYCLE79 117_ CYCLE800 example Cardanic swivel head 168 409 Index Cardanic table 170_ Changeable swivel head 167_ Swivel head rotary table 172 Swivel table 174 CYCLE84 114 CYCLE840 114 CYCLE930 124 CYCLE950 124 CYCLE951 124 CYCLE952 124 CYCLE982 213 CYCLE99 124 Cylinder surface transformation under milling 117_ under turning 130_ with groove side offset 132_ without groove side correction 131_ D Data area 374 DB1800 217_ DB9904 217 Direct connection 25_ Drilling 113 Drive Circuitry 94 Configuration 67_ Parameter 89_ DRIVE CLiQ 67 Wiring rules 393 E Easy Archive 378 Easy Extend 231_ EE_IFC DB9905 233 End acknowledgment 321 322 Ethernet interface 28_ Example Axis configuration of a lathe 129_ Change manual tool 1 338 Change manual tool 2 339 Measure tool in AUTO mode during milling 207_ Milling machine 354_ Milling machine axis configuration 118 _ Milling part program 355_ Residual material machining 127 Turning machine 342_ Turning part program 343 410 F Feedback signal 302 G Groove side offset 118 H Hardware serial number 392 High Speed Settings CYCLE832 182 Hirth tooth system 156 169 I O module DIP switch 66_ Infeed 76_ Initial data table 218 Intermediat
311. ning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 91 Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments 4 2 2 Terminal assignment on X132 Terminal assignment X132 of the Control Unit PPU Pin no Function Assignment BICO source sink 1 Input Digital input A_IN 1 CU 0722 4 CU p2082 0 2 Input Digital input A_IN 2 CU r0722 5 CU p2082 1 3 Input Digital input A_IN 3 CU r0722 6 CU p2082 2 4 Input Digital input A_IN 4 CU 0722 7 CU p2082 3 Input Line contactor feedback signal CU r0722 7 LM p0860 when configured in the HMI 5 Ground for pins 1 4 24 V Output Infeed in operation LM r0863 0 CU p0742 LM with DRIVE CLiQ connection Output Digital output A_OUT 4 CU 2091 3 8 Output Infeed Ready for switching on LM r0899 0 CU p0743 LM with DRIVE CLiQ connection Output Digital output A_OUT 3 CU 2091 2 9 Ground for pins 7 8 10 11 10 Output Digital output A_OUT 2 CU 2091 1 CU p0744 Output Line contactor control LM r0863 1 CU p0744 when configured in the HMI Input BERO 2 zero mark substitute CU r0722 14 Drive p0495 5 Input 2nd OFF 2 CU r0722 14 Drive p0845 11 Output Digital output A_OUT 1 CU 2091 0 CU p0745 Input Probe 2 Distributed measurement CU p0680 1 0 Every drive p0489 MD13210 1 CU p0728 bit 15 0 Index encoders 1 2 3 6 12 Ground for pins 7 8 10 11 Turning and Milling 92 C
312. ning of the SINUMERIK 828D is carried out in the following steps 1 Install the software from Toolbox CD onto PG PC See chapter Scope of delivery and requirements Create communication connection with the control See chapter Communication with the control Addressing the I O See chapter Addressing the I O modules Set HMI See chapter Settings on the HMI PLC functions See Function Manual Basic Functions P4 Commission drive and connect probes See chapter Configuring drive Setting NCK machine data See chapter Setting NCK machine data Configuring cycles See chapter Configuring cycles Define maintenance tasks and maintenance intervals See chapter Service Planner 10 Extend machine with additional devices See chapter Easy Extend 11 Tool management Turning and Milling See chapter Tool management Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 15 Scope of delivery and requirements 7 4 Starting up the control 1 4 Starting up the control Control startup Procedure 1 Switch the control on The following display then appears during startup 2 Press the lt SELECT gt key within three seconds 3 Then press the following keys in succession Menu reset key HSK2 horizontal SK2 VSK2 vertical SK2 4 The Setup menu is displayed Normal startup is the default setting Startup menu Reload saved user data Install software update ba
313. nit e The computing power of the respective control unit e The set processing and communication cycles Below you will find the binding wiring rules and some other recommendations as well as a few sample topologies for DRIVE CLiQ wiring The components used in these examples can be removed replaced with others or supplemented If components are replaced by another type or additional components are added the SIZER tool should be used to check the topology If the actual topology does not match the topology created offline by STARTER the offline topology must be changed accordingly before it is downloaded DRIVE CLiQ rules The wiring rules below apply to standard cycle times servo 125 us vector 400 us For cycle times that are shorter than the corresponding standard cycle times additional restrictions apply due to the computing power of the CU configuration via the SIZER tool The rules below apply on a general basis unless limited as a function of the firmware version e A maximum of 8 DRIVE CLiQ nodes can be connected in one row A row is always seen from the perspective of the Control Unit e A maximum of 14 nodes can be connected to one DRIVE CLiQ line on a Control Unit e Ring wiring is not permitted e Components must not be double wired Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 393 References A 6 Rules for wiring with DRIVE CLiIQ
314. number exist Querying of location number Is the tool in the magazine Position magazine T programming without address extension 349 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine See also The function is available irrespective of tool management and is described in full in Function Manual Basic Functions Mode Group Channel Program Operation Reset Behavior K1 9 7 4 Example Tool change cycle for TCA command Overview To ensure that a T function replacement cycle also starts when TCA is programmed the language command TCA must be redefined in _TCA default setting In this way it is also possible to start a TCA SPF manufacturer cycle analogous to the TCHANGE SPF cycle in which the actual tool call is implemented Programming The sequence is described in the following example PROC TCA STRING 64 _TOOL NAME INT _DUPLO INT _TH_ NO DEF INT TNO NEW TCA _TL_NEW_TCA 7Tool call to NC TCA TOOL NAME DUPLO TH NO Reading of the internal T number and the magazine location of the calling tool GETSELT _TNO_NEW_TCA 7Positioning of the revolver An example here with POSM command magazine 1 toolholder The magazine position is also set to the location of the new tool with the end acknowledgment of the TCA command _TL_NEW_TCA A_MYMLN _TNO_NEW TCA POSM _TL_NEW_TCA With offset selection the tool change must be acknowledged D1 M32 See also The TCA SPF cycle can
315. o be addressed the name is followed by the array subscript in square brackets Example lt data name gud channel mgud syg_rm 0 gt 1 lt data gt lt op gt gud channel mgud syg_rm 0 5 2 lt op gt 8 5 32 Addressing the drive objects Addressing the drive objects DO 266 Addressing starts with the path section drive Then the drive device is specified CU or DC The parameter to be set is added to this section To address individual objects the desired object should be entered in square brackets after the parameter Parameter number do lt DO index gt Example p0092 do1 Note Numbering The drive object number differs from the numbering used in the drive dialog since the CU components ALM and all connected hubs are integrated in the consecutive numbering The DO number can be determined as follows All connected drive objects are listed in field p0978 of the relevant CU The numerical value of a field corresponds to the slot number of a drive object It is a question of establishing the field index for the desired slot and adding one to this number This value is the DO index needed for addressing purposes If there are drive objects connected to an NX the index of the last CU drive object should be established first and the index of the NX drive object should be added to it Alternatively the drive index can be read from a local variable e g DO localvariable using a substitution character lt
316. o real magazines or of spindles tool holders to other buffers is made during start up 6TC_MDP2 TC_MLSR Chain magazine The setting in MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE must be 1 for this magazine type Chain magazines do not as a rule have any additional buffer available for transportation between magazine and spindle These additional buffers can contain tools temporarily Turning and Milling 294 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 1 Fundamentals Description of the buffers and loading points Magazine Location Meaning 1 XX Real magazine 1 chain plate box position xx 9998 1 Spindle 9998 2 Gripper 9998 3 Gripper 9998 4 Toolboy 9998 5 Shifter 9999 1 Loading point for spindle manual tool 9999 2 Magazine loading point Circular magazine The setting of MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE is usually 0 Circular magazines do not have any additional buffer with which tools can be transported from the magazine to the spindle The tools on circular magazines are not physically transported into the spindle but are moved into a defined position through rotation of the turret so that machining can take place with one particular tool The tool is only transported to the spindle or tool holder in the software Transporting the tool to the buffer 9998 1 spindle serves to inform the tool management that the turret holding the requested tool has been turned to the
317. of a user PLC alarm 40 The user PLC alarms have the following structure 700000 Oil pressure too low 700001 Axis d Alarm number Variable Alarm text Figure 2 5 Alarm structure Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI The table below shows the mode of operation of the PLC alarms 2 6 Contiguring user alarms 1 The alarm is triggered with the appropriate number and output via the PLC signal 2 Ifa variable has been configured to this alarm the value of this variable is in the specified data word of the PLC variable 3 The NCK response when the alarm is triggered is defined in the MD14516 x index see table below 4 The alarm text can be freely selected and may be up to 255 characters long Alarm number PLC signal PLC variable Alarm response Alarm text MD 700 000 DB1600 DBX0 0 DB1600 DBW1000 14516 0 Alarm 1 700 001 DB1600 DBX0 1 DB1600 DBW1004 14516 1 Alarm 2 700 002 DB1600 DBX0 2 DB1600 DBW1008 14516 2 Alarm 3 700 003 DB1600 DBX0 3 DB1600 DBW1012 14516 3 Alarm 4 700 004 DB1600 DBX0 4 DB1600 DBW1016 14516 4 Alarm 5 700 005 DB1600 DBX0 5 DB1600 DBW1020 14516 5 Alarm 6 700 006 DB1600 DBX0 6 DB1600 DBW1024 14516 6 Alarm 7 Continuation 700 247 DB1600 DBX30 7 DB1600 DBW1988 14516 247 Alarm 248 Defining the NCK response The following NCK responses are possible Turning and Milling
318. of the switching direction for monoprobe taking into account the offset angle 0 Without offset angle 1 With offset angle default setting S D55772 SCS_J_MEA_SET_PROBE_MONO Selection of the probe type 0 Probe is a multiprobe 3D probe default setting 1 Probe is a monoprobe 6 7 5 JOG Measure tool during milling Tool probe In the following machine data index i stands for the number of the current data field probe number 1 of the probe General machine data MD51774 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_TYPE i Probe version 0 Cube default setting 101 Disk in XY working plane G17 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 193 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions MD51774 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_TYPE i 201 Disk in ZX working plane G18 301 Disk in YZ working plane G19 The following general machine data is used to define in which axes and directions it is possible to calibrate a tool probe MD51776 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_ALLOW_AX_DIR Ii Axes and directions for calibration 133 Default setting Decimal place ONES 1st axis 0 axis not possible 1 only minus direction 2 only plus direction 3 both directions TENS 2nd axis 0 axis not possible only minus direction only plus direction both directions HUNDREDS 3rd axis axis no
319. og It is therefore possible to access the buffer storage via magazine number 9998 Default setting for milling technology The default settings of the following machine data for the milling technology are intended to replace the M6 command function If M6 is programmed in the part program the execution is always in two separate steps block splitting 316 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management G91 F500 X M06 M73 The NC splits this block into a G91 F500 X M73 b M06 gt M6 branches into the subprogram L6 MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 206 MD10715 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE 0 6 MD10716 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 0 L6 The advantage of block splitting is fast acknowledgment of the tool change preparation without interrupting the main run of the NC and the tool change subprogram call in which the NC steps for the tool change procedure are carried out approach change position put the spindle into position etc The Prepare tool change and Execute tool change jobs are issued in succession at the user interface and each must be acknowledged individually The user interface always behaves identically irrespective of whether T and M6 are programmed in one block or successively in different blocks The chronological sequence is shorter than for simultaneous acknowledgment of Prepare tool change and Execute tool
320. ogram has finished running restart the NC NCK reset Further information e The configuration of a disk type magazine with fixed location coding is performed as for the configuration of a revolver magazine Example Turning machine with revolver magazine MAG_CONF_MPF Page 342 e You will find a precise description of the parameters used in the Tool Management Function Manual of SINUMERIK 840D sl ONF_MPF 1 Plant configuration 1 chain magazine with 8 locations can be set up in N40 1 loading point 3 buffer locations can be set up in N50 assignments from N540 2 Part program 7 MAG CONF MPF N10 def int NUM MAG MAG TYPE LOCATIONS PLACE NUM BUFFER NUM LOAD PLACE SEARCH N20 NUM MAG 1 Number of the magazine N30 MAG TYPE 1 Magazine type 1 chain 3 revolver 5 box magazine 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 355 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine N40 LOCATIONS 8 N50 NUM BUFFER 3 N60 NUM LOAD 1 N70 PLACE SEARCH 12289 7 257 Bitl3 0 no exchange of the old tool Setting for pickup magazine Setting for chain magazine N80 N90 7Check parameters 00 STOPRE 10 if NUM_MAG 0 or LOCATIONS 0 20 Errl STOPRE 30 MSG Wrong Parameter gt Cancel 40 G04 F4 50 STOPRE 60 MO 70 GOTOB Errl 80 endif 90 200 Magazine configuration 210 220 230 if NUM MAG 240 TC_MAP1 0 0 250 TC_DP1 0 0 0 260 STOPRE 270 e
321. ommissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the drive 4 2 3 4 2 Terminal assignments Terminal assignment on X122 for a Numeric Control Extension Terminal assignment X122 on the NX Pin no Function Assignment BICO source sink 1 Input Infeed ready signal NX r0722 0 Drive p0864 2 Input OFF3 quick stop NX r0722 1 Each drive Function Braking with a configurable OFF3 2nd OFF3 p0849 ramp p1135 p1136 p1137 thereafter pulse suppression and switching on inhibited The drive comes to a controlled stop The braking response can be set separately for each servo behavior similar to that of terminal 64 3 Input SH SBC 1 Group 1 NX r0722 2 p9620 all drives in the SINAMICS Safety Integrated group SH enable p9601 4 Input SH SBC 1 Group 2 NX r0722 3 p9620 all drives in the SINAMICS Safety Integrated group SH enable p9601 Ground for pins 1 4 Ground for pins 7 8 10 11 Output SH SBC 1 Group 1 NX p0738 p9774 1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated BICO from CU after the 1st drive in the group 8 Output SH SBC 1 Group 2 NX p0739 p9774 1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated BICO from CU after the 1st drive in the group 9 Ground for pins 7 8 10 11 10 Input BERO 1 zero mark substitute NX r0722 10 Drive p0489 2 Input Probe 2 Distributed measurement NX p0680 1 0 Every drive on NX p0489 p0728 bit 10 0 Index encoders 1 2 3 2 11 Input
322. on You can test the switching function of the probe by manually deflecting it and checking the following PLC interface signals DB2700 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions To test the switching behavior and the measured value transfer use an NC test program with for example the following NC commands MEAS Measuring with delete distance to go AC_MEA n Checking of the switching operation n measuring input number AA_MW axis name Measured value of the axes in workpiece coordinates AA_MM axis name Measured value of the axes in machine coordinates Example Test program Program code Comment N N N N N Zz N N N N N Turning and Milling N SPAT 00 05 10 15 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 PRUEF_MESSTASTER MPF H _N MPF DIR DEF INT MTSIGNAL G17 G54 T 3D Taster D1 M06 GO G90 X0 F150 MEAS 1 G1 X100 MTSIGNAL AC_MEA 1 IF MTSIGNAL 0 GOTOF _FEHL1 R1 SAA_MM X R2 SAA MW X MO M30 _FEHL1 MSG Probe does not switch MO M30 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Test program probe connection Bit memory to check the switching status Select tool geometry for probe Activate tool Starting position and measuring speed Measurement at measuring input 1 in the X axis Switching operation at the 1st measuring input completed YES NO Sig
323. on of the data in the oem and addon directories Delete OEM data All the data under oem and addon is deleted OEM archives OEM alarm texts Easy Screen application PLC stop PLC is stopped NOTICE Replacement of the system CompactFlash card between different PPUs Because of the system related dependency between the CompactFlash card and SRAM for the data storage in the SINUMERIK 828D the system CompactFlash card should be considered as a permanently installed EEPROM and should not be replaced If this has to be performed for imperative reasons the replacement of the system CompactFlash card is detected during startup because of the stored serial number The reaction of the control is the loading of saved during startup backup was performed previously with Save data softkey If no stored data is found a startup is performed automatically with the NCK default data Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 17 Scope of delivery and requirements 1 4 Starting up the control Empty RTC capacitor If the RTC capacitor is discharged the following message is issued during startup Empty RTC capacitor YD Detected empty RTC capacitor Date and Time is incorrect Do you want to set date and time now ve e You can then reset the date and time Adjust date and time MMiddivyyy hh mm ss 292009 4140632 Cancel The capacitor is then
324. oned at the changing point of the new tool 2 0 1 9998 2 Tool change Tool from magazine to gripper 1 3 9998 1 9998 3 Tool change Tool from spindle to gripper 2 4 9998 2 9998 1 Tool change Tool from gripper 1 to spindle 5 9998 3 0 2 Tool change Tool from gripper 2 to magazine 328 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management Example Variable transfer step table Example as a complete step Turning and Milling 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Transfer Address Name Start value Comment step DB9901 101 0 0 SrcMag_101 1 Source magazine number of the transfer step 2 0 SrcPos_101 0 Source position number of the transfer step 4 0 DstMag_101 9998 Target magazine number of the transfer step 6 0 DstPos_101 1 Target position number of the transfer step 102 8 0 SrcMag_102 1 Source magazine number of the transfer step 10 0 SrcPos_102 0 Source position number of the transfer step 12 0 DstMag_102 9998 Target magazine number of the transfer step 14 0 DstPos_102 2 Target position number of the transfer step Transfer from to Comment step Magazine Location Magazine Location 101 1 0 9998 1 Prepare tool change The magazine is positioned at the changing point The source position must be entered by the PLC user program 102 1 0 9998 2 Prepare tool change Tool from magazine to buffer The source
325. onfiguring the CLIVE eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee irinna EEL n eE EEANN EEEE EEEa aa 67 4 1 1 Example ofa drive Configuration s sisses SEA 67 4 1 2 Example How to configure the drive ccccccccecceceecceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeesaaeeeaeeseaneeseeeessneeees 69 4 1 3 Example How to configure the infeed cccccecccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeseeceaesaeeeeseeesaesaeeeeeeseee aeons 76 4 1 4 Example How to configure the external encoder essssssssreserraersnnsneennddrsnnattnnannannnnennaananna annn 18 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 7 Table of contents 4 1 5 Example How to assign the AX S 0 0 eeecececeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeeesenaeeeseeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeseena teens 83 4 1 6 Example Setting machine data for an axis Spindle cccccceseceeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeeee 88 4 1 7 Parameters for the axis spindle test run cccccceeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeesecseaeeeeeeesesennieeeeesaaeas Bo 4 2 Terminal ASSIGMIMENNS oa isce ieee cased ctsieivce va sheite A S AA AA 91 4 2 1 Terminal assignment ON X122 ooo eee ceeeeeeeete eee eee eete ee ee tate eee aeee seta aeeeesaaeeeeeseeeeetaeeeessineeereeeenss OT 4 2 2 Terminal assignment On A T32 ic eciseceee cies auacdeeeeecsteet seat E eae eee eens yz 4 2 3 Terminal assignment on X122 for a Numeric Control Extension 0 ccceeeeeeeeeesteeeeetteeeeeeaaes 93 4 2 4 Example Cir
326. or manufacturer When assigning a new file name ensure that only files with a maximum name length of 49 characters can be managed Settings that have been made take effect only after restarting the HMI Copying inserting opening a file Procedure 1 Select the Start up operating area 2 Press the System data softkey The directory structure is displayed 3 Open the required directory e g System CF Card siemens sinumerik hmi cfg in the System CF Card directory under siemens 4 Position the cursor on the desired file 5 Press the Copy softkey 6 Open the directory to which you wish to save the copied file e g System CF Card user sinumerik hmi cfg in the System CF Card directory under user 7 Press the Paste softkey If a file of the same name already exists you receive a message You can overwrite or rename the file 8 Press the OK softkey 9 You can open the selected file in the editor by pressing the Open softkey OR 10 Press the lt INPUT gt key OR 11 Double click the highlighted file Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 389 References A 4 Directory structure on the CompactFlash card Editing XML files externally To create or edit an XML file on an external PC with Windows use a text editor such as TextPad The TextPad text editor supports the UTF 8 encoding required for the XML file Saving the XML file in UTF 8 coding 1
327. or Modules booksize can be connected to one DRIVE CLIiQ line in servo mode must be connected to separate DRIVE CLiQ lines in vector mode e The Line Module chassis Active Line Basic Line Smart Line and the Motor Modules chassis must be connected to separate DRIVE CLiQ lines e Motor Modules in chassis format with different current controller cycles must be connected to separate DRIVE CLiQ lines For this reason chassis Motor Modules and booksize Motor Modules must be connected to separate DRIVE CLiQ lines Turning and Milling 394 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 References A 6 Rules for wiring with DRIVE CLIQ e The Voltage Sensing Module VSM should be connected to a free DRIVE CLiQ port of the corresponding Active Line Module Motor Module due to automatic assignment of the VSM For exceptions see the rules for firmware version V2 4 and V2 5 e The sampling times p0115 0 and p4099 of all components that are connected to a DRIVE CLiQ line must be divisible by one another with an integer result If the current controller sampling time on a DO has to be changed to another pattern that does not match the other DOs on the DRIVE CLiQ line the following options are available Reconnect the DO to a separate DRIVE CLiQ line Also change the current controller sampling time and the sampling time of the inputs outputs of the DO not involved so that they again fit into the time grid Note
328. orientation capability from the work offset of the rotary axis 0 In CYCLE800 the WCS is recalculated when there is a value in the work offset WO of the rotary axes 1 A value in the WO of the rotary axes acts as offset of the tool holder that has orientation capability The WCS remains unchanged MD21186 may not be rewritten in a program with call CYCLE800 If several swivel data sets are declared per channel and if machine functions need to be activated on changeover between swivel heads or tables an M command can be issued in the PLC user program on switchover to another swivel data set MD22530 MC_TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE M code for swivel data set change 0 No swivel data set change lt 0 M code number of the swivel data set for the swivel data set change Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 155 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Example MD22530 MC_TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE 800 Number of swivel data sets in channel 1 2 Programming swivel data set 1 TCARR 1 M801 Programming swivel data set 2 TCARR 2 M802 With the output of the M commands the PLC can for example limit or invert the spindle speed or clamp or release the rotary axes Kinematics with Hirth tooth system swivel head mixed kinematics Depending on the active plane G17 G18 G19 the TOROT command or TOROTX TOROTY is programmed in the NCU G group 53 to calculate the compensating frame for
329. ors that are detected directly by the tool management in the NC before an acknowledgment is sent by the PLC user program do not result in the setting of bit 100 1 If an error is present that prevents transfer of the acknowledgment to the tool management error status 1 to 7 the error is only output on the interface of the tool management and not by the NC no NC alarm If necessary signal such errors with a user PLC alarm in the PLC user program This signal remains pending statically until the error has been acknowledged set the bit Reset acknowledgment error DB4200 DBX9 0 by the user The interface in DB42xx DBBO to DBB3 is disabled if bit acknowledgment error is pending Incoming acknowledgment bits are not evaluated by the PLC firmware and are also cleared when bit Reset acknowledgment error is set Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 309 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Error status If there is an error the error status DB43xx DBB104 contains a diagnostic number unequal to zero Status Meaning No error Multiple acknowledgment signals at the same time Acknowledgment without job Invalid transfer step number There is no job for a position specification al RI w lym gt o 7 The status does not permit a location change acknowledgment status 0 is used An impermissible acknowledgment status has been used Other values The num
330. otor 3 Synchronous motor 2 PP 72 48D 2 2A PN Induction motor Synchronous motor 1 Figure 1 1 Configuration example Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 13 Scope of delivery and requirements 1 2 Toolbox CD and other available tools 1 2 Toolbox CD and other available tools Toolbox CD The Toolbox CD for SINUMERIK 828D has the following content e PLC Programming Tool for Integrated PLC e Commissioning software for SINAMICS 120 e PLC Library example PLC Programming Tool for Integrated PLC The following tool is available for programming the PLC PLC Programming Tool for Integrated PLC For the rest of this manual this will be referred to using the abbreviation Programming Tool Commissioning software for SINAMICS S120 Until the SINAMICS 120 commissioning functionality is completely available via the user interface drive configuration and optimization is performed using the commissioning software for SINAMICS S120 The PC is connected using the Ethernet interface on the front of the SINUMERIK 828D Note Ordering data You can find the ordering data for the following tools in Catalog NC 61 RCS Commander The RCS Commander Remote Control System is a tool the commissioner can use to exchange files between the PC and the control very easily using drag and drop For data transmission the PC is connected directly to the Ethernet interface on the front of the control
331. oupling of the probe carrier spindle with coordinate rotation around the infeed axis default setting 1 The position of the probe carrier spindle at the time that the cycle started is used as the initial position for the measurement Note After changing this setting data the probe must be recalibrated D55761 SCS_J_MEA_SET_NUM_OF_ATTEMPTS Number of measurements at a measuring point 0 Five measurements at every measuring point The arithmetic average is generated 1 One measurement at every measuring point default setting Turning and Milling 192 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions D55762 SCS_J_MEA_SET_RETRAC_MODE Retraction velocity from the measuring point 0 Retraction velocity corresponding to the intermediate positioning default setting 1 Retraction with rapid traverse D55763 SCS_J_MEA_SET_FEED_MODE Selection of the measuring feedrate 0 Measuring with the measuring feedrate default setting 1 1 Measuring with the feedrate corresponding to the channel specific setting data SD55633 SCS_MEA_FEED_FAST_MEASURE 2 Measuring with measuring feedrate If you are using a monoprobe set the following general machine and channel specific setting data A monoprobe only switches in one direction of motion MD51612 MNS_MEA_MONO_COR_POS_ACTIVE Alignment
332. pe Data type of the value QString DisableSearch Disable the subject keyword search for the help book Attributes 0 1 value true false type type data type of the value bool DisableFullTextSearch Disable the full text search for the help book Attributes 0 1 value true false type type data type of the value bool Disablelndex Disable the subject index for the help book Attributes 0 1 value true false type type data type of the value bool DisableContent Disable the table of contents for the help book 0 1 Attributes value true false type type data type of the value bool DefaultLanguage Abbreviation for the language that should be displayed if the actual country language is available for the help book 0 1 Attributes value chs cht deu eng esp fra ita kor ptb type Data type of the value QString The following applies to the Number column means 0 or several Example of a slhip xml file The help book hmi_myhelp xml is configured in the following example the subject index is not activated lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt lt DOCTYPE CONFIGURATION gt lt CONFIGURATION gt lt OnlineHelpFiles gt lt hmi_myhelp gt lt EntriesFile value hmi_myhelp xml type QString gt lt DisableIndex value true type bool gt lt hmi_myhelp gt lt OnlineHelpFiles gt
333. pecified tool types the tool lengths and the tool radii can be measured Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 189 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Set the general setting data S D54798 SNS_J_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_TOOL 4 Settings for the input mask measuring in JOG tool measurement Bit 2 1 Activation of the function Measuring with electronic tool probe Set the general machine data MD11602 MN_ASUP_START_MASK Ignore stop reasons for ASUB Bit 0 1 ASUB start possible in the JOG mode MD11604 MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL Priorities from which ASUP_START_MASK is effective 1 64 Priorities for ASUP_START_MASK Set the channel specific machine data MD20050 MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASIGN_TAB i Assignment geometry axis to channel axis 0 1 Prerequisite for measuring in the JOG mode is that all of the geometry axes must be 2 available preferably XYZ MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Defines the basic control settings after reset TP end 4045H Minimum value Bit 0 1 Bit 2 1 Bit 6 1 Basic control setting after power on and reset Bit 14 1 MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK Definition of the basic control setting after part program start 400H Minimum value Bit 6 0 Definition of the basic control setting after NC start Turning and Milli
334. r is set Error status If there is an error the error status DB41xx DBB104 contains a diagnostic number unequal to zero Status Meaning 0 No error 1 Multiple acknowledgment signals at the same time 2 Acknowledgment without job 3 Invalid transfer step number 4 There is no job for a position specification 5 The status does not permit a location change acknowledgment status 0 is used 7 An impermissible acknowledgment status has been used Other values The number corresponds to the error message of the tool management in the NCK caused by this transfer The error status is reset by acknowledgment of the error by the user Map of acknowledgments DB41xx DBB108 to DBB111 The acknowledgments last set by the PLC user program DB40xx DBB0 to DBB3 are set and reset by the PLC firmware together with the bits Acknowledgment OK or Acknowledgment error If there is an error the user uses these statically pending bits to see which acknowledgment step triggered the error If the PLC user program incorrectly sets multiple acknowledgment bits these are also entered one to one in the map Job status DB4100 41xx Signals from tool management r xx Load location Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBW124 Current magazine number of the tool INT DBW126 Current location number of the tool INT DBW128 Target magazine number of the tool INT DBW130 Tar
335. r the device e Identifier for commissioning the device e Identifier for activating the device e Identifier for deactivating the device e Identifier for testing the device Identifier lt tag gt Meaning AGM Identifier for Easy Extend DEVICE Identifier for the description of the device Attribute option_bit The device is assigned a fixed bit number for the option management NAME The identifier specifies the name of the device to be displayed in the dialog If a text reference is used the dialog displays the text which is saved for the identifier START_UP The identifier contains a description of the sequences required for commissioning the device Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 239 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Identifier lt tag gt Meaning SET_ACTIVE The identifier contains a description of the sequences required to activate the device SET_INACTIVE The identifier contains a description of the sequences required to shut down the device TEST The identifier contains the statements for testing the operating capability of a device UID Unique numerical identifier to identify the device in the PLC HMI interface VERSION Identifier for a version Negative acknowledgment of the function execution With the automatically provided variable actionresult the system can inform the XML parser of a negative execution result If th
336. rchive Control components can be saved individually or jointly Creating a separate series start up archive for each component is recommended so that the files can be read in again independently of each other The access level Service is required Create Series start up 376 Procedure 1 Select the Start up operating area 2 Press the menu forward key and then the Series start up softkey The Series Start up window opens 3 Select the option Create series start up with the lt SELECT gt key and confirm with OK The Create Series Start up window opens Create series start up Use Easy Archive data class archives O All MANUFACTURER Data which are valid for the entire machine series OINDIVIDUAL Machine specific data compensations reference points OUSER User data programs tools zero points Control components NE data VIJPLC data Drive data ACX format binary O ASCII format CHMI data Comment Created by archive ia shed Series start u Figure 10 1 Create archive Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Series start up 10 2 How to create and read in a series start up archive Choose whether the data classes should be ignored or considered using the lt SELECT gt key Select ignored to archive all data belonging to the control component Select considered to write only the data in th
337. re 6 8 Swivel head 2 HEAD_2 Commissioning softkey Swivel kinematics example 2 Kinematics Swivel head HEAD_2 Retract Z Tool direction Max inc X Y Z 200 000 Offset vector 11 0 000 172 000 265 800 Rotary axis vector V1 0 000 1 000 0 000 Offset vector 2 0 000 172 000 172 000 Rotary axis vector V2 0 000 1 000 1 000 Offset vector 13 0 000 0 000 93 800 Display version Swivel mode Axis by axis Direction reference Rotary axis 2 Rotary axes Rotary axis 1 B Mode Manual Angular range 0 000 360 000 Kinematics offset 0 000 Hirth tooth system yes Angular grid 1 000 Rotary axis 2 C Mode Manual 169 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Kinematics Angular range Swivel head 0 000 HEAD_2 180 000 Kinematics offset 0 000 Calculation of rotary axis vector V2 45 degree angle V2Y sin 45 0 7071 V2z cos 45 0 7071 V2Y and V2z can be normalized to 1 The reference point of the pivot point of rotary axes 1 and 2 can be offset on the line of rotation and does not have to coincide with the mechanical pivot point 6 5 8 Example of the commissioning of a cardanic table Cardanic table TABLE_45 The vectors relate to the initial setting of the kinematics Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V2 Offset vector 12 Offset vector I3 Offset vector 14 Side view of the machine Rotary axis B rotates around Y and around
338. reate configuration file Procedure 1 Copy the configuration file oem_slaesvcconf xml from the siemens sinumerik hmi template cfg directory Insert the file into directory oem sinumerik hmi cfg or user sinumerik hmi cfg OR Press the HMI gt Alarm texts gt softkey in the Start up operating area As soon as an entry is made the alarmtexteditor_db_oem_ lt gt xml file is automatically created in the oem sinumerik hmi cfg directory OR Edit the alarmtexteditor_db_oem_ lt gt xml file with an external editor Transfer the file to the oem sinumerik hmi cfg directory The settings become effective only after restarting the HMI Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 49 Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help Overview In addition to the existing system online help you also have the option of creating a manufacturer specific online help and adding this to the operator software This online help is generated in the HTML format i e it comprises HTML documents that are linked with one another The subject being searched for is called in a separate window from a contents or index directory Similar to a document browser e g Windows Explorer a list of possible selections is displayed in the left hand half of the window and when you click the required subject the explanation is displayed i
339. rmanently fixed The blocks are not yet filled with the necessary data The user must edit them in the Programming Tool via the menu View gt Data block The constant tables TM_CTS DB9900 and TM_ACK DB9902 are configured by writing the initial data block values in the Programming Tool The initial data block values are loaded into the control along with the PLC user program Changed initial values are not activated until the PLC is restarted Configuring the transfer steps Any changes to the tool and magazine positions must be communicated to the tool management by the PLC user program A table of all mechanical single movements which should be acknowledged communicated helps with this For each tool transfer the table contains the corresponding tool start and target position or for positioning a magazine location at a transfer point change load unload point the magazine position and the name of the transfer point e The transfer steps 1 64 are permanently configured in TM_CTS DB9900 and can be changed only by reloading e The transfer steps 101 164 in TM_VTS DB9901 can be completely or partially overwritten by the PLC user program e g by entering the current magazine location Coding for position from a job Turning and Milling In the constant transfer step table the locations of real magazines are not identified by their actual values e g 1 14 for magazine 1 location 14 but with symbolic values 0 1
340. rmation 1 in the channel 0 No transformation As of 256 TRANSMIT transformation As of 512 TRACYL transformation 512 TRACYL transformation without groove side offset 514 TRACYL with additional linear axis and with groove side offset MD24110 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 Axis assignment for the 1st transformation in the channel 0 3 Channel axis Infeed axis tool axis perpendicular radial to the rotary axis Z 1 4 Channel axis Rotary axis A 2 1 Channel axis 1st axis of the machining plane parallel to the rotary axis X 3 2 Channel axis 2nd axis of the machining plane Y Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 119 Configuring cycles 6 3 Milling MD24120 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 Assignment of the geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 1 0 1 Channel axis 1st geometry axis X 1 4 Channel axis 2nd geometry axis A 2 3 Channel axis 3rd geometry axis Z MD24800 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation MD24805 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 1 Axial offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation MD24810 MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 1 Sign of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation MD24820 MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 i Vector of base tool for the 1st TRACYL transformation in XYZ 0 0 1
341. rom the point of view of the user With an inverter system e g gt SINAMICS S the supply is ensured by means of gt Line Modules thereby realizing a DC link to which the gt Inverters gt Motor Modules are connected The gt Control Unit is implemented as a separate device and connected to the other components by means of gt DRIVE CLiQ Drive component Hardware component connected to a gt Control Unit via gt DRIVE CLiQ or in some other way Drive components include gt Motor Modules gt Line Modules gt Motors gt Sensor Modules and gt Terminal Modules The overall arrangement of a Control Unit including the connected drive components is known as the gt Drive unit Drive line up A drive line up comprises a gt Control Unit as well as the gt Motor Modules and gt Line Modules connected via gt DRIVE CLiQ Drive object DO A drive object is a self contained software function with its own gt parameters and if necessary its own gt Faults and gt Alarms Drive objects may exist by default e g onboard I O can be created individually e g gt Terminal Board 30 TB30 or also as multiples e g gt Servo control As a rule each drive object has its own window for parameterization and diagnostic purposes Drive parameters Parameters of a drive axis that include for example the parameters of the corresponding controllers as well as the motor and encoder data The parameters of the higher level
342. rom to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 101 1 n 9998 1 The variable location in magazine 1 DB9901 DBWO is positioned at the changing point to the spindle n is the actual location number n 0 to be entered by the PLC user program in the variable transfer table gt continue with Step 4 Step 3 Positioning the magazine location from the old tool to the changing point lt Previous step Step 1 Same as Step 2 however the magazine target location is obtained from DB4300 DBW20 location number for old tool target Acknowledgment to TM Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status ment step tool tool 4 DB4200 DBX0 4 101 0 204 Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 101 1 n 9998 1 The variable location in magazine 1 DB9901 DBWO is positioned at the changing point to the spindle n is the actual location number n 0 to be entered by the PLC user program in the variable transfer table gt continue with Step 4 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 363 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Step 4 Acknowledge prepare tool change job Previous step Step 2 or Step 3 With this the preparation for the tool change is complete for many systems Acknowledgment to TM Acknowledg Ackno
343. rrl 80 endif 90 Magazine configuration 200 Va o ea tee te ee a a a 210 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 343 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine 220 230 240 if NUM_MAG TC_MAP1 0 0 250 260 270 TC_DP1 0 0 0 STOPRE endif Configuration t Magazine Set up magazine Magazine locations 430 for 440 STOPRE 450 TC_MPP1 NUM_MAG P 460 TC_ ZDBm Be we MPP2 NUM MAG P 4 Ss 70 TC_MPP3 NUM_ MAG P 480 Ur TC_MPP4 NUM_MAG P 490 U TC_MPP5 NUM_MAG P 500 endfor Bo o Bm a 510 STOPRE N520 N530 TC_MAP1 9998 7 344 N280 TC_MAMP2 PLACE SEARCH 17 1 1 al 0 0 LACE LACE LACE LACE LACE LOCATIONS N290 TC_MAP1 NUM_MAG MAG TYPE N300 N310 if MAG TYPE N320 TC_MAP3 NUM MAG 81 N330 else N340 TC_MAP3 NUM _MAG N350 endif N360 TC_MAP4 NUM MAG N370 TC_MAP5 NUM MAG N380 TC_MAP6 NUM MAG N390 TC_MAP8 NUM MAG N400 TC_MAP9 NUM MAG N410 TC_MAP7 NUM MAG N420 TC_MAP10 N UM_MAG PLACE SEARCH PLACE 1 to LOCATIONS Definition of buffer magazine Delete old data when magazine 1 is set up Delete magazine Delete Tools Type of search strategy TC_MAP2 NUM_MAG MAGAZINE lt lt NUM_ MAG Magazine status all locations fixed location coded for revolver magazine
344. rs can be incorporated in the gt Motor gt Motor encoder or mounted on the external mechanics gt External encoder Depending on the type of movement a distinction is made between rotary encoders also called shaft encoders and translatory encoders e g gt Linear encoder In terms of measured value provision we distinguish between gt Absolute encoders code sensors and gt Incremental encoders See gt Incremental encoder TTL HTL gt Incremental encoder sin cos 1 Vpp gt Resolver External encoder Position encoder that is not built in or mounted on the gt Motor but is attached outside to the working machine or via a mechanical intermediate element The external encoder externally mounted encoder is used for direct position detection Infeed Input component of a converter system for generating a DC link voltage for feeding one or several gt Motor Modules including all components required such as gt Line Modules fuses reactors line filters and firmware as well as proportional computing power if required in a gt Control Unit Line Module A Line Module is a power component which creates the DC link voltage for one or several gt Motor Modules from a three phase mains voltage The following three Line Module types are used for SINAMICS gt Basic Line Module gt Smart Line Module and gt Active Line Module The overall function of an infeed including the required additional components such as gt Line r
345. rved for the tool 204 Communicate magazine position The magazine location is in the change load unload point of the specified target location 322 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 4 PLC Program Blocks Overview of evaluated table parameters Acknowledgment status 1 3 6 7 99 105 201 204 New tool Transfer step x x x x x e from magazine XX XX e from location XX XX e to magazine XX XX XX XX ZZ e to location XX XX XX XX ZZ Old tool Transfer step x x x e from magazine 2 xx e from location XX e to magazine XX XX XX e to location XX XX XX Legend Date not relevant x Number 1 n of the transfer step from the transfer step table XX Magazine number location number of the tool ZZ Magazine number location number of the load unload or changing point The status overview issues the following information e Depending on their meaning the states 1 6 105 201 and 204 should be combined in the acknowledgment table with the transfer steps to make useful acknowledgment steps e If status 1 is coded with both transfer step numbers 0 this acknowledgment step serves as an end acknowledgment of the current status reached via intermediate acknowledgments e If atool has been moved for a re
346. ry axis Y axis not available 2 2 3rd real geometry axis Z axis Turning and Milling 136 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 0 1 Bit 7 0 TRAANG is retained after ramp up MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK Bit 7 1 TRAANG is retained after Cycle start MD20118 MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET 1 Permit automatic change of the geometry axes MD20140 MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE 5 TRAANG always active after reset MD20144 MC_TRAFO_MODE_MASK Bit 0 1 TRAANG runs in the background persistent and is not shown on the user interface MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 4 5 Channel axis YC 5th machine axis MD20080 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB Ii Name of channel axis in the channel 0 XC 1st channel axis XC 1 ZC 2nd channel axis ZC 2 C 3rd channel axis C 3 WZ 4th channel axis WZ 4 YC 5th channel axis YC Data set for inclined axis MD24430 MC_TRAFO_TYPE_5 1024 Transformation 5 TRAANG MD24432 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_5 i Axis assignment for transformation 5 0 5 1st transformation axis channel axis YC 1 1 2nd transformation axis channel axis XC 2 2 3rd transformation axis channel axis ZC Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 137 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning MD244
347. s Programming Identifier FILE Syntax lt file name lt archive name gt gt lt file name lt archive name gt create true class lt data classes gt group lt area gt gt Attributes name Identifier for the file name class Specifies the data classes that are to be contained in the archive If several data classes are to be saved the classes should be separated by a blank The following data classes can be specified e user e manufacturer e individual create A commissioning archive is created under the specified name in the dvm archives directory If the class attribute is not specified it is a standard archive with NC PLC HMI and drive data group Specifies the data groups that are to be contained in the archive If several data groups are to be saved the groups should be separated by a blank The following data groups can be contained in the archive e NC e PLC e HMI e DRIVES Turning and Milling 244 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend Example 8 5 Description of the script language 7 Or 8 5 9 FUNCTION Description lt Create data class archive gt lt file name user arc create true class user manufacturer individual group ne ple hmi gt lt Read archive into the control a lt file name user arc gt lt file name user ard gt Function call This identifier carries out the function specified under the attrib
348. s default setting 1 Coupling of the spindle position probe in the spindle with coordinate rotation around the infeed axis D55625 SCS_MEA_AVERAGE_VALUE I Number of mean values 0 Default setting Turning and Milling 202 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions The following setting data is written by the measuring cycles with the calibrate measuring function User parameterization is not necessary here SD54600 SNS_MEA_WP_BALL_DIAM i Effective diameter of the probe ball of the workpiece probe SD54601 SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX 1 i Trigger point minus direction 1st measuring axis in the plane SD54602 SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1 i Trigger point plus direction 1st measuring axis in the plane SD54603 SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point minus direction 2nd measuring axis in the plane SD54604 SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point plus direction 2nd measuring axis in the plane SD54605 SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3 i Trigger point plus direction 3rd measuring axis in the plane SD54606 SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3 i Trigger point minus direction 3rd measuring axis opposite to the tool direction In the default case 0 SD54607 SNS_MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX1 I Positional deviation 1st measuring axis in the plane SD54608 SNS
349. s an empty location search in the target magazine for the tool on the defined source location Subsequently the PLC receives a job for relocating the tool user interface DB41xx DBBO The target magazine must be a real magazine Parameter assignment Starting program instance services in the NCK area PI service Address Signal Valid values Job DB1200 DBX4000 0 Start 0 1 DB1200 DBB4001 PI index 5 Parameter DB1200 DBW4004 Tool number 1 31999 internal T number DB1200 DBW4006 Source location number 1 31999 DB1200 DBW4008 Source magazine number 1 31999 DB1200 DBW4010 Target location number 1 DB1200 DBW4012 Target magazine number 1 32000 Result DB1200 DBX5000 0 Job completed 0 1 DB1200 DBX5000 1 Error in job 0 1 Application Examples e When using buffers to return the tool for example Toolboy and or shifter an explicit empty location search in the magazine may be needed during the asynchronous return transport In this case the PLC does not have to note the original location the PI service searches for a suitable location e A tool is to be moved from a background magazine to the front magazine Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 335 Tool management 9 5 Example Loading unloading 9 5 Example Loading unloading Programming For loading tools are placed directly in the magazine or the spindle for unloading they are r
350. s device or are not completely compatible with it you can obtain information on compatibility from the memory card manufacturer or supplier The CompactFlash card from SanDisk CompactFlash 5000 Industrial Grade has been approved for SINUMERIK Order Number 6FC5313 5AG00 0AA0 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Table of contents PR OTACS EE AA scien saci tea eahs cade sede dugsetcnca E A sl celuxas S 3 1 Scope of delivery and requireMent ccccsccccessneceecessneeeesseeeeeesseeeeessensesssseneeeeseeeeeessueesessessaeeeeeseneess 13 1 1 SYSTSMOVENVIGW fo c2iccedeterte cance necadentavedeecs ipsten E hud cit E cant eedeen ieee 13 1 2 Toolbox CD and other available tools 0 ecccceccecceceeeeeeecneeeeeeeeseceaeeeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeseseesieeeeeeeaees 14 1 3 This is the general sequence for COMMISSIONING 2 eeeecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeesentaeeneess 15 1 4 Slarting Up the Control soss apuuees eiuecet peasant ceedanes apdedts ipenuzecaseceitesiineedZect epee 16 1 5 Communication with the Control cccceceecceceee cece eeeeceenaee cece see aaaeeeeeesescaacaeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeeeseeeees 19 1 5 1 How to communicate with the control using the Programming TOOlI ccceseeeeeeeeeeteeee 19 1 5 2 Example How to communicate with the control using the NCU Connection Wizard Z3 1 5 3 How to communicate with the control using the RCS Command
351. s necessary MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT If no cutting edge is programmed after a tool change the cutting edge number set in MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT is used MD number Name Value 10715 0 M_NO_FCT_CYLE 6 M version 10716 0 M_NO_FCT_CYLCLE_NAME L6 M version 10717 T_NO_FCT_CYLCLE_NAME TCHANGE T version 17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS 0 20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER 1 20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 1 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK 181400F T version 180400F M version 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 T version 1 M version 22560 TOOL_CHANGE_MCODE 206 22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE 0 for manual tool MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT Basic setting of tool cutting edge without programming DWORD gt 0 Number of the cutting edge that is selected with M206 Cutting edge selection is also active if followed by D programming Default setting No cutting edge is initially active after a tool change Any tool offset active before tool change is deselected corresponds to DO Cutting edge selection only active with D programming Tool edge number of old tool also applies to new tool Tool edge offset of old tool remains active until D is programmed The setting in MD20270 affects the block preparation of the NC To prevent preprocessing stop from occurring when tool change command is called until it is acknowledged again perform NC functions witho
352. s started the position of the tool probe in the workpiece coordinate system WCS must be roughly entered into the following general setting data In this case the reference points are the outer diameter and the tool length of the active tool in the spindle If there is no tool in the spindle the reference points are the spindle center point and the tool reference point at the spindle NOTICE When measuring tools ensure that the data of the adjustable work offset and the basic reference always correspond to the data when calibrating measuring in WCS Always make measurements and calibrate with the same adjustable work offset Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 207 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54640 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1 i Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in the negative direction 0 SD54641 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1 i Trigger point of the 1st measuring axis in the positive direction 0 D54642 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in the negative direction 0 SD54643 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point of the 2nd measuring axis in the positive direction 0 SD54644 SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3 i Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in the negative direction 0 SD54645 S
353. s the following identifiers e Data class S l M U e Type of control 828D TE or 828D ME e Time stamp Date and time when the archive was created e Version designation Software version with which this archive was created e Serial number of the system CompactFlash card These markings allow filters to be set when reading in determining which archive may be read in to which control variant depending on the data class and the software version Compatibility of the data SINUMERIK 802D sl PLC archives can be transferred to a SINUMERIK 828D control variant using the Programming Tool Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 373 Series start up 10 1 Series start up and archiving 10 1 When should you back up the start up data Backing up and restoring data Data areas 374 Series start up and archiving The following times are recommended for performing a data backup e After start up e After changing machine specific settings e After the replacement of a hardware component e Before a software upgrade To back up and restore data select in the Start up operating area e Save data softkey for an internal data backup of the entire memory e Series startup softkey Create series start up Read in the series start up The following data areas are backed up during series start up Components NC data Data e Machine data e Setting data e Option data e
354. selection Setting data a Work gt User offset R luariabia Figure 9 4 Turning machine tool list 9 7 2 Example Acknowledgment steps turning machine Acknowledgment steps Generally the mechanical sequences on a turning machine are simpler than those for a milling machine In the configuration described in the previous chapter without additional buffer tool changes can be acknowledged after the mechanical movements without transfer steps The PLC user program must detect incoming jobs in the job interfaces and execute the mechanical movements Total acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status step tool tool DB4000 DBX0 0 99 DB4200 DBX0 0 99 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 347 Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine 9 7 3 Network 1 DB4300 DBx0 0 Figure 9 5 DB4200 DBx0 0 s Programming in PLC user program An asynchronous message can be used for magazine movements without a job from the tool management Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status step tool tool XXX DB4000 DBXx x 101 0 204 Transfer step Source Objective Comment Magazine Location Magazine Location 101 1 n 9998 1 The variable loca
355. served DBB5 Reserved DBW6 Source magazine number INT DBW8 Source location number INT DBW10 Target magazine number INT DBW12 Target location number INT DBW14 Load unload HMI gt PLC without moving magazine Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 299 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Signal description e Job The interface contains a job Job processing has not yet been completed with an end acknowledgment This signal is reset after transmission of the end acknowledgment to the tool management e Loading The target location parameter s magazine location should be loaded with a tool via the source location parameter s loading station e Unloading The tool in the source location parameter s magazine location should be unloaded to the target location parameter s unloading station e Relocating The tool in the source location parameter s magazine location should be relocated to the target location parameter s magazine location e Positioning The source location parameter s magazine location should be positioned at the target location parameter s change loading unloading station The tool remains in its magazine location e NC program positions magazine The positioning job comes from the part program e Loading unloading without moving magazine HMI sets deletes this signal when requested by the operator If the
356. signed 255 255 255 224 Figure 1 12 Network settings Connection properties Company network X130 g white Network cable inserted T red Network cable not inserted m System 3 Drive utiliz J Turning and Milling 28 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Scope of delivery and requirements Turning and Milling 1 5 Communication with the control Availability The availability describes the percentage of faulty data compared to the entire data volume Problems in the company network e g logical drives that cannot be reached double IP address etc as well as settling time during power up can result in fluctuations in availability O green Greater than 95 yellow 50 95 e red Less than 50 Note All information that is not available is marked in the relevant table line with a hyphen Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 29 Scope of delivery and requirements 7 5 Communication with the control 30 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 1 Access levels Access to functions and machine data The user only has access to information corresponding to a particular access level and the levels below it The machine data is assigned different access levels The access concept controls access to functions and data areas Access levels 0 to 7 are available where 0 represents the highest level
357. sioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 289 Easy Extend 8 8 Examples Turning and Milling 290 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 9 1 Fundamentals Tool management TM The tool management TM function ensures that the right tool is in the right place on the machine at all times Machines magazines loading positions and tool buffers e g spindles grippers form a specific system in which the tools are stored and transported The tool management continually informs the NCK of the current location of the tools and logs it using NC part programs PLC or HMI initiated tool movements During tool management commissioning the specific machine system architecture is mapped in the control For example one or more magazines are set up that are able to pick up tools at their locations The workplace of a tool is described in the control in the form of value pairs magazine number and location number Note Scope of delivery Tool management is included in the scope of delivery for all controls M T version The function Spare tools for tool management duplo tools is an option See also Additional references e SINUMERIK 828D Parameter Manual e A comprehensive description of the tool and magazine parameters and the internal data structure is to be found in gt Description of Functions Tool Management of the SINUMERIK 840D sl As far as the range of functions is concerne
358. ssible irrespective of whether manual tools are allowed If manual tools are permitted this sequence of operations must always be observed when loading via the spindle The tools can be oversized or fixed location coded Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 5 Example Loading unloading Loading via the spindle with preselection of a magazine location You can create a new tool directly on the spindle or using the load dialog move a tool from the tool list which is not located in the magazine to the spindle 1 A job from the tool management is always output at the interface for the loading point You must acknowledge this job 2 Then manually place the tool into the spindle and deposit it in the magazine with TO M6 A free location is selected by the tool management in which the tool can be deposited This sequence is only possible if the manual tools function is not set MD22562 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Bit 1 0 default setting The tools can be oversized or fixed location coded Loading directly into the magazine Turning and Milling Position the relevant magazine location next to the loading position You can create a new tool directly on the chosen free magazine location or using the load dialog move a tool from the tool list which is not located in the magazine to the selected magazine location 1 Ajob from the tool management is always output at the
359. st be deleted so that the changes can take effect and be displayed in the online help Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 OBAO Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help Result The book consists of three chapters with sections HMI sl Milling Programming of contents index Figure 2 7 Example OEM online help Entries in the subject index Keyword 1 topic Keyword 2 Table Keyword 3 of contents i Keyword TEST i Chapter 3 1 index Ghapter 3 2 Figure 2 8 Example Index Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 59 Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specific online help 2 7 5 Example How to create an online help for user PLC alarms Overview If a user PLC alarm is triggered a context sensitive online help can be created for the respective alarm e g with explanation and remedy The online help texts for the user PLC alarms are managed in the following file sinumerik_alarm_oem_plc_pmc htm 08 14 09 700005 Text for user PLC alarm 5 10 38 30 443 AM Help for user PLC alarm 700004 Reaction for user PLC alarm 700004 Restart control Help for user PLC alarm 700005 Reaction for user PLC alarm 700005 Clear alarm with Reset key Help for user PLC alarm 700006 Reaction for user PLC alarm 700006 reference reference Figure 2 9 Example Online help of user PLC alarms Struc
360. stered trademarks of the Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Order number 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Copyright Siemens AG 2009 Industry Sector 10 2009 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Preface SINUMERIK documentation Target group Benefits Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts e General documentation e User documentation e Manufacturer service documentation Information on the following topics is available at http www siemens com motioncontrol docu e Ordering documentation Here you can find an up to date overview of publications e Downloading documentation Links to more information for downloading files from Service amp Support e Researching documentation online Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in DOConWEB e Compiling individual documentation on the basis of Siemens conten
361. string insert Inserting a character string as of the index string delete Page 277 string delete Deleting a number of characters in a character string string insert Page 277 string find Finding a subset of a character string forwards string find Page 278 string reversefind Finding a subset of a character string backwards string reversefind Page 279 string trimleft Removing blanks from the left string trimleft Page 280 string trimright Removing blanks from the right string trimright Page 280 8 6 1 string cmp Description Programming Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Two strings are compared with each other The function gives a return value of zero if the strings are the same a value less than zero if the first string is smaller than the second string or a value greater than zero if the second string is smaller then the first string Designation Syntax Parameters string cmp lt function name string cmp retvar lt int var gt gt str1 str2 lt function gt String 271 Easy Extend 8 6 String functions Example str2 Comparison string rval Result lt let name rval gt 0 lt let gt lt let name str1l type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name String cmp retur
362. surement Correction value for 2nd radius length measurement Correction value for 3rd radius length measurement Correction value for 4th radius length measurement 6 7 12 AUTO Measure tool during turning CYCLE982 Calibration data of the tool probe Measurement in relation to the machine coordinate system MCS Before calibration is started the position of the tool probe in the machine coordinate system MCS must be entered into the following general setting data SD54625 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1 I Trigger point in minus direction of the 1st measuring axis for G18 Z 0 SD54626 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1 Ii Trigger point in plus direction of the 1st measuring axis for G18 Z 0 SD54627 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2 i Trigger point in minus direction of the 2nd measuring axis for G18 X 0 SD54628 SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2 Ii Trigger point in plus direction of the 2nd measuring axis for G18 X 0 Index i stands for the number of the actual data field _PRNUM 1 Measurement in relation to the workpiece coordinate system WCS Before calibration is started the position of the tool probe in the workpiece coordinate system WCS must be roughly entered into the following general setting data In this case the reference point is the outer diameter or the tool length of the active tool in the spindle Turning and Millin
363. swivel cycle CYCLE800 or from the cycles E_LTCARR ShopMill or F_LTCARR ShopTurn In cycle CUST_800 SPF the function markers _M2 to _M59 are prepared and documented Parameters of the CUST_800 SPF manufacturer cycle CUST_800 INT _MODE INT _TC1 REAL _A1 REAL _A2 INT __TC2 REAL _T_POS SAVE DISPLOF 176 _MODE A jump is made to markers _M2 to __M59 _TC1 Number of the swivel head table Al Angle of rotary axis 1 _A2 Angle of rotary axis 2 _TC2 1 Feed evaluation in percent for swiveling in JOG mode 2 Number of the new swivel head table replacement under ShopMill _T_POS Incremental position during retraction in the incremental tool direction see marker _M44 M45 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Retract prior to swiveling If the CUST_800 SPF cycle is not modified the Z axis marker _M41 or the Z axis followed by the X Y axes marker _M42 are first traversed in the MCS to the positions when retracting prior to swiveling The freely available position values are specified in the system variables TC_CARR38 n to TC_CARR40 n When retracting the active tool cutting edge is deselected DO and is reselected after retraction If retraction in the tool direction had been declared the tool axis is retracted to the software end position maximum in tool direction or by an incremental distance away from the tool
364. t possible only minus direction only plus direction both directions Example If the general machine data MD51776 i MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_ALLOW_AX_DIR has the value 123 the tool probe is calibrated as follows in the G17 plane e X in both directions e Y only in plus direction e Z only in minus direction MD51778 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH i Effective diameter of the tool probe for length measurement 0 Default setting Turning and Milling 194 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles 6 7 Measuring cycles and measurement functions MD51780 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD i Effective diameter of the tool probe for radius measurement 0 Default setting MD51782 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_T_EDGE_DIST i Distance between the upper edge of the tool probe and the lower edge of the tool calibration depth measuring depth when measuring the milling cutter radius 2 Default setting Measuring path measuring feedrate General machine data MD51752 MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH Measuring path to measure the tool length 2 Default setting MD51753 MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS Measuring path to measure the tool radius 1 Default setting MD51786 MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_MEASURE_DIST Measuring path to calibrate the probe or for measurements with stationary spindle 10 Default setting
365. t text d gt p107_ content lt print gt Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 267 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 33 XML identifiers for statements Program statements The following identifiers are permissible for statements 268 Identifier lt tag gt Meaning IF Conditional statement IF THEN ELSE The THEN and ELSE tags are included in the IF tag The condition which is stated in the CONDITION tag follows the IF tag The further processing of the statements depends upon the result of the operation If the result of the function is true the THEN branch is executed and the ELSE branch is skipped If the result of the function is false the parser executes the ELSE branch Example lt F gt lt CONDITION gt plc mb170 7 lt CONDITION gt lt THEN gt lt OP gt plc mb170 7 lt OP gt lt TEHN gt lt ELSE gt lt ELSE gt lt IF gt THEN Statement for situations where the condition has been met IF THEN ELSE ELSE Statement for situations where the condition has not been met IF THEN ELSE Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Identifier lt tag gt FOR Meaning The FOR loop is executed as follows 1 The expression initialization INIT is analyzed 2 The expression test CONDITION is analyzed as a Boolean expression If the value is fals
366. ta MD52216 MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL then the settings in the following channel specific setting data are effective SD55481 SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG12 1 Exact stop response 0 Exact stop response as before the cycle call default value 1 G601 2 G602 3 G603 SD55482 SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG21 1 Acceleration behavior 0 Acceleration behavior as before the cycle call default value 1 SOFT 2 BRISK 3 DRIVE SD55483 SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG24 1 Precontrol 0 Precontrol as before the cycle call default value 1 FFWON 2 FFWOF Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 115 Configuring cycles 6 3 Milling 6 3 6 3 1 Milling Technology cycles for milling Contour milling CYCLE63 Channel specific setting data 116 D55214 SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_MILL_SET Milling function mask Bit 0 Basic setting milling in synchronous operation Bit 1 Angle of rotation referred to the center or corner of a rectangular pocket POCKETS When dimensioning rectangular pockets using the corner point the angle of rotation refers to this reference point When dimensioning rectangular pockets using the corner point the angle of rotation refers to the center point of the pocket Depth calculation of the milling cycles with or without safety clearance Depth calculation of the milling cycles
367. tart the search 7 Press the Cancel softkey to cancel the search Other navigation options are e Softkey Go to start The cursor jumps to the first entry of the selected alarm text file e Softkey Go to end The cursor jumps to the last entry of the selected alarm text file See also List of language codes used for file names Page 383 Example How to create an online help for user PLC alarms Page 60 2 6 3 Configuring the alarm log Logging Configure the alarm log in the Diagnostics operating area All alarms and messages are logged in chronological order with their raised and cleared time stamps The exception are messages of the type msg from the NC part program All alarms and messages that are no longer active when the log is displayed are also retained historical alarm events The alarm log is organized as a ring buffer default setting The oldest entries are overwritten with new events in the following cases e When the maximum size is exceeded permissible range 0 32000 e When the events happened before the last time the system was switched on Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 43 Settings on the HMI 2 6 Configuring user alarms Permanent backup See also 2 6 4 To save the alarm log permanently the alarm log is written to the CompactFlash card NOTICE Saving the alarm log For permanent storage the alarm log is written to the CompactFlash c
368. tch settings Access level Switch setting Key color 4 7 0to3 red 5 7 0 to2 green 6 7 0 and 1 black 7 0 Key removal position No key inserted The key operated switch setting must always be edited from the PLC user program and applied to the interface accordingly Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 2 How to set and change the password 2 2 How to set and change the password Set password To change the access level select the Start up operating area 1 Press the Password softkey 2 Press the Set password softkey to open the following dialog Define password Figure 2 1 Set password 3 Enter a password and confirm this with OK or with the lt Input gt key A valid password is acknowledged as set and the currently applicable access level is displayed Invalid passwords will be rejected 4 You must delete the old password before activating a password for a lower access level than the one activated The last valid password is deleted by pressing the Delete password softkey Then the current key operated switch setting is valid Change password To change the password 1 Press the Change password softkey to open the following dialog Change password Figure 2 2 Change password 2 Enter the new password in both fields and then confirm with the OK softkey If both passwords match the new password becomes valid an
369. te and time details are accepted and output on the first line in the current fields Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 35 Settings on the HMI 2 5 Checking and entering licenses 2 5 Use Checking and entering licenses The use of the installed system software and the options activated on a SINUMERIK control system require that the licenses purchased for this purpose are assigned to the hardware In the course of this assignment a license key is generated from the license numbers of the system software the options as well as the hardware serial number Here a license database administered by Siemens is accessed via the Internet Finally the license information including the license key is transferred to the hardware The license database can be accessed using the Web License Manager Web License Manager See also 36 By using the Web License Manager you can assign licenses to hardware in a standard Web browser To conclude the assignment the license key must be entered manually on the control via the user interface The Internet address of the Web License Manager is http www siemens com automation license Note SINUMERIK software products If a license key has not been activated or does not exist for a SINUMERIK software product alarm 8080 is output by the control Definitions for license management Page 391 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009
370. ted e fieldtype readonly e The data can be read e fieldtype combobox e Identifiers are shown instead of the data refvar Identifier for a reference variable NC PLC or drive variable hotlink Identifier for a field that is updated TRUE immediately when the data is changed format Identifier for the formatting Note Cyclic update The hotlink attribute results in a cyclic update of the corresponding control This means that If a value is entered the following update cycle overwrites the entered value To avoid this behavior the immediate saving of the entries must be activated with the DATA_ACCESS identifier Example If combo box is selected as the field type the expressions to be displayed must also be defined The lt item gt identifier should be used for this The combo box saves the index of the currently selected text in the variable belonging to the CONTROL variable name The index starts with 1 Syntax lt item gt expression lt item gt lt control name buttonl xpos 10 ypos 10 fieldtype combo box gt lt item gt text1l lt item gt lt item gt text2 lt item gt lt item gt text3 lt item gt lt item gt text4 lt item gt lt control gt If an arbitrary integer value is to be assigned to an expression the attribute value value should be added to the item identifier Rather than consecutive numbers the control variable now contains the item s assigned value
371. tes caption Identifier for the title of the message window retvalue Identifier for the name of the variable to which the return value is copied retval 0 0 OK retval 1 1 Cancel type Identifier for acknowledging the message type btn_ok type btn_cancel type btn_okcancel 250 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language 8 5 14 OP Description Identifier for an execute statement All permissible operators may be executed For accessing the NCK PLC and drive data the complete variable name is to be placed in quotation marks Programming Identifier OP Syntax lt op gt arithmetic operation lt op gt Attributes Example lt OP gt tmpVar PLC MB170 lt OP gt lt OP gt tmpVar PLC MB170 5 lt OP Character string processing The operation instruction is able to process character strings and assign the results to the string variable specified in the equation The identifier _T should be placed at the start as a means of identifying text terms Formatting of variable values is also possible The identifier _F should be placed at the start of the formatting regulation followed by the format instruction The address is then specified for the variable Example lt LET name buffer type string gt lt LET gt lt op gt buffer T unformatted value RO nck Channel Parameter R 0 T and _T 850
372. th the appropriate MD setting the end acknowledgment for the job to prepare for a tool change permits the NCK preprocessing to continue The machine data with which the response of block preprocessing main run and the various acknowledgment responses are defined are described in Chapter Machine data for the tool management Page 313 The main NCK run can be continued with the end acknowledgment to the job Carry out tool change Therefore these end acknowledgments should take place as early as possible This can mean that the end acknowledgment can take place before the old tool is in the magazine e g the new tool is in the spindle the old tool in the toolboy The rest of the steps to bring the old tool into the magazine must then be communicated asynchronously The same interface should be used as for synchronous acknowledgments Turning and Milling 304 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Interface signal xx Spindle index tool holder Meaning DB42xx DBX0 0 DBX 3 6 PLC user program Preparing and carrying out acknowledgments for tool change DB42xx DBX9 0 PLC user program Resetting the message Acknowledgment error DB43xx DBX100 1 and the diagnostic information in the feedback interface DB43xx DBX0 0 Tool management Job for Prepare tool change and Execute tool change DB43xx DBB1 Tool management job specification
373. th the tools from the magazine list Additional tools without a magazine assignment can also be selected for tool changes The tool must be inserted in the machine manually and removed again manually after machining manual tool Loading magazine The loading magazine is the first internal magazine and is assigned magazine number 9999 The loading magazine has loading points for loading and unloading tools For the allocation of locations one is fixed all other locations can be assigned freely Location 1 in the loading magazine is used for the fixed assignment Location 1 is reserved for loading unloading to all spindles tool holders All positioning and relocation jobs to any locations not loading points are still handled via location 1 The stated jobs which refer to a particular loading point are output at the interface of this loading point The loading points are assigned to magazines during start up TC_MDP 1 A loading point is an open access point to the magazine where a tool is manually loaded and unloaded from the magazine Buffer Buffers are located in the second internal magazine The buffer includes the spindle tool holder gripper loader and transfer location The buffers are managed under magazine number 9998 Each buffer element is assigned a unique location Any location numbers may be assigned It is recommended that all spindles or tool holders be numbered in ascending order starting at number 1 The assignment t
374. that he she puts the appropriate tool onto the spindle for the data block stored in the NCK Tools which are loaded manually during machining are referred to as manual tools Note The responsibility is on the user to comply with the safety regulations via the PLC program An alarm 17212 17214 or 17216 is always output to indicate that a tool change involving a manual tool has been executed The alarm is reset by the tool change acknowledgment of the PLC user program The following types of tools are manual tools e Oversized tools e Tools that cannot be stored in the magazine e Tools that may not be handled by the gripper system Turning and Milling 296 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 2 PLC NCK user interface 9 2 PLC NCK user interface Overview The tool management receives tasks for preparing and carrying out a tool change T command M06 a tool movement MVTOOL or magazine positioning POSM from the part program or from the HMI From these tasks the TM defines the location change needed for the tool and assigns this to the PLC Program components and interfaces Figure 9 1 Interfaces of the tool management The user interface provides separate data blocks for loading unloading relocating and magazine positioning on the one hand and tool change on the other hand Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 297 Tool management
375. the Hirth tooth system in CYCLE800 If the Hirth tooth system causes the programmed rotation to deviate from the possible positions of the rotary axes a P_TOOLFRAME compensating frame is created for swivel head and mixed kinematics If the compensating frame must be retained after RESET or end of part program enter the following value in the channel specific machine data MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 52 Reset behavior of the G groups 2 For G17 TOROT 3 For G18 TOROTY 4 For G19 TOROTX 6 5 2 Setting the workpiece tool and rotary table reference Using the system frames System frames can be active after Reset or Power On in order e g to retract a drill from a swiveled position without causing a collision Using the following machine data you can set the workpiece tool and rotary table reference system frames or you can influence the behavior of the system frames MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Active system frames after reset Bit 4 System frame workpiece reference 0 Not active Il Remains active Turning and Milling 156 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Configuring cycles Turning and Milling 6 5 Swivel MD24007 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_MASK Deletion of system frames after reset Bit 4 System frame workpiece reference 0 Do not delete 1 Delete When used for measuring or swiveling in JOG
376. the magazine positions the storage location of the old tool that is currently in the spindle to the changing point The magazine location for the old tool is also positioned to the changing point if the old tool cannot be stored on the new tool location 1 1 change not possible The cause could be different location types or tool sizes or that a fixed location coded tool is involved In this case the tool change is carried out in two steps First the old tool in the magazine is set down and then the new tool is transported to the spindle gt continue with Step 3 Step 2 Position magazine location from new tool to changing point lt Previous step Step 1 For example the magazine movement can be executed via an NC rotary axis controlled by a PLC The movement should be notified to the tool management The magazine position is thus updated in the HMI in the views of the tool and magazine lists The target position is read from DB4300 DBW8 location number for new tool source and written to DB9901 DBW2 transfer step 101 If there is magazine coincidence at the target position the step is acknowledged asynchronously Turning and Milling 362 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status ment step tool tool 4s paz00pexo4 fron ft Acknowledgment to TM Transfer step f
377. the probes with NX module Probe status DB2700 General signals from NCK r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBBO EMER GENCY STOP active DBB1 Inch Probe actuated dimension Probe 2 Probe 1 system See also Measuring cycles and measurement functions Page 186 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 99 Commissioning the drive 4 2 Terminal assignments Turning and Milling 100 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Setting NCK machine data 5 5 1 Classification of machine data Authorization for machine data At least the Manufacturer password is necessary to enter or change machine data JN DANGER Changes in the machine data have a considerable influence on the machine Incorrect configuration of the parameters can endanger human life and cause damage to the machine Classification of machine data The machine data is divided into the following areas General machine data MN Channel specific machine data MC Axis specific machine data MA SINAMICS machine data Control Unit and drive machine data r0001 r9999 read only r0001 r9999 read write General setting data MNS Channel specific setting data MCS Axis specific setting data MAS Display machine data MM Note Machine data for turning and milling technologies is already set up i
378. the workpiece reference must be active on reset and not deleted cascaded measuring MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Active system frames after reset Bit 4 1 System frame for workpiece reference remains active after reset MD24007 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_MASK Deletion of system frames after reset Bit 4 0 Do not delete system frame workpiece reference after reset MD24008 MC_CHSFRAME_POWERON_MASK Reset system frames after power on Bit 2 System frame rotary table reference PAROT 0 Do not reset 1 Reset Bit 3 System frame tool reference TOROT 0 Do not reset 1 Reset Bit 4 System frame workpiece reference 0 Do not reset 1 Reset MD24080 MC_USER_FRAME_POWERON_MASK Settings for settable frames Bit 0 0 Settable work offset via power on not active 1 Last active settable work offset remains active after power on if MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 7 1 Use If work offset G5xx including all rotations is to remain active after power on Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 157 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Axial machine data for the modulo rotary axes of the swivel data set MD30455 MA_MISC_FUNCTION_MASK Axis functions Bit 0 Modulo rotary axis programming 0 No modulo rotary axis programming e g 0 to 359 999 degrees 1 Mod
379. tic tool change 3 No swivel data set active Manual swivel data set and tool change 4 Enable swivel data set Automatic swivel data set and tool change 5 Swivel data set active Automatic swivel data set change Manual tool change 6 Swivel data set active Manual swivel data set change Automatic tool change 7 Swivel data set active Manual swivel data set and tool change Retracting the geometry axes before swiveling The ONE MILLION and TEN MILLION positions of the system variable TC_CARR37 n define which retraction versions are displayed in the swivel input mask e Retraction of axis Z e Retract axes Z XY e Retract in the tool direction maximum or incremental Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 165 Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel Retracting axis Z or retracting axes Z XY is realized as an absolute machine position at the values of parameters TC_CARR38 n to TC_CARR40J n TC_CARR38 n Retraction position X TC_CARR3Q n Retraction position Y TC_CARR4O n Retraction position Z The type of retraction is modified in the manufacturer cycle CUST_800 SPF see also NOTICE When traversing the tool axes the following must be taken into account Retract the tool axis in such a way that the tool and workpiece cannot collide when swiveled Fine offsets of the the offset vectors
380. till mechanical movements to be executed before the tool change can be completed Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 365 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledg ment step Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Status tool Transfer step old tool DB4200 DBX0 1 gt continue with Step 9 Step 9 Old tool from spindle to gripper 2 Step 10 Old tool 366 Previous step Step 5 The PLC program controls the machine functions with which the gripper movements tool clamping etc are performed As soon as the mechanical movements are completed and acknowledged in the PLC user program the tool movements are acknowledged to the tool management Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledg ment step Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Status tool Transfer step old tool DB4200 DBX1 0 105 Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca tion Magazine Loca tion 2 DB9900 DBW8 9998 9998 Old tool from spindle to gripper 2 Step 6 or Step 9 gt continue with Step 10 from gripper 2 to magazine lt Previous step Step 9 The PLC program controls the machine functions with which the gripper movements tool clamping etc are performed As soon as the mechanical movements are completed and acknowledged in the PLC user program
381. ting area If however the specified force is reached during the cut off check i e travel to fixed stop is successful alarm 61255 Error during cut off Tool break is issued Note The Travel to fixed stop function can also be used when gripping the spindle see above If travel to fixed stop does not succeed when gripping an alarm will of course also be issued Instead of alarms 20091 and 20094 the alarm 61254 Error during travel to fixed stop will be issued Turning and Milling 148 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning Dimensions of the counterspindle To define the reference point for moving the counterspindle you must first announce the dimensions of the counterspindle You can either enter the dimensions in the following channel specific machine data or in the menu Tools zero offset gt gt gt Spindles Changes to the machine data are automatically accepted in the menu and vice versa MD52241 MCS_SPINDLE_CHUCK_TYPES Spindle jaw type 0 Main spindle 1 Counterspindle 0 Clamping outer 1 Clamping inner MD52242 MCS_MM_MAIN_SPINDLE_PARAMETER Main spindle parameters 0 Chuck dimensions 1 Stop dimensions 2 Jaw dimensions MD52243 MCS_MM_SUB_SPINDLE_PARAMETER Parameters for counterspindle 0 Chuck dimensions 1 Stop dimensions 2 Jaw di
382. tion in Magazine DB9901 DBWo 1 is positioned at the changing point to the spindle nis the actual location number n 0 to be entered by the PLC user program in the variable transfer table Example Tool change cycle for turning machine Transfer variables Sample program 348 With MD10717 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME name of cycle to be executed instead of the T function e g TCHANGE you can set that a cycle is run when the T command is called The cycle is run through at every T call irrespective of whether a new tool or the already active tool is called The position of the revolver can be set on the programmed tool in this cycle POSM This is necessary when the revolver has been positioned manually after a tool selection and the tool has not been deselected In this case the NC does not issue a new job for tool change at the interface Prerequisite is that the tool management has been informed of each magazine movement The example has been created for machine data with the turning technology default setting The Spare tools for tool management option is not active Transfer variables of the T replacement cycle Tag Description SC_T T number of the tool numerical SC_T_Prog Bool variable that shows whether a T word is available in C_T Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 7 Application example for turning machine
383. tool from gripper 1 to spindle 1 1 change The old tool is deposited in the location of the new tool Figure 9 8 Flow chart Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 361 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Description of the Procedure e NC program T command or T command with simultaneous tool change call M6 e Interface signals Job from TM DB43xx DBX0 0 job bit and DB43xx DBB1 command bits Prepare change DB43xx DBX1 2 e Magazine and location number of the tools to be moved DB43xx DBW6 to DBW20 Source location of the new tool target location of the old tool Step 1 1 1 Change requested Request Source location of the new tool Target location of the old tool Normal case There is a tool in the tool holder and a new tool is being requested Both tools have the same location type and the same tool size in the magazine list the tools are not fixed location coded The old tool is set down on the magazine location of the new tool in a direct exchange 1 1 change If there is no old tool in the tool holder DB4300 DBX1 4 the same sequence takes place In this case the magazine positions the new tool to the changing point gt continue with Step 2 Request Source location of new tool gt lt Target location of old tool Special cases The TM is informed by DB43xx DBX1 3 whether the active tool from the tool holder should be removed TO In this case
384. try indexes two transfer steps for the new and old tool and gives the corresponding status reached The acknowledgment step table in DB9902 is used jointly for acknowledgments on the interface of the loading point and on the interface of the tool holder DB9902 Acknowledgment step table r Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBBO Acknowledgment step 1 Transfer step for new tool BYTE DBB1 Acknowledgment step 1 Transfer step for old tool BYTE DBB2 Acknowledgment step 1 Acknowledgment status BYTE DBB3 Acknowledgment step 1 reserved DBB4 Acknowledgment step 2 Transfer step for new tool BYTE DBB5 Acknowledgment step 2 Transfer step for old tool BYTE DBB6 Acknowledgment step 2 Acknowledgment status BYTE DBB7 Acknowledgment step 2 reserved DBB116 Acknowledgment step 30 Transfer step for new tool BYTE DBB117 Acknowledgment step 30 Transfer step for old tool BYTE DBB118 Acknowledgment step 30 Acknowledgment status BYTE DBB119 Acknowledgment step 30 reserved See also PLC Program Blocks Page 320 Turning and Milling 312 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management Machine data default setting The following machine data has already been preset for tool management or will be set with default data during booting These settings can be changed a
385. ts are transferred correctly to the tool management 9 4 7 Overview Only one acknowledgment signal at a time may be sent to the tool management Synchronous acknowledgments are permissible only for the pending job Only valid transfer step numbers may be used 1 64 100 164 For asynchronous messages at least one transfer step must be input for status 201 for status 204 a transfer step for the new tool must be input Coded positions in the transfer steps may only be used for synchronous acknowledgments and only with the values 0 1 0 2 or 0 3 No illegal acknowledgment states may be used Magazine positioning with a job may only receive a synchronous acknowledgment end acknowledgment Intermediate positions must be reported to the tool management with asynchronous messages Acknowledgment signals must be reset by the PLC basic program After an acknowledgment bit is set the user interface may not be changed until the feedback message in DB41xx DB43xx DBB100 Asynchronous messages with two transfer steps must be acknowledged on the tool change interface DB42xx Information on magazine location It is possible to read up to eight NC variables in one job using the existing NC services interface DB1200 Location type TC_MPP2 with variables index 7 Parameter assignment Read variable from Address Signal Valid values the NCK Job DB1200 DBX0 0 Start 0 1 DB1200 DBX0 1 Write variable 0 DB1200 DB
386. ts with the My Documentation Manager MDM refer to http Awww siemens com mdm My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for generating your own machine documentation e Training and FAQs Information on our range of training courses and FAQs frequently asked questions is available via the page navigation This documentation is intended for commissioning personnel The plant or system is readily assembled and wired For the following steps e g configuring the individual components the Commissioning Manual contains all necessary information or at least references The intended target group can use the Commissioning Manual to test and commission the system or the plant correctly and safely Utilization phase Setup and commissioning phase Preface Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control However no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing Further for the sake of simplicity this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation operation or maintenance Structure of the documentation
387. ture of the help file The following entries are permitted in the help file Entry lt a name AlarmNo gt AlarmNo lt a gt Meaning Hyperlink to the alarm number lt td width 85 gt lt td gt 60 Help text for the corresponding alarm Text that is displayed after the Explanation or Remedy field Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Settings on the HMI 2 7 Creating OEM specitic online help Creating a help file The file name is language neutral and must be sinumerik_alarm_oem plc _pmc html lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt lt DOCTYPE html PUBLIC gt lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt table gt lt tr gt lt td width 15 gt lt b gt lt a name 700004 gt 700004 lt a gt lt b gt lt td gt lt td width 85 gt lt b gt Help for user PLC alarm 700004 lt b gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td valign top width 15 gt lt b gt Reaction lt b gt lt td gt lt td width 85 gt Reaction for user PLC alarm 700004 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td valign top width 15 gt lt b gt Remedy lt b gt lt td gt lt td width 85 gt Restart control lt td gt lt tr gt lt br gt lt tr gt lt td width 15 gt lt b gt lt a name 700005 gt 700005 lt a gt lt b gt lt td gt lt td width 85 gt lt b gt Help
388. ual location number n 0 to be entered by the PLC user program in the variable transfer table gt continue with Step 13 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC539 7 3DP20 0BA0 367 Tool management 9 8 Application example for milling machine Step 13 New tool from magazine to gripper 1 Previous step Step 12 The PLC program controls the machine functions used to execute gripper movements tool clamping etc Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status ment step tool tool 10 DB4200 DBX1 2 1 0 105 Transfer step from to Comment Magazine Loca Magazine Loca tion tion 1 0 1 9998 2 New tool from magazine to gripper 1 DB9900 DBWO Step 6 or Step 13 gt continue with Step 14 Step 14 New tool from gripper 1 to spindle 368 Previous step Step 13 The PLC program controls the machine functions with which the gripper movements tool clamping etc are performed As soon as the mechanical movements are completed and acknowledged in the PLC user program the tool movements are acknowledged to the tool management The tool change can be ended Acknowledgment to tool management Acknowledg Status ment step Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new tool Transfer step old tool DB4200 DBX1 3 3 do hoe Transfer step from to Comment
389. uffer combines all other locations in which tools can be placed spindle gripper Note The number of magazines which the NCK can manage is permanently set by the system The number of magazines is three for PPU260 261 and four for PPU280 281 Since at least one buffer and one loading point must be available the PPU260 261 can manage one real magazine and the PPU280 281 can manage two real magazines Magazines Information is provided by the system for all locations in the magazine describing the content and status of the locations The position of a tool is described by an identifier for the magazine and an identifier for the location Magazines have an identifier and a number magazine locations only a number In a real magazine chain turret etc the position of the tool is identified by the magazine number assigned during start up and the location within the magazine Example The T number of the tool in magazine location 7 in magazine 1 TC_MPP6 1 7 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0OBAO 293 Tool management 9 1 Fundamentals Tool list The tool list contains all the tools known to the NC These are the tools in the magazine and unloaded tools whose data is to be retained The tool management works with loaded tools from the tool list Magazine list The magazine list is a location oriented map of the tool magazine gripper and spindle The tool management only works wi
390. ulo rotary axis programming e g 180 to 180 degrees Bit 2 Positioning rotary axis 0 As programmed 1 Along the shortest path Use With the setting bit 2 1 then e g for G90 with DC rotary axis C travels along the shortest path See also Manufacturer cycle CUST_800 SPF MD32010 MA_JOG_VELO_RAPID AX AX axis name Rapid traverse in JOG rotary and machine axes that are traversed for swivel in JOG 10000 Rapid traverse in JOG mode for swivel in JOG D42980 SC_TOFRAME_MODE Setting frame definition for TOROT PAROT 2000 Swivel default setting D42974 SC_TOCARR_FINE_CORRECTION Fine offset TCARR swivel data set 0 No fine offset of the swivel data set vectors 1 Fine offset of the swivel data set vectors The parameters of the swivel data set as of TC_CARR41 n apply n Number of swivel data set Swivel in the JOG mode 158 Cycle alarms 62186 and 62187 can be hidden or displayed via the following machine data MD55410 MC_MILL_SWIVEL_ALARM_MASK Activate fault evaluation CYCLE800 Bit 0 Activates fault 61186 0 Hide fault 61186 Active work offset G 4 and base base reference contains rotations default setting 1 Display fault 61186 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Configuring cycles 6 5 Swivel MD55410 MC_MILL_SWIVEL_ALARM_MASK Bit
391. under turning 204_ Measured value correction using correction tables 211_ Measurement path 197 Measuring feedrate 197 Message asynchronous 321 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Milling Cylinder surface transformation 117 Measure tool in JOG 193 Measure workpiece 202 Measure workpiece in JOG 191 Multi edge CYCLE79 117 N NCK variables 332 Network connection 25 O Option 37_ 3D simulation 1 finished part 111_ Inclined axis 136 152 Measuring cycles 198 Residual material identification and machining 127_ ShopMill ShopTurn 105 115 121 139 159 _ Simultaneous recording real time simulation TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation 117 130 133 150 151 Travel to fixed stop with force control 146 11 P Password Change 33_ Set 33_ PI service 335_ PLC user alarms 40_ PLC user program 292 Aligning 331 PLC Firmware 293 Probe 97_ Assigning NC measuring input 188 Example of a test program 187_ Measure tool 186_ Measure workpiece 186_ Testing the function 187 PROG_EVENT 110 Programming Tool 14_ R RCS Commander 14 Residual material machining turning 127 RGB colors 385 Rotary axis vectors 161 RTC capacitor 18 411 Index S SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET 316_ Series start up 374 Setting data 101_ Setting date time 35_ Setting up measuring in JOG 189 ShopTurn Cylinder surface transfor
392. urning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO Easy Extend 8 8 Examples lt text xpos 23 ypos 34 gt AXCONF_MACHAX TAB 0 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos S54 gt AXCONF_ MACHAX TAB 1 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 74 gt AXCONF_MACHAX TAB 2 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 94 gt AXCONF_MACHAX TAB 3 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 114 gt Is rot axis 1 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 134 gt Is rot axis 2 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 154 gt Is rot axis 3 lt text gt lt text xpos 25 ypos 174 gt using combo box control lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 194 gt Is rot axis 1 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 214 gt Is rot axis 2 lt text gt lt text xpos 23 ypos 234 gt Is rot axis 3 lt text gt lt paint gt lt form gt Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 287 Easy Extend 8 8 Examples 8 8 3 User example for a power unit Activating the drive object The drive object to be activated has already been commissioned and deactivated again by the machine manufacturer to market the axis axes as an option To activate the axis carry out the following steps Activate the drive object via p0105 Enable the 2nd axis in the channel machine data Back up the drive machine data via p0971 Wait until the data has been written Restart the NCK and the drives Programming 288 lt
393. ut tool offset in the tool change subprogram for example traversing axes or output of auxiliary functions Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BA0O 313 Tool management 9 3 Machine data for the tool management Example Requirement MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 0 or 2 After the tool change command M206 the axes can continue travel without having to wait for the tool change acknowledgment and execute traversing blocks without tool compensation Travel only stops in a block with compensation selected D no until end of tool change is signaled by the PLC Sequence in the part program N20 M6 N10 M206 20 DO N10 T Drill18 Tool change subprogram L6 N N40 Y150 M79 N50 G01 D1 X10 Tool change preparation Tool change subprogram called Tool change Compensation deselected Traverse machine axes Activate tool compensation Check whether tool has been changed Preprocessing stop is maintained until tool change preparation is completed The main run waits at N50 D1 until tool change has been executed and acknowledged MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Settings MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Activating the tool management functions T and M version Bit 0 1 Tool management active The functions of tool management are enabled for the current channel Bit 1 Monitoring functions of tool management active Th
394. ute name Programming Identifier Syntax Attributes Call parameters Turning and Milling FUNCTION lt FUNCTION name function name gt name Function name return Variable name for saving the result of the function Call parameters are transferred as values of the XML statement The listed variables must be separated by a comma A maximum of 10 parameters can be transferred It is also possible to specify constants or text expressions as call parameters The identifier _T should be placed at the start as a means of identifying a text expression Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 245 Easy Extend 8 5 Description of the script language Example The calling function does not expect a return value lt FUNCTION name function name return variable name gt Parameter transfer lt FUNCTION name function name gt varl var2 var3 lt FUNCTION gt lt FUNCTION name function name gt T Text 1 0 1 lt FUNCTION gt 8 5 10 FUNCTION_BODY Description Function body This identifier forms the function body of a subfunction Programming Identifier FUNCTION_BODY Syntax e Function body lt FUNCTION_BODY name function name gt without parameter no lt FUNCTION_BODY gt e Function body with lt FUNCTION_BODY name function_name parameter p1 p2 parameter p3 gt lt let name tmp gt lt let gt lt op gt tmp p1 lt op gt lt FUNCTION_BODY gt
395. very precisely and with a high dynamic response They are designed for cycle times of up to 100 ms In many cases they have a very short time overload capacity thus allowing particularly fast acceleration Servo drives are available as rotary and as linear drives Smart Line Module SLM User views Turning and Milling Unregulated line infeed feedback unit with a diode bridge for feeding stall protected line commutated feedback via IGBTs The Smart Line Module provides the DC link voltage for the gt Motor Modules User views are user specific groups of machine data They are used to call all relevant machine data in a certain operating state from various areas for processing The user views are stored on the CompactFlash card with the following path user sinumerik hmi template user views The following user views are already available as template e Electrical_Startup e Mechanical_Startup e Optimizing_Axis Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 407 Glossary Turning and Milling 408 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Index MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT MD20270 313 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE MD22562 296 313 337 338 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MCODE MD22560 313 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE MD22550 295 313 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK MD20310 314 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER MD20124 313 MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK MD52270 315 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME MD10716 313 MN_MAXNU
396. wer Units Manual 90 Inputs Outputs Control unit MD Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Commissioning the drive 4 2 4 2 1 Terminal assignments Terminal assignment on X122 Terminal assignment X122 of the Control Unit PPU 4 2 Terminal assignments Pin no Function Assignment BICO source sink 1 Input ON OFF 1 infeed for CU r0722 0 Infeed p0840 Line Module with DRIVE CLiQ connection Infeed ready signal for SLM X21 1 Drive p0864 Line Module without DRIVE CLiQ connection 2 Input OFF3 quick stop CU r0722 1 Each drive 2nd OFF3 p0849 3 Input SH SBC 1 Group 1 CU r0722 2 p9620 all drives in the SINAMICS Safety Integrated group SH enable p9601 4 Input SH SBC 1 Group 2 CU r0722 3 p9620 all drives in the SINAMICS Safety Integrated group SH enable p9601 5 Ground for pins 1 4 6 24 V Output SH SBC 1 Group 1 CU p0738 p9774 bit 1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated BICO from CU after the first drive in the group 8 Output SH SBC 1 Group 2 CU p0739 p9774 bit 1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated BICO from CU after the first drive in the group 9 Ground for pins 7 8 10 11 10 Input BERO 1 zero mark substitute CU r0722 10 Drive p0495 2 11 Input Probe 1 Distributed measurement CU p0680 0 0 Every drive p0488 MD13210 1 Index encoders 1 2 3 3 12 Ground for pins 7 8 10 11 1 Low high edge required Tur
397. when it satisfies the filter criteria When several filters are defined these should be linked using the logical operators OR or AND The settings become effective only after restarting the HMI Note Number of events Each incoming or outgoing event of an alarm or message requires a separate entry even when they belong to the same alarm or message Acknowledgement events are also contained in the alarm log They also require an entry even when they are not recognizable in the alarm log Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6 C5397 3DP20 0BAO 45 Settings on the HMI 2 6 Configuring user alarms Examples 2 6 5 Introduction 46 All alarms that fulfill the following conditions are logged e CLEARINFO 15 therefore without part program messages lt CONFIGURATION gt lt Protocol gt lt Filters gt lt Siemens Filter 01 type QString value CLEARINFO NOT 15 gt lt Filters gt lt Protocol gt lt CONFIGURATION gt e SEVERITY larger than 10 and smaller than 500 lt CONFIGURATION gt lt Protocol gt lt Filters gt lt Filter 01 type QString value SEVERITY HIGHER 10 AND SEVERTY LOWER 500 gt lt Filters gt lt Protocol gt lt CONFIGURATION gt Configuring user alarms with colors For the display of alarms and messages user specific colors are configured in the alarm attribute file which are shown in the alarm or message line Not
398. wledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status ment step tool tool 1 DB4200 DBX0 1 0 0 1 gt continue with Step 5 e NC program M206 initiates the job for execute tool change e Interface signals Job from TM DB43xx DBX0 0 job bit and DB43xx DBB1 command bits Execute change DB43xx DBX1 1 e Magazine and location number of the tools to be moved DB43xx DBW6 to DBW20 Source location of the new tool target location of the old tool Step 5 1 1 change requested lt Previous step No previous step entry point in the sequence for Execute tool change job Similarly to Step 1 it is checked whether a direct change or a change in two steps is to be executed e 1 1 change possible gt continue with Step 6 e 1 1 change not possible gt continue with Step 9 Step 6 Old tool from the spindle to gripper 2 and new tool from the magazine to gripper 1 lt Previous step Step 5 The PLC program controls the machine functions with which the gripper movements tool clamping etc are performed As soon as the mechanical movements are completed and acknowledged in the PLC user program the tool movements are acknowledged to the tool management Acknowledgment to TM Acknowledg Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status ment step tool tool 5 DB4200 DBX0 5 1 2 105 Turning and Milling 364 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO Tool management 9 8 App
399. x 52207 Spnd Bit 3 Bit 4 DBX2001 6 Bit5 sf oo ao ey oa 0 0 1 1 P Ay af Turning and Milling 146 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 Contiguring cycles Turning and Milling 6 4 Turning Counter spindle direction of rotation 52207 C Ax 52207 Spnd DB380x 52207 Spnd Bit 3 Bit 4 DBX2001 6 Bit5 Ms o 0 1 0 0 ey r T The setting of machine data marked with assumes that the viewing direction was towards the negative coordinate axis If on the other hand you are looking towards the positive coordinate axis you need to reverse the values i e swap 0 and 1 The position to which the counterspindle travels when the program starts is defined in the following channel specific setting data SD55232 SCS_SUB_SPINDLE_REL_POS Retraction position Z for counterspindle In order that the counterspindle traverses to the fixed stop when gripping the following channel specific cycle data must be set D55550 SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_DIST D55551 SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_FEED SD55552 SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_FORCE Distance for travel to fixed stop Feedrate for travel to fixed stop Force for travel to fixed stop in Between traveling to the fixed stop and gripping the counterspindle can retract a short distance to counteract compressive stress in the workpiece SD55553 SCS
400. x Name Type No Identifier Infeed Line supply data identification selected active Motor Type Channel 2 MYI LIN 3 SERVO_3 3 5 3 M21 LIN 4 SERUVO_3 3 6 4 MSP1 SP 1 SERVO_3 3 3 Current access level Manufact Figure 4 25 Control Configuration of all axes Result Step 4 for commissioning of the drives is now complete Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 SRM CHANI SRM CHANI ARM CHANI 87 Commissioning the drive 4 1 Configuring the drive Data backup The configuration data is backed up after commissioning in the non volatile memory with the vertical softkey Save data Index Machine Axis Name DPO03 Slave003 SLM_3 3 2 2 Infeed Line supply data identification selected active Drive No Identifier 1 2 3 4 MX1 MY1 M21 MSP1 2 SERVO_3 3 4 Save data The data have been backed up successfully Current access level Manufact Figure 4 26 Data backup 4 1 6 Example Setting machine data for an axis spindle Axis machine data After the commissioning in the previous example the following values are set for the axis machine data Axis machine data X Y Z SP A 30130 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO 1 1 1 1 1 30230 MA_ENC_INPUT_NR 1 1 1 2 1 30240 MA_ENC_TYPE 1 1 1 1 4 31020 MA_ENC_RESOL 2048 2048 2048 1024 512 34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 1 1 1 1 0 88 Commissioning Manual 09 2009 Turn
401. xes main and tool spindle and counterspindle For example for a lathe with X and Z axes main spindle C1 tool spindle WZ and counterspindle C2 you can configure the following machine data MD20080 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB i Channel axis name in the channel 0 XC Channel axis XC 1 ZC Channel axis ZC 2 C1 Main spindle C1 3 WZ Tool spindle WZ 5 C2 Counterspindle C2 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BA0 129 Configuring cycles 6 4 Turning Lathe with X and Z axes main and tool spindle and Y axis For example for a lathe with X Z and Y axes main spindle C1 and tool spindle WZ you can configure the following machine data MD20080 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TABIi Channel axis name in the channel 0 XC Channel axis XC 1 ZC Channel axis ZC 2 C1 Main spindle C1 3 WZ Tool spindle WZ 5 YC Channel axis YC 6 4 4 Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Requirement Software option E You require the following software option in order to use this function TRANSMIT and peripheral surface transformation Function Using the cylinder surface transformation function TRACYL you can machine the peripheral surface of a turned part General settings for the cylinder surface transformation MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE Frames when switching over geometry axes 1 The
402. xes in the channel No special meaning Tool spindle driven tool Auxiliary spindle driven tool Main spindle turning C axis of the main spindle turning Counterspindle turning C axis of the counterspindle turning Linear axis of the counterspindle turning Tailstock turning Steady turning Enter the direction of rotation for the rotary axes that are not configured in a tool carrier or a 5 axis transformation via the following channel specific machine data MD52207 MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB i Attributes of the axes Bit 0 Rotation around 1st geometry axis for rotary axes Bit 1 Rotation around 2nd geometry axis for rotary axes Bit 2 Rotation around 3rd geometry axis for rotary axes Bit 3 Bit 4 Displayed positive direction of rotation is counter clockwise for rotary axes C axis Displayed direction of rotation for M3 is counter clockwise for spindles Bit 5 Direction of rotation for M3 corresponds to minus rotary axis for spindles Bit 5 must be set analog to the PLC signal on the spindle DB380x DBX2001 6 Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual 09 2009 6FC5397 3DP20 0BAO 107 Configuring cycles 6 1 Settings for activating cycles Setting the coordinate system Set the appropriate coordinate system in the channel via the following channel specific machine data MD52000 MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM

Commissioning Manual, Turning and Milling

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents